JP6954248B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration in which an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit are provided as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-045989

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to make the game content suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of making the game content suitable.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes a predetermined storage execution means for storing predetermined game information in the information storage means, and a predetermined storage execution means.
Progress control means to control the progress of the game,
A notification control means that executes notification processing based on the information transmitted by the progress control means is provided.
When the predetermined game information is stored in the information storage means, the game status is set to the predetermined game status.
The progress control means
Profit-giving processing execution means for executing profit-giving processing in a manner corresponding to the setting value set as the target of use from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage,
A setting-related execution means for executing a predetermined setting-related process related to the set value, and
When the setting-related processing is executed, a predetermined erasing means for executing a predetermined erasing process for erasing the information stored in the information storage means, and a predetermined erasing means.
With
The predetermined erasing means is configured to prevent the predetermined game information from being included in the erasure target when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the predetermined erasing process.
After executing the predetermined erasing process, the progress control means transmits specific information to the notification control means so that the notification control means can specify whether or not the predetermined game information is stored in the information storage means. Have the means to
When the notification control means receives the specific information corresponding to the fact that the predetermined game information is not stored in the information storage means, the information storage means corresponds to the fact that the predetermined game information is not stored in the information storage means. It is characterized in that it is provided with means for executing the notification process.

According to the present invention, it is possible to make the game content suitable.

It is a front view of the slot machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window part, and a combination line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. (A) is a front view of a common display area, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the content of information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the combined display unit. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the notification content of the stop order in an image display device, and the display content of a stop order in a dual-purpose display unit. It is an electric block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the start waiting process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bet correspondence processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the time of starting which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of a combination executed by the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lottery table for a normal mode at the time of three bets. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lottery table for a normal mode at the time of two bets. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels and the winning mode established when the lottery table for a normal mode is selected. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lottery table for 1st RT mode at the time of 3 bets. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode which holds when the lottery table for 1st RT mode is selected. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lottery table for 2nd RT mode at the time of 3 bets. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode which holds when the lottery table for 2nd RT mode is selected. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the index value which the winning probability is different among the set value of "1" to "6". It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the correspondence process at the end of a game executed by the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the game state and the game section existing in a slot machine. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the 1st section and 2nd section, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the content of each game state in 2nd section. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the 1st CB combination and 2nd CB combination, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the 1st CB state and the 2nd CB state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for CB executed in the main MPU. (A) to (h) It is a time chart which shows the state which the game state shifts to a CB state, and how the transition to a CB state is restricted. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the notification related to the winning state of the 1st CB combination and the 2nd CB combination (a) to (c). (A) to (j) are time charts showing how various notifications are executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of bets on the game medium. It is a flowchart which shows the internal notification control processing which is executed in the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the control process at the time of supply start executed by the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the non-internal middle notification process which is executed in the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st CB internal medium notification processing executed by the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notification in the 2nd CB which is executed in the production side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of the storage area of a main RAM. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the all clear process executed by the main MPU, and (b) is the flowchart which shows the partial clear process executed by the main MPU. (A) to (h) are time charts showing how a partial clear process and a full clear process are executed on the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control process of the game section executed by the main MPU. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning a direct hit in the ART state in the direct hit lottery process, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining each selection probability of the A to C modes in the lottery process of the stay mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each selection probability of immediate lighting and lighting standby in (c) lighting lottery processing of a section display part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stay mode. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the stay mode executed in the main MPU. It is a time chart which shows the timing which the section display part is switched from the off state to the lit state in the 2nd section (a) to (h). It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control process of the game section executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ending correspondence processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect control process which is executed in the effect side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous lottery process at the start of a game executed by the main MPU. (A) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of becoming a direct hit winning of an ART state in a direct hit lottery process, and (b) it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of becoming a transition winning of a pseudo-bonus state in a transition lottery process. .. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stop order notification control processing which is executed in the main MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the situation in the case where it is notified that the 1st stop is a left reel in the case of winning with an index value IV = 5, and (b) it is an explanatory diagram for demonstrating an index value IV = 5. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state in the case of being notified that the 1st stop is a right reel in the case of winning. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo-bonus processing at the start of a game executed by the main MPU, (b) explanatory drawing for explaining the probability of winning the transition of ART state in the transition lottery process of ART state. Is. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo-bonus process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous termination process executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production control processing for pseudo-bonus executed in the production side MPU. (A) to (h) are time charts showing how the pseudo-bonus state progresses. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution content of the end effect in an image display device, and is explanatory drawing for explaining the execution content of a revival effect in an image display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of ART state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating distribution of the number of games in ART state. It is a flowchart which shows the ART processing at the time of starting a game executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows ART state processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the loop lottery process which is executed in the main MPU. (A) to (e) are time charts showing how the loop lottery process is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the addition process of the next set executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the start process of this set executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process for ART which is executed in the effect side MPU. (A) to (g) are time charts showing how various effects are progressing in the first unit execution times. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the combination of the symbols which establishes the 1st CB prize and the combination of the symbols which establishes the 2nd CB prize in the 2nd Embodiment, and (b) the combination of the 1st CB combination or the 2nd CB combination. It is a time chart showing the flow of the game when the player is elected. It is a flowchart which shows the switching control processing of the internal notification executed by the production side MPU in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the end preparation state processing which is executed in the main MPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the loop lottery process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the start process of this set executed by the main MPU.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to the slot machine 10, which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape that is open forward as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with the shaft portion 12a provided on the left side thereof as a rotation shaft. The front door 12 is locked in an unopenable state by a locking device 13 provided on the back surface thereof, and this locked state is released by an unlocking operation with a predetermined key on the key cylinder 14.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the center of the front door 12. The game panel 20 is formed so that three vertically long display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R are arranged side by side. The display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R are formed of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape, respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. There is. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20. If the start lever 41 is operated while a game medium such as a medal or a virtual medal is bet, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are arranged directly below the display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped, respectively. The stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are in a state in which they can be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the left reel 32L.

The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, and the game medium. It corresponds to one game (game times) until the execution of various processes such as the granting of the game and the management of the game state is completed.

On the lower right side of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting a medal as an investment value is provided. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back surface of the front door 12 when reception is permitted, and when reception is prohibited. The medal discharge port 58 provided at the lower part of the front surface of the front door 12 leads to the medal tray 59 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a prize corresponding to the granting of the game medium is established on the main line ML described later. Have. Below the medal insertion slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 that is pressed when the medal inserted in the medal insertion slot 45 is jammed in the selector 52 is provided.

On the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, there is a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at a time, and two virtual medals at a time. A second credit insertion button 48 is provided. In the slot machine 10, there are a situation where the number of game media (medals or virtual medals) that can be bet (that is, bet setting) at one time is "3" and a situation where the number is "2".

The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and three or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of reducing the number of virtual medals by three. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of reducing the number of virtual medals by two. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "2", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of reducing one virtual medal. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of reducing the number of virtual medals by two. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of reducing one virtual medal.

If the number of virtual medals stored and stored is less than the difference between the current number of bets and the number of bets that can be bet, and the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, the number of bets is the number of the virtual medals. As the number of medals increases, the number of virtual medals becomes 0.

The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of reducing the number of virtual medals by two. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of reducing one virtual medal. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of reducing the number of virtual medals by two. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be bet at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored and stored. In that case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of reducing one virtual medal.

If the second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of virtual medals stored and stored is one and the current number of bets is "0", the number of bets is "1". At the same time, the number of virtual medals becomes 0.

The first credit insertion button 47 has a wider pressing surface than the second credit insertion button 48, which is pressed when the player operates the button. As a result, the operability of the first credit insertion button 47 is enhanced.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. The slot machine 10 has a credit function for storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached, and the virtual medals are stored and stored. When the settlement button 51 is operated under the above-mentioned situation, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal ejection port 58 as a real medal.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a power supply device 54 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 53 inside the housing 11. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and setting values of the slot machine 10 from "1" to "6". In order to change within the range of "", a setting key insertion hole 57 is provided in which a setting key owned by the manager of the game hall is inserted and operated.

Next, the symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 4 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Further, numbers are assigned from "0" to "20" corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers can be visually recognized by the main control device 70 described later from the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. It is a number for recognizing a symbol in such a state, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used for explanation.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), a "replay" symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L), a "watermelon" symbol (for example, the 18th on the left reel 32L), and " "Red 7" symbol (for example, 15th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (for example, 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (for example, 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol There are seven types (for example, the fifth of the left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of various symbols are different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

FIG. 5 is a front view of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Each display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be visually recognized. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

In the slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be visually recognized. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. When the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started with the specified number of game media bet and the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the benefit of granting the game medium, Either the benefit of replay or the transition of the gaming state is granted.

That is, in the slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which a prize can be established. The main line ML is set as a line extending in a straight line. Therefore, the sub-line SL1 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, and the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R are combined. Subline SL3 connecting the connected subline SL2 and the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the lower symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R Even if a combination of symbols to be won is established on a line extending in a straight line such as the sub line SL4 connecting the upper symbols, the prize is not established.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, the correspondence relationship between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege to be given when the prize is won will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won.

The small winning combination prizes in which the game medium is given include the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the first watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, and the cherry prize. Specifically, when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML. It will be the first bell prize. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second bell is won. Will be. If either the 1st bell prize or the 2nd bell prize is won, the number of game media to be granted is "11".

If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML, the first watermelon wins. Will be. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, the second watermelon wins. Will be. If either the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize is awarded, the number of game media to be granted is "5". When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "cherry" symbol on the main line ML, the cherry prize is won regardless of which of the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R. In the case of a cherry prize, the number of game media to be granted is "2".

Normal replay prize, 1st chance replay prize, 2nd chance replay prize, 1st RT replay prize, 1st There are 2RT replay prizes, 1st fall replay prizes and 2nd fall replay prizes. Specifically, when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, or the main line ML. In the above, when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, a normal replay prize is won.

When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the first chance replay It will be a prize. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second chance replay It will be a prize.

If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the 1st RT replay prize is won. Will be. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second RT replay prize is won. Will be.

When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the first fall replay It will be a prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the second fall replay It will be a prize.

If any of the above replay prizes are won, a replay privilege that enables the next game to be played while eliminating the need for betting on the game medium is granted. Specifically, if any of the replay prizes is won in the game in which the game medium of "3" is bet, the bet of the game medium is not required, and the game medium of "3" is bet in the next game. It becomes possible to start the game. In addition, if any of the replay prizes is won in the game in which the game medium of "2" is bet, the game of the next game is started with the game medium of "2" bet while eliminating the need to bet on the game medium. It becomes possible to do.

Of the various replay prizes described above, the 1st RT replay prize, the 2nd RT replay prize, the 1st fall replay prize, and the 2nd fall replay prize not only trigger the granting of the replay prize privilege, but also the transition to the lottery mode. In the slot machine 10, a plurality of types of lottery modes are set so that the types of the winning combination to be drawn and the winning probability of each winning combination are different in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). It occurs when the replay prize that triggers the transition to the lottery mode is established. The contents of each lottery mode and the conditions for transition to each lottery mode will be described in detail later.

There are a first CB prize and a second CB prize as a state transition prize in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol. In that case, the first CB prize will be awarded. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, the second CB It will be a prize. When the first CB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the first CB state, and when the second CB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the second CB state.

The first CB state and the second CB state are game states in which when the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped in the main line ML, medals are paid out as winning winnings regardless of whether or not there is a winning combination. For example, even if "1" is not set in the winning flag corresponding to the first bell winning, the game medium becomes a player when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first bell winning stops on the main line ML. Granted. On the other hand, the replay prize is established on the condition that the corresponding role is won in the lottery.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, reel control different from that in the non-CB state is performed. In the non-CB state, reel control capable of sliding up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. That is, in the non-CB state, reel control for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated until a predetermined time (190 msec) elapses. On the other hand, in the first CB state and the second CB state, the reel control is performed on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, that is, the reel control similar to that in the normal game is performed, but the reel control is not performed on the left reel 32L. For the left reel 32L, reel control is performed in which the left stop button 42 is operated and then the reel is slid only up to one symbol. That is, in the first CB state and the second CB state, reel control for stopping the left reel 32L is performed for the left reel 32L until a specified time (75 msec) shorter than the specified time elapses after the left stop button 42 is operated.

In the 1st CB state and the 2nd CB state, the reel control that slides only up to 1 symbol is not limited to the left reel 32L, and the reel corresponding to the first operated stop button has a maximum of 1 symbol. Control that slides only up to is performed, and reel control that slides only a maximum of one symbol may be performed only for a predetermined reel. Furthermore, the stop buttons operated in a certain order, such as reel control that slides only up to one symbol for the reel corresponding to the second operated stop button or the last operated stop button. Reel control may be performed so that only one symbol can be slipped on the reel corresponding to the above.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, if the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning is won, the replay winning is prioritized, and if the replay winning is not possible, the first bell winning can be established. In addition, the first bell winning can be established even if the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning is not won.

Both the first CB state and the second CB state are gaming states that do not increase the gaming medium owned by the player. Furthermore, both the first CB state and the second CB state are the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state rather than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. It is a game state to reduce. Details of these first CB states and second CB states will be described later.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are provided on the upper part of the front door 12, and an image display device 63 is provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is light-emitting controlled so as to perform a light-emitting effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 63. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the sound output is controlled so that the sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and the sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Sound output is controlled so that Further, the speaker 62 is controlled in sound output so that the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, or it may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the display is controlled so that the image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 is displayed and controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface. That is, the image display device 63 executes the display effect.

The game panel 20 of the front door 12 has a credit display unit 65 that displays the number of virtual medals stored and stored at positions below the display window units 21L, 21M, and 21R, and is a target of granting when a small winning combination is won. When the number of game media is displayed and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified on the image display device 63, the display corresponding to the notified content is performed, and further, the management result of the game history is notified. A combined display unit 66 for displaying the reels and a section display unit 67 for displaying the game section corresponding to the second section are provided. The credit display unit 65 is composed of a 7-segment display, and a monochromatic light emitting type LED such as green is used for each segment.

FIG. 7A is a front view of the common display area 68 provided with the combined display unit 66 and the section display unit 67. In the common display area 68, as shown in FIG. 7A, two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction to provide a combined display unit 66 and one light emitting unit. The section display unit 67 and the like are aggregated.

If any of the small winning combination prizes (1st bell winning, 2nd bell winning, 1st watermelon winning, 2nd watermelon winning or cherry winning) corresponding to the grant of the game medium are established, the small winning combination is established. At the end of the game, the number of game media granted corresponding to the small winning combination is displayed on the combined display unit 66. Specifically, when either the first bell prize or the second bell prize is established in the non-CB state, "1" is displayed on each of the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b. By doing so, it is notified that the game medium of "11" has been added. If either the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize is established in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "5". By doing so, it is notified that the game medium of "5" has been added. Further, when the cherry winning is established in the non-CB state, the 7-segment display 66a on the left side is hidden and "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right side, so that the game medium of "2" is displayed. Is notified that has been given.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, the number of game media given by winning a small winning combination is "1", as will be described in detail later. Therefore, when a small winning combination is established in the first CB state or the second CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "1" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. It is notified that the game medium of "1" has been added.

On the other hand, even if a prize such as one of the replay prizes or one of the CB prizes that is not given a game medium is established, the display corresponding to the prize is not displayed on the combined display unit 66, and in this case, each The 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are maintained in a hidden state. The display of the number of game media granted on the combined display unit 66 ends when the game medium is bet to start the next game of the game in which the display is performed, and each 7-segment display is displayed at the bet timing. The vessels 66a and 66b are hidden.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, the information corresponding to the notified stop order is displayed on the combined display unit 66. FIG. 7B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the combined display unit 66. As shown in FIG. 7B, in the slot machine 10, the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the middle reel as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R notified by the image display device 63. The stop order is 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the stop order is the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop. Is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is. The stop order is the left reel 32L, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R. The 2 stops are the middle reel 32M and the 3rd stop is the left reel 32L, the stop order is the 1st stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary, and the 1st stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest is There is an arbitrary stop order and a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary.

The notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 is that when the winning combination including the first bell winning data is won in the lottery process of the winning combination in the non-CB state, when the winning combination including the first RT replay winning data is won, the second RT replay is performed. It can be executed when the winning combination including the winning data is won, when the winning combination including the first falling replay winning data is won, or when the winning combination including the second falling replay winning data is won. Specifically, when a winning combination including the first bell winning combination is won, the first bell is won when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. Is established. Then, when the first bell prize is established, the game medium of "11" is given to the player as described above.

When a winning combination including the 1st RT replay winning data is won, the 1st RT replay winning is established when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. Then, when the 1st RT replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts to the 1st RT mode in which it is easier to win a combination including any of the replay winning data (that is, it is easier to establish any of the replay winnings) than in the normal mode. .. In addition, when a winning combination including the 2nd RT replay winning data is won, the 2nd RT replay winning is established when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. .. Then, when the 2nd RT replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts to the 2nd RT mode in which it is easier to win a role including any of the replay winning data (that is, it is easier to establish any of the replay winnings) than in the 1st RT mode. do.

When a combination including the first fall replay winning data is won, the first fall replay winning is avoided when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. NS. If the first fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the normal mode, but by avoiding the establishment of the first fall replay prize, the transition to this normal mode can be avoided. .. In addition, when a winning combination including the second fall replay winning data is won, the second fall replay winning is won when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. Avoided. If the second fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode will shift from the second RT mode to the first RT mode, but by avoiding the establishment of the second fall replay prize, the transition to the first RT mode should be avoided. Can be done.

When any of the above stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a in the combined display unit 66 is maintained in a hidden state, while the right 7-segment display 66b is maintained. Is displayed corresponding to the stop order of the notification target. This display content is as shown in FIG. 7B, and the display content of the stop order of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is set to correspond one-to-one with the notification content of the stop order in the image display device 63. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a configuration in which a plurality of types of display contents of the dual-purpose display unit 66 are set to correspond to a part or all of the notification contents of the stop order in the image display device 63. May be good.

The display content of the stop order on the combined display unit 66 is different from the display content to be displayed when the display corresponding to the addition of the game medium is performed on the combined display unit 66. As a result, it becomes easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the combined display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media provided or the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

8 (a) and 8 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order in the image display device 63 and the display content of the stop order in the combined display unit 66.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 8A, the image display device 63 has the same number of stop operations required to end the game. The unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and the image display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in each unit display image G1 to G3. Specifically, the left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, the middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and the right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. Further, in FIG. 8A, the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. , The image of "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L is displayed on the left unit display image G1, and the image of "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M is displayed on the middle unit display image G2. , The image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image G3.

In the image display device 63, an image notifying the stop order itself of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed as described above, whereas in the combined display unit 66, as shown in FIG. 8B, the reels are displayed. "L" corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed. That is, in the image display device 63, the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to each unit display image G1 to G3 are stopped in the stop order. While the corresponding image display is performed, the combined display unit 66 displays a display irrelevant to the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result, even if the combined display unit 66 displays the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the notification content of the stop order, the player can pay attention to the display content on the image display device 63.

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63. From this point as well, it is possible to reduce the degree of attention of the player to the combined display unit 66 as compared with the image display device 63. Further, the combined display unit 66 exists on the side opposite to the image display device 63 side with the display window units 21L, 21M, 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, 32R visible. As a result, the combined display unit 66 is arranged at a position separated from the image display device 63, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63 are supported. The display is started after the winning combination lottery process is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is activated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 is started before the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63. However, these displays may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time, and the display start order may be reversed. Further, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the combined display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a stop command for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. Is terminated when

The combined display unit 66 is arranged on the center side in the common display area 68, while the section display unit 67 is arranged on the corner side of the common display area 68. The section display unit 67 is a display unit for notifying that the game section is the second section of the first section and the second section. The second section is the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the player to win a prize that is advantageous to the player when the winning combination to be established is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. By notifying the stop order, the expected acquisition value of the game medium in one game (the expected value of the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in one game") It is a section in which an advantageous gaming state (preparation state, pseudo-bonus state, and ART state) that can be 1 or more can be started, and the advantageous gaming state can be continued. On the other hand, the first section is a section in which the advantageous gaming state is not started and the advantageous gaming state does not continue.

When the section display unit 67 wins a winning combination with different winning targets depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or a winning combination with different winning positions depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In the advantageous game state where the expected value of the game medium is 1 or more by notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of a winning prize that is advantageous to the player, the lighting state is set. Become. In this case, the prepared state, the pseudo-bonus state, and the ART state correspond to the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state, while the second section, which is not the prepared state, the pseudo-bonus state, and the ART state, does not correspond to the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when the section shifts from the first section to the second section, the section display unit 67 may or may not switch from the off state to the lit state. When the section display unit 67 is maintained in the off state when shifting to the second section, the section display unit 67 is turned off when any of the preparation state, the pseudo bonus state, and the ART state is started in the second section. It changes from the state to the lighting state.

When the section display unit 67 becomes lit, the lit state is maintained until the second section ends, and when the second section ends and the first section shifts to the first section, the section display unit 67 turns off. Therefore, the second section may be maintained even if the pseudo-bonus state or ART state ends and returns to the normal gaming state. In this case, the section display unit 67 even if the pseudo-bonus state or ART state ends. Is maintained in the lit state, and when the second section ends, the section display unit 67 is turned off.

As described above, the section display unit 67 is provided collectively in the common display area 68 in a configuration in which the lighting state is maintained until the end of the second section once the lighting state is set in the second section. The display unit 66 is turned on when the game medium is added and turned off at the start of the next game, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed on the image display device 63. In some cases, it is turned on and turned off at the end of the game. Therefore, in the configuration in which the section display unit 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 so as not to be too conspicuous to the player, only the section display unit 67 is lit in the common display area 68 in the situation of the second section. It is possible to positively generate a situation in which the state is in a state, and it is possible for the manager of the game hall to easily confirm the section display unit 67.

In the second section, instead of the configuration in which the lighting state of the section display unit 67 is maintained, in the second section, the section display unit 67 may perform blinking display at a predetermined cycle. Further, other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used as the combined display unit 66 and the section display unit 67.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main control device 70 is attached to a back plate 11b that raises a back surface portion of the housing 11. The main control device 70 is configured such that the main control board 71 is housed in the board box 81. The MPU 72 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 71. The substrate box 81 is transparently formed so that the MPU 72 housed in the substrate box 81 can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 81. Although the substrate box 81 is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 housed in the substrate box 81 can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 so that the facing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10 in the board box 81. Therefore, by opening the front door 12 to the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 to expose the internal space of the housing 11, the facing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 can be visually recognized. The MPU 72 can be visually observed through the facing wall portion 82.

The substrate box 81 is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies in the front-rear direction, and the plurality of case bodies are used to prevent the case bodies from being separated and to leave a trace thereof when the case bodies are separated. A connecting portion 83 is provided. A plurality of connecting portions 83 are arranged side by side on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 81. As a result, even if the case body is separated by destroying the part of the joint portion 83 in a state where the separation of the case body is prevented by using a part of the joint portion 83, another joint portion is subsequently separated. By putting 83 in the bonded state, it is possible to prevent the separation of the case body again. Further, when the case body is separated, the joint portion 83 is destroyed and its trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body is illegally separated by visually checking the joint portion 83. Become. Further, in the substrate box 81, a sealing seal 84 is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies on one side different from the one side on which the connecting portions 83 are arranged side by side. When the sealing seal 84 is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, when the sealing seal 84 is peeled off when the case body is separated, it is possible to leave a trace thereof.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70. The effect control device 90 is arranged so as to be overlapped behind the image display device 63 at the front door 12. The effect control device 90 executes control of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 based on the command received from the main control device 70. In the effect control device 90, the control board is housed in the board box as in the main control device 70.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main control device 70 as described above. The MPU 72 is a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 73 is executed. A RAM 74, a first random number circuit 75 that sequentially updates the first random number within a predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal output from the clock circuit, and a second random number based on the clock signal output from the clock circuit. A second random number circuit 76 that sequentially updates within a predetermined numerical range and a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency are provided. In addition to that, the MPU 72 has an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 72, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 72, the reel unit 31, the start detection sensor 41a for detecting the operation of the start lever 41, the stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a for individually detecting the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, and the medal insertion Insertion medal detection sensor 45a that detects the medals inserted from the mouth 45, credit insertion detection sensors 47a and 48a that individually detect the operation of each credit insertion button 47 and 48, and settlement detection sensor 51a that detects the operation of the settlement button 51. , The payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, the reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided in the power supply device 54, the setting key detection sensor that detects that the setting key has been inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57, and the like. Various sensors are connected, and signals from each of these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

The reel unit 31, the selector drive unit 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the combined display unit 66, the section display unit 67, the effect control device 90, and the like are connected to the output side of the MPU 72. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31 is performed by the MPU 72. The selector 52 detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is permitted, and then guides the medal to the hopper device 53, and when reception is prohibited, the selector 52 is guided to the insertion medal detection sensor 45a. It has a function of discharging to the medal tray 59 without detecting the medal. The selector drive unit 52a has a function for switching the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state. Specifically, the passage switching piece provided in the selector 52 is positioned for reception permission. And operate between the reception prohibition position. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the reception permitted state and the reception prohibited state by switching the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

Further, the MPU 72 executes the drive control of the hopper device 53 when the small winning combination is established and the medal is paid out. Further, the MPU 72 displays and controls the combined display unit 66 so that when the game medium is given, the number of the game media to which the game medium is given is displayed. Further, the MPU 72 displays and controls the section display unit 67 so that the notification of the second section is performed when the notification start trigger occurs in the case of the second section. Further, the MPU 72 controls the display of the combined display unit 66 so that the display corresponding to the management result of the game is performed. Further, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 90 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to notify the effect control device 90 of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63. In that case, the display control of the combined display unit 66 is executed so that the display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the effect control device 90, whereas the direct display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed by the MPU 72. That is, for the image display device 63 that is the execution target of the relatively complicated display control, the direct display control is executed by the effect control device 90, and the combined display unit 66 that is the execution target of the relatively simple display control. Direct display control is executed in the MPU 72. As a result, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes the improvement of attention to the effect and a display that emphasizes reliability while reducing the processing load of the MPU 72.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply device 54 includes a power supply unit that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit is applied to the power supply unit from an external power source. The voltage is monitored, and when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the reference voltage, a power failure signal is output to the MPU 72. The MPU 72 executes the power failure processing by receiving the power failure signal, and makes it possible to return to the processing state before the power failure after the power is restored. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power supply unit during power failure to supply backup power to the RAM 74 as power during power failure in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power source is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, the data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in the situation where the backup power can be supplied by the power supply unit during the power failure (for example, 1 day or 2 days). Will be done.

The effect control device 90 includes an effect control board 91 for controlling various notifications and execution of various effects. The MPU 92 is mounted on the effect control board 91. The MPU 92 is a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A RAM 94 is built in, and a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like that output a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency are built in.

It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped. Further, the RAM 94 is configured such that the backup power is not supplied from the power supply unit during the power failure of the power supply device 54 when the supply of the operating power from the external power supply is cut off, but the backup power is supplied to the RAM 94. May be good.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. As described above, the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and various commands are received from the MPU 72. An upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. Based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 executes various notifications and various effects by executing light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63. To be done.

Although not shown, the effect control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the image display device 63. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data in the video RAM, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the image display device 63. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the image display device 63. The character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 92 determines the execution content of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 sets the VDP as a drawing list instructing the content of the image corresponding to each update timing according to the execution content of the determined effect. Output. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and creates display data in the video RAM using the read image data. Then, the VDP outputs the image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, so that the image display device 63 displays the image corresponding to the display data.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, the main ROM 73, and the main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the effect control device 90 are referred to as the effect side, respectively. It is called MPU 92, directing side ROM 93, and directing side RAM 94.

Next, the process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main process executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, the initialization process is first executed (step S101). In the initialization process, interrupts by timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are performed for the register group in the main MPU 72, the I / O device, and the like. After that, it is determined whether or not the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S102). If the power is turned on while the setting key is turned on (step S102: YES), and if the reset button 56 is not pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: NO), After the partial clearing process is executed (step S104), the set value update process is executed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: YES), the set value update process is executed after the all clear process is executed (step S105) (step S106). In the partial clear process (step S104) and the full clear process (step S105), a part or all areas of the main RAM 74 are initialized. The contents of the partial clearing process (step S104) and the full clearing process (step S105) will be described later.

In the setting value update process, the current setting value is read on condition that the setting key is inserted and the ON operation is performed, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. When the set value update process is executed, since either the partial clear process (step S104) or the full clear process (step S105) is executed before that, the credit is displayed at the start of the set value update process. A display corresponding to the set value of "1" is performed on the unit 65. In the set value update process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. If the reset button 56 is operated while the set value is "6", the set value is updated to "1". When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the set value selected at that time becomes the set value set in the current set value update process, and the set value update process ends. do. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display unit 65 ends. After that, the process proceeds to normal processing (step S107). The normal processing will be described in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process after step S108 is executed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power is cut off. In the power recovery process, it is determined whether or not the set value of the slot machine 10 is normal by checking the main RAM 74 (step S108). Specifically, when the set value is any one of "1" to "6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S109). The power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 74, and when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and the predetermined power failure process is normally executed, the power failure flag is set to "1". Will be set. When the power failure flag is set to "1", it is confirmed whether or not the RAM determination value is normal (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to confirm whether or not the value is normal.

When an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S108 to S110, it means that the power failure processing at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 74 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and the data saved in the main RAM 74 is returned to the register of the main MPU 72, so that the register of the main MPU 72 The state is returned to the state before the power was cut off (step S111). Further, the power failure flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). After that, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process to the effector MPU 92 (step S113), the process returns to the address before the power is cut off (step S114).

In the return command, information indicating whether or not any of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data, which will be described later, is stored in the main RAM 74 is set. That is, in step S113, it is specified whether or not the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the first CB winning data is stored, information indicating that the first CB winning data is stored. The return command in the state in which is set is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. Further, in step S113, it is specified whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the second CB winning data is stored, information indicating that the second CB winning data is stored. The return command in the state in which is set is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. Further, in step S113, when it is specified that both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are not stored in the main RAM 74, both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are not stored. A return command in a state in which the information indicating that is set is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in any of steps S108 to S110, the operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S115), and all the actuators connected to the output port are cleared by clearing all the output ports of the main MPU 72 to "0". Is set to the OFF state (step S116), and an error notification process for notifying the hall manager and the like of the occurrence of an error is executed (step S117). Then, it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is released by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a complete clear process (step S105).

Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is started every 1.49 milliseconds, for example.

In the register save process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is confirmed whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag, and if "1" is set in the power failure flag, the process proceeds to step S203 to execute the power failure processing.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, this processing is terminated to return to the timer interrupt processing, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74. After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a determination value for determining whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 74, and subsequent RAM access is prohibited. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in case the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If "1" is not set in the power failure flag in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S205, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the main MPU 72 itself. In step S206, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

In step S207, the states of various sensors connected to the input port are read, and a sensor monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the read result is normal is performed. Here, the slot machine 10 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting fraudulent activity on the hopper device 53. As described above, the hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 59 when a prize corresponding to the addition of the game medium is established on the main line ML. The hopper device 53 is provided with a payout device for paying out medals stored in the storage tank toward the medal discharge port 58, and a payout detection sensor for detecting medals paid out from the payout device. .. When it becomes necessary to pay out the game medium, medals are paid out by driving and controlling the payout device, and the paid out medals are detected by the payout detection sensor. Then, when the number of medals detected by the payout detection sensor reaches the number of game media to be paid out, the payout of medals from the payout device is stopped. In this case, the number of medals to be actually paid out is increased by inserting a fraudulent jig from the front of the slot machine 10 through the medal discharge port 58 so that the payout detection sensor cannot detect medals by the fraudulent jig. It is assumed that cheating will cause more medals to be paid out than medals. In this slot machine 10, although the payout device is driven and controlled so as to pay out medals, if the payout detection sensor does not detect the medal for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the payout device is driven as an abnormal payout. Although the control will be stopped, if the above-mentioned fraudulent acts are performed, a large number of medals will be paid out during the above-mentioned predetermined period. When a payout abnormality occurs, an abnormality notification is executed, but the abnormality notification is canceled by performing an abnormality release operation on the key cylinder 14 after replenishing the medals.

In response to the above fraudulent activity, the slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting an object moving from the medal ejection port 58 toward the payout detection sensor. A plurality of the object detection sensors are provided along the path from the medal discharge port 58 to the payout detection sensor. In the sensor monitoring process of step S207, when each object detection sensor is in the detection state in the order of the object detection sensor on the payout detection sensor side → the object detection sensor on the medal discharge port 58 side within the abnormality detection period (for example, 5 seconds). However, if each object detection sensor is in the detection state in the order of the object detection sensor on the medal discharge port 58 side → the object detection sensor on the payout detection sensor side within the above abnormality detection period, an intrusion abnormality is detected. Judge. When it is determined that the intrusion abnormality is determined, "1" is set in the intrusion abnormality flag provided in the main RAM 74, and the intrusion abnormality command corresponding to the intrusion abnormality is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. As a result, the effect side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the intrusion abnormality notification is executed. The intrusion abnormality notification is temporarily stopped by stopping the supply of the operating power of the slot machine 10, but when "1" is set in the intrusion abnormality flag of the main RAM 74 after the supply of the operating power is restarted. Since the intrusion abnormality command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 again, the intrusion abnormality notification is restarted. In order to release the state in which "1" is set in the intrusion abnormality flag, it is necessary to execute a partial clear process (step S104) or a complete clear process (step S105).

In step S208, a timer subtraction process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S209, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the outside. In step S210, a command output process for transmitting various commands to the effect side MPU 92 is performed. In step S211 a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port is performed. In step S212, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 is returned to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72.

In step S213, a management process for managing the game history and displaying the content corresponding to the management result on the combined display unit 66 is executed. Specifically, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section, which will be described later, to the total number of games is calculated, and the ratio of the calculation result is displayed on the combined display unit 66. In this case, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section to the total number of games may be calculated for each set value. In this configuration, even if the set value is changed, the calculation may be continued without initializing the information of the above ratio performed for each set value. After that, in step S214, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (step S301). After that, the start waiting process is executed (step S302). FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the start waiting process.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the bet set flag at the time of replay provided in the main RAM 74 (step S401). The bet set flag at the time of replay specifies whether or not the same number of bets as the previous bet number has already been set by the main MPU 72 when any of the replay prizes has been established in the previous game. It is a flag to do. When a negative determination is made in step S401, the bet number setting counter 74a provided in the main RAM 74 is provided on the condition that one of the replay winnings is established in the previous game (step S402: YES) (FIG. 9). (See), the value of the bet number history counter also provided in the main RAM 74 is set (step S403). The bet number setting counter 74a is a counter for specifying the bet number of the game to be executed by the main MPU 72, and the bet number history counter is for specifying the bet number of the previous game by the main MPU 72. It is a counter of. After that, "1" is set in the bet set flag at the time of replay (step S404).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S401, a negative determination is made in step S402, or the process of step S404 is executed, the bet handling process is executed (step S405). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the bet handling process.

When the current game state is not the second CB state (step S501: NO), "3" is set as the upper limit number of bets that is the upper limit number of game media that can be bet in this game (step S502). When the current game state is the second CB state (step S501: YES), "2" is set as the upper limit number of bets that is the upper limit number of game media that can be bet in this game (step S503). That is, in the slot machine 10, the upper limit of bets is set to "2" when the slot machine 10 is in the second CB state, and the upper limit of bets is set to "3" when the slot machine 10 is not in the second CB state.

When the process of step S502 or step S503 is executed, the stored virtual medals are stored on condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is not the current bet upper limit number (step S504: NO). It is determined whether or not one or more cards have been used and a valid betting operation has been performed (step S505). The main RAM 74 is provided with a credit counter 74b (see FIG. 9) as an area for storing the number of virtual medals stored and stored. In step S504, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter 74b is 1 or more, thereby determining whether or not the number of stored virtual medals is 1 or more. Further, when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, it is determined that a valid bet operation has been performed, and when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is set. It is determined that a valid betting operation has been performed on condition that the value is 1 or less.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S505, the bet setting process is executed (step S506). In the bet setting process, when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is equal to or greater than the bet upper limit number, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is set. While setting the maximum number of bets, the value for the number of virtual medals used in the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and the sum of the value of the number of bets setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than the maximum number of bets. If so, the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0" after the value of the credit counter 74b is added to the bet number setting counter 74a. Further, in the bet number setting process, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is 2 or more, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a. Is set to "2", the value for the number of virtual medals used in the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than 2. If so, the value of the credit counter 74b is added to the bet number setting counter 74a, and then the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

When a positive judgment is made in step S504, a negative judgment is made in step S505, or the process of step S506 is executed, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a indicates that a medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 45. It is determined whether or not one medal has been detected (step S507). When an affirmative determination is made in step S507, if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is less than the upper limit number of bets (step S508: NO), the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is added by 1 (step S509). ), If the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of bets (step S508: YES), the value of the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S510). When the process of step S509 or step S510 is executed, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of bets, and the value of the credit counter 74b is equal to or greater than the upper limit storage storage number (specifically, “50”). (Step S511: YES), the acceptance prohibition process is executed (step S512). By executing the acceptance prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal tray 59 without being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a.

When a negative determination is made in step S507, a negative determination is made in step S511, or the process of step S512 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the first CB state (step S513). .. When the current gaming state is the first CB state (step S513: YES), the acceptance provided in the main RAM 74 is provided on condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is “3” (step S514: YES). “1” is set in the bet set flag at the time (step S515). On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the first CB state (step S513: NO), the bet set flag at the time of acceptance is set on condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is 2 or more (step S516: YES). Is set to "1" (step S515).

The bet set flag at the time of acceptance is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the number of game media that can start one game is bet. When the game state is the first CB state, one game cannot be started in a situation where the game medium of "3" is not bet, and 1 when the game medium of "3" is bet. It is possible to start the game once. Further, when the game state is not the first CB state, one game cannot be started in a situation where two or more game media are not bet, and one by betting two or more game media. It is possible to start the game once.

Returning to the description of the start waiting process (FIG. 13), after executing the bet handling process in step S405, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 51 has been operated (step S406). When the settlement button 51 is operated (step S406: YES), after executing the settlement process (step S407), the bet set flag at the time of receiving the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S408). In the settlement process of step S407, when "1" is not set in the bet set flag at the time of replay of the main RAM 74, the number of sheets corresponding to the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b. The hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the medals of No. 1 are ejected to the medal tray 59. In this case, the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" and the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0". On the other hand, when "1" is set in the bet set flag at the time of replay of the main RAM 74, the hopper device 53 is set so that the number of medals corresponding to the value of the credit counter 74b is discharged to the medal tray 59. Drive control. In this case, the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

Returning to the description of the normal process (FIG. 12), after executing the start waiting process in step S302, "1" is set for either the bet set flag at the time of replay or the bet set flag at the time of acceptance in the main RAM 74. Is set or not (step S303). If a negative determination is made in step S303, the process returns to step S302. If an affirmative determination is made in step S303, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to step S302.

When the start lever 41 is operated (step S304: YES), the reception prohibition process is executed after the main line ML is activated (step S305). By executing the acceptance prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal tray 59 without being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a.

After that, in step S306, the setting process at the start for performing various settings when the game is started is executed, and in step S307, the loop lottery process for performing the lottery corresponding to the ART state is executed, and the step In S308, the winning combination lottery process for drawing the winning combination in the current game is executed, and in step S309, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are driven and controlled in a manner corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process. Executes the reel control process for

After that, the medium addition process is executed (step S310). In the medium granting process, when a small winning combination is established in this game, a process for granting a number of game media corresponding to the small winning combination to the player is executed. Specifically, when a virtual medal is given, the value corresponding to the current small winning combination is added to the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74, and the value of the credit counter 74b reaches the upper limit storage storage number. Drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that a number of medals exceeding the upper limit storage storage number are paid out to the medal tray 59. Further, in the medium giving process, the display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display corresponding to the number of the game media to be given this time is performed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the combined display unit 66 is continued until a new bet is made on the game medium.

After that, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state and the game section corresponding to the result of the current game (step S311). Further, an external output setting process for outputting the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall is executed (step S312). After that, the reception permission process is executed (step S313). By executing the reception permission process, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a.

Next, the setting process at the start executed in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, both the bet set flag at the time of replay and the bet set flag at the time of acceptance in the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0" (step S601). After that, when the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S602: NO), the first bet number command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S603), and the main RAM 74 When the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "2" (step S602: YES), the second bet number command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S604). The first bet number command is a command for the directing MPU 92 to recognize that the bet number of the game started this time is "3", and the second bet number command is the bet number of the game started this time is "3". This is a command for the directing MPU 92 to recognize that it is "2".

When the process of step S603 or step S604 is executed, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is set in the bet number history counter of the main RAM 74 (step S605). The value of the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" when the current game ends.

Next, the lottery process for the winning combination executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S701, a first random number used when determining whether or not a combination is correct is acquired. The slot machine 10 has a configuration in which when the start lever 41 is operated, the first random number at that time is latched from the first random number circuit 75. The first random number circuit 75 generates the first random numbers of "0" to "65535", and the main MPU 72 sets the value latched in the first random number circuit 75 when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed. It is stored in the RAM 74. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire the first random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The first random number circuit 75 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the first random number, the lottery table for determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S702). In this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "1" to "6" are prepared in advance, and by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and operating the ON operation, a predetermined operation is performed. It is possible to set which winning probability the winning combination lottery process is to be executed. If the set value is "n + 1" rather than "n", the winning probability is more advantageous for the player. Specifically, since the winning probability of a predetermined combination is higher when the set value is "n + 1" than when the set value is "n", the set value "n + 1" is more advantageous to the player than "n". .. Further, even if the set values are set at the same stage, the case where the number of betting game media is "3" is more advantageous for the player than the case where the number of bets is "2". Further, there are three types of lottery modes in which the lottery tables are different in the main MPU 72 even if the set values are set at the same stage: a normal mode, a first RT mode, and a second RT mode. Further, as the game state, a first CB state and a second CB state exist in addition to the states of each of these lottery modes. In step S702, a lottery table corresponding to a combination of the current set value, the current number of bets, the current lottery mode, and the current gaming state is selected.

Taking the case where the set value is "3" as an example, the lottery table corresponding to each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode in the non-CB state will be described. First, the lottery table for the normal mode selected in the normal mode will be described. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for normal mode at the time of three bets selected when the number of bets is “3”, and FIG. 18 is a diagram selected when the number of bets is “2”. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lottery table for a normal mode at the time of two-card betting. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 19 will be referred to as appropriate.

An index value IV is set in the lottery table for the normal mode as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 regardless of whether the lottery table has three bets or two bets. Each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the first random number circuit 75. In addition, the number of index values IV is the same at the time of 3-card betting and at the time of 2-card betting, and the types of winning combinations set for each index value IV are 3-card betting except for index value IV = 17. It is the same at the time and when betting two cards.

Specifically, the first bell winning data is set in the index values IV = 1 to 4. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 19, when the first stop (the reel on which the stop command is first generated) is the left reel 32L, the second stop target and the third stop target Regardless of the types of reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first bell winning is surely established, and in other cases, the first bell winning does not occur. When winning with an index value IV = 2, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped second and the reels 32M, 32R to be stopped third, and the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44. The first bell winning is surely established regardless of the timing, and in other cases, the first bell winning does not occur. When winning with an index value IV = 3, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation of each stop button 42 to 44 The first bell winning is surely established regardless of the timing, and in other cases, the first bell winning does not occur. If the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4, the first bell winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

In this slot machine 10, as described above, in the non-CB state, reel control capable of sliding up to 4 symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is applied to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Will be done. In other words, reel control for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated until a predetermined time (190 milliseconds) elapses. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to easily establish a prize corresponding to the winning combination, and it is possible to prevent the winning corresponding to the unwinning combination from being established. It becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, a combination of symbols for establishing a prize is formed in one reel 32L, 32M, 32R. If there are five or more symbols between the constituent symbols, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (the event is also called "missing"). say). The first bell prize, the second bell prize, and various replay prizes are prize modes in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order, and the first watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, and the like are not missed. The cherry prize, the first CB prize, and the second CB prize are prize modes in which omission may occur depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the index value IV = 5 is set with the first bell winning data and the second bell winning data. When winning with an index value IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 19, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R and each of them. The second bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first bell winning is surely established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the first watermelon winning data is set at the index value IV = 6. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 19, the first watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first watermelon winning may not be established. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the second watermelon winning data is set at the index value IV = 7. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 19, the second watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second watermelon winning may not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the cherry winning data is set at the index value IV = 8. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 19, the cherry winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L, the cherry winning may not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the first chance replay winning data is set for the index value IV = 9. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 19, the first chance replay winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. do. Further, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the second chance replay winning data is set at the index value IV = 10. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 10, as shown in FIG. 19, the second chance replay winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. do.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the index values IV = 11 to 16 are set to the normal replay winning data and the first RT replay winning data. In this case, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 11, as shown in FIG. 19, the first stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop (the reel on which the second stop command is issued) is the middle reel 32M. When the third stop (the reel on which the stop command was last issued) is the right reel 32R, the first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases. The normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 12, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 13, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, each stop button 42 to The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 14, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 16, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

For the index value IV = 17, only the first CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 17 if it is a lottery table for normal mode when betting three cards, and even if it is a lottery table for normal mode when betting two cards. For example, as shown in FIG. 18, only the second CB winning data is set. That is, the first CB winning data is the data set as the winning combination only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", and the first CB winning is only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3". It can be established. Further, the second CB winning data is data set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2", and the second CB winning is only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2". It can be established. When the first CB winning data is set and the number of bets on the game medium is "3", as shown in FIG. 19, the first CB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first CB prize may not be established. When the second CB winning data is set and the number of bets on the game medium is "2", as shown in FIG. 19, the second CB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second CB prize may not be established.

Here, the winning data other than the 1st CB winning data and the 2nd CB winning data are deleted in the winning game regardless of whether or not the corresponding winning is established, and the game after the winning game is displayed. Will not be carried over. On the other hand, the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are the clear processing of the main RAM 74 (the first CB winning data is partially cleared (step S104) or all cleared (step S105), the second CB winning data. (Step S105)), the data is retained until the corresponding prize is established even in the next and subsequent games of the winning game. In this case, in the game in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery target.

That is, as a result of the game being played in a situation where the number of bets is "3", the first CB winning data is set in the main RAM 74 and the first CB winning data is carried over because the first CB winning is not established. If the game is played in a situation where the number of bets is "3" after that, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery target, and then the number of bets is increased. Even if the game is played in the situation of "2", the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery target. Further, as a result of the game being played in a situation where the number of bets is "2", the second CB winning data is set in the main RAM 74 and the second CB winning data is carried over because the second CB winning is not established. If the game is played in a situation where the number of bets is "3" after that, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery target, and then the number of bets is increased. Even if the game is played in the situation of "2", the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery target. This is not limited to the case where the lottery mode is the normal mode, and the same applies to the first RT mode and the second RT mode. As a result, even though either the 1st CB winning data or the 2nd CB winning data is already stored in the memory, either the 1st CB winning data or the 2nd CB winning data is not newly stored. It becomes possible to prevent a plurality of CB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

When the lottery table for the normal mode at the time of 3-card betting in FIG. 17 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 1, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 2, and the index value IV = The probability of winning in the case of 3 is about 1 / 6.6, respectively. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 4 is about 1 / 13.1. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 5 is about 1/500. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 6 and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 10 are about 1/164. Moreover, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 7 is about 1/146, respectively. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 8 is about 1/423. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 9 is about 1/328. In addition, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 11, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 12, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 13, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 14 The probability of winning, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 15, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 16 are each about 1/41. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 17 is about 1 / 6.6.

On the other hand, when the lottery table for the normal mode at the time of 2-card betting in FIG. 18 is selected, the lottery table for the normal mode at the time of 3-card betting is selected with the probability of winning at each of the index values IV = 1 to 16. The probability is lower than in the case of. Specifically, when the lottery table for the normal mode at the time of betting 2 cards is selected, the lottery table for the normal mode at the time of betting 3 cards is selected with the probability of winning at each of the index values IV = 1 to 16. The probability is lower than 2/3 of the probability in the case of As a result, the game executed in the situation where the game medium of "3" is bet is accompanied by the addition of the game medium than the game executed in the situation where the game medium of "2" is bet. It is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of a small role winning and a replay winning in which a replay is given.

However, when the normal lottery table for two bets is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 17 is about 1 / 2.2. On the other hand, when the normal lottery table at the time of 3-card betting is selected as described above, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 17 is about 1 / 6.6. As a result, the probability that the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in the game executed in the situation where the game medium of "2" is bet is executed in the situation where the game medium of "3" is bet. In the game to be played, the probability that the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 can be made higher than the probability.

As described above, the probability of occurrence of a small winning combination with a game medium and a replay winning with a replay is higher in a situation where the number of bets is "3" than in a situation where the number of bets is "2". The probability that the CB winning data (first CB winning data or the second CB winning data) is stored in the main RAM 74 is higher in the situation where the number of bets is "2" than in the situation where the number of bets is "3". The high configuration is not limited to the case of the normal mode, and the same applies to the case of the first RT mode and the case of the second RT mode.

In the normal mode lottery table, as described above, the first RT replay winning data is set as the winning data of the index value IV = 11 to 16 in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 11 to 16 is about 1 / 6.8 if the number of bets on the game medium is "3", and the number of bets on the game medium is "2". In this situation, it is about 1 / 10.9. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are won with any of the index values IV = 11 to 16, the stop order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds to the winning combination. When the order is reached, the first RT replay prize is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When the mode shifts to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) becomes the first RT mode lottery table.

Next, the lottery table for the first RT mode selected when the set value is "3" and the first RT mode is in the non-CB state will be described. 20 and 21 are explanatory views for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode. Note that FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the 1st RT mode lottery table at the time of 3-card betting, but the number of index values IV is 3 even in the 1st RT mode lottery table at the time of 2-card betting. The lottery table for the 1st RT mode at the time of betting is the same, and the types of winning combinations set for each index value IV are the lottery table for the 1st RT mode at the time of betting 3 cards except for the index value IV = 23. Is the same as.

In the 1st RT mode lottery table at the time of 3-card betting, as shown in FIG. 20, the winning data set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are 3-card bets. It is the same as the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 17) at the time. Although not shown, the winning data set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 10 in the lottery table for the first RT mode at the time of betting on two cards and the winning probability of each index value IV are at the time of betting on two cards. It is the same as the lottery table for normal mode (FIG. 18). Therefore, when compared with the same number of bets, the types of winning combinations that enable the granting of game media and the winning probabilities of those winning combinations are the same in each of the normal mode and the first RT mode, and the first The winning probabilities of the chance play and the second chance replay are also the same in each of the normal mode and the first RT mode.

The first CB winning data is set at the index value IV = 23 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 20) at the time of betting three cards, and the winning probability is about 1 / 6.6. Further, as already explained, the first CB winning data is also set at the index value IV = 17 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 17) at the time of 3-card betting, and the winning probability is about 1 / 6.6. ing. Therefore, the winning probabilities of the first CB winning data are the same in each of the normal mode and the first RT mode.

Although not shown, the second CB winning data is set at the index value IV = 23 in the lottery table for the first RT mode at the time of betting two cards, and the winning probability is about 1 / 2.2. The second CB winning data is also set at the index value IV = 17 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 18) at the time of betting two cards, and the winning probability is about 1 / 2.2. Therefore, the winning probabilities of the second CB winning data are the same in each of the normal mode and the first RT mode.

The winning combination data set to the index value IV = 11 to 22 is different from the normal mode. Specifically, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 20, as the winning data of the index value IV = 11 to 16, the second RT replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 11 to 16 is about 1 / 6.8 when betting on three cards and about 1 / 10.2 when betting on two cards.

When winning with an index value IV = 11, as shown in FIG. 21, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The second RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 12, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to The second RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 13, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, each stop button 42 to The second RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 14, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to The second RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to The second RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 16, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to The second RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

In the 1st RT mode, any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, and the stop order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the stop order corresponding to the winning combination. In that case, the second RT replay prize is established and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When the mode shifts to the second RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) becomes the second RT mode lottery table.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 20, as the winning data of the index value IV = 17 to 22, the first falling replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 17 to 22 is about 1 / 10.9 at the time of 3-card betting and about 1 / 16.4 at the time of 2-card betting.

When the lottery table for the first RT mode is won with an index value IV = 17, as shown in FIG. 21, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is. When the right reel is 32R, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay prize is set to the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. It is definitely established regardless. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 18, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 19, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 20, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 21, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 22, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the first fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When the mode shifts to the normal mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) becomes the normal mode lottery table.

By setting the lottery table for the 1st RT mode as described above, the winning probability of the winning combination that enables the establishment of the replay winning in the 1st RT mode (hereinafter, also referred to as the replay probability) is the number of bets on the game medium. If it is "3", it is about 1 / 4.1. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 6.7 when the number of bets on the game medium is "3". That is, in the situation where the number of bets on the game medium is "3", the first RT mode is a lottery mode having a higher replay probability than the normal mode. In the situation where the number of bets on the game medium is "2", the replay probability is about 1 / 6.1 in the first RT mode, while it is about 1 / 10.3 in the normal mode. Therefore, even in a situation where the number of bets on the game medium is "2", the first RT mode is a lottery mode in which the replay probability is higher than that in the normal mode.

Next, the lottery table for the second RT mode selected when the set value is "3" and the second RT mode is in the non-CB state will be described. 22 and 23 are explanatory views for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode. Note that FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second RT mode lottery table at the time of betting three cards, but even in the lottery table for the second RT mode at the time of betting two cards, the number of index values IV is three. The lottery table for the 2nd RT mode at the time of betting is the same, and the types of winning combinations set for each index value IV are the lottery table for the 2nd RT mode at the time of betting 3 cards except for the index value IV = 18. Is the same as.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode at the time of 3-card betting, as shown in FIG. 22, the winning data set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are 3-card bets. It is the same as the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 17) and the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 20) at the time of betting three cards. Although not shown, the winning data set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 10 in the lottery table for the second RT mode at the time of betting on two cards and the winning probability of each index value IV are at the time of betting on two cards. It is the same as the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 18) and the lottery table for the first RT mode at the time of betting two cards. Therefore, when compared with the same number of bets, the types of winning combinations that enable the granting of game media and the winning probabilities of those winning combinations are the same in each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. At the same time, the winning probabilities of the first chance play and the second chance replay are also the same in each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode.

The first CB winning data is set at the index value IV = 18 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 22) at the time of three-card betting, and the winning probability is about 1 / 6.6. Further, as already described, the index value IV = 17 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 17) at the time of 3-card betting and the index value IV = 23 in the 1st RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) at the time of 3-card betting are also set. The first CB winning data is set, and the winning probability is about 1 / 6.6. Therefore, the winning probabilities of the first CB winning data are the same in each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode.

Although not shown, the second CB winning data is set at the index value IV = 18 in the lottery table for the second RT mode at the time of betting two cards, and the winning probability is about 1 / 2.2. The second CB winning data is also set for the index value IV = 17 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 18) at the time of two-card betting and the index value IV = 23 in the first RT mode lottery table at the time of two-card betting. , The winning probability is about 1 / 2.2. Therefore, the winning probabilities of the second CB winning data are the same in each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode.

The winning combination data set to the index value IV = 11 to 17 is different from the normal mode and the first RT mode. Specifically, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, as shown in FIG. 22, the second fall replay winning data is set as the winning data of the index value IV = 11 to 16 in addition to the normal replay winning data. .. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 11 to 16 is about 1 / 6.8 when betting on 3 cards, and about 1 / 10.2 when betting on 2 cards.
When winning with an index value IV = 11 in the lottery table for the second RT mode, as shown in FIG. 23, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is. When the right reel is 32R, the normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize is set to the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. It is definitely established regardless. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 12, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 13, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 14, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 15, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins with an index value of IV = 16, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the second fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When the mode shifts to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) becomes the first RT mode lottery table.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 17. The probability of winning at an index value IV = 17 is set higher than the probability of winning another role. Specifically, if a 3-card bet is made, the winning rate is about 1 / 9.3 and a 2-card bet is made. If it is time, it will be won at about 1/14.1. Then, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 17, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

Since the lottery table for the second RT mode is set as described above, the replay probability in the second RT mode is about 1 / 3.8 when the number of bets on the game medium is "3". On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 6.7 when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", and the replay probability in the first RT mode is "3" when the number of bets on the game medium is "3". If so, it is about 1 / 4.1. That is, in the situation where the number of bets on the game medium is "3", the second RT mode is a lottery mode having a higher replay probability than the normal mode and the first RT mode. In the situation where the number of bets on the game medium is "2", the replay probability is about 1 / 5.7 in the second RT mode, while it is about 1 / 10.3 in the normal mode. In 1RT mode, it is about 1 / 6.1. Therefore, even in a situation where the number of bets on the game medium is "2", the second RT mode is a lottery mode having a higher replay probability than the normal mode and the first RT mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the replay probability may be the same or substantially the same in the first RT mode and the second RT mode, and the replay probability is significantly higher in the second RT mode than in the first RT mode. It may be a high configuration.

In addition to the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, the main ROM 73 has a lottery process for a combination in each of the first CB state and the second CB state (FIG. 16). ) Is stored in the lottery table for CB. Only one index value IV is set in the CB lottery table, and normal replay winning data is set in the one index value IV. The probability of winning at the index value IV is 3/10, and when the index value IV is won, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped if the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is a predetermined timing. Normal replay prizes are established regardless of the order. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not a predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored. On the other hand, if the index value IV is won but the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not a predetermined timing, or if the index value IV is not won, the first bell winning can be established.

Here, in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, the winning probabilities of the index values IV other than the index values IV = 7 and 10 are the same between the set values of "1" to "6". It has become. This applies to both the case where the number of bets on the game medium is "3" and the case where the number of bets is "2". On the other hand, the winning probabilities of the index values IV = 7 and 10 differ between the set values of "1" to "6". FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining that the winning probabilities of the index values IV = 7 and 10 are different between the set values of “1” to “6” at the time of betting on three cards.

As shown in FIG. 24, the probability of winning with an index value IV = 7 at the time of 3-card betting is the case where the set value is "1" in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. The lower and larger the set value, the higher the winning probability, and the set value of "6" is the highest. In addition, the probability of winning with an index value of IV = 10 at the time of betting on three cards is the lowest and the largest value in the case of the set value of "1" in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. The winning probability is higher as the setting value of is higher, and the setting value of "6" is the highest. This makes it possible to provide a difference in advantage between the set values of "1" to "6". Even when betting on two cards, the probability of winning with an index value of IV = 7 is set to be higher as the set value of a larger value is set in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. In addition, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 10 is set to be higher as the set value of the larger value is set in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode.

Returning to the explanation of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), after selecting the lottery table in step S702 and setting the index value IV to 1 (step S703), the determination value DV used when determining the winning or not of the winning combination is set. Set (step S704). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the value of the first random number acquired in step S701 is set as the current determination value DV, and the value of this first random number corresponds to the index value IV = 1, which is the current index value IV. The point value PV to be added is added to obtain a new judgment value DV.

After that, it is determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the index value IV (step S705). In the winning / failing determination of the winning combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds "65535". When "65535" is exceeded (step S705: YES), the winning data acquisition process for setting the winning combination data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S706). ..

When the determination value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S705: NO), it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, after adding 1 to the index value IV (step S707), it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined as to whether or not the index value IV is correct (step S708). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined as to whether or not it is correct, the process returns to step S704 and the determination of whether or not the winning combination is successful is continued. At this time, in step S704, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S705, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

When the process of step S706 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S708, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In this case, the stop information first setting process for setting the stop information for reel stop control is performed (step S709). After that, the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed in step S710, the first control process of the game section is executed in step S711, and the stop order notification control process is executed in step S712. The processing contents of steps S710 to S712 will be described in detail later.

After that, the game start command transmission process is executed (step S713). In the transmission process, if a winning combination is won in the current combination lottery process (FIG. 16), information corresponding to the winning combination, and information corresponding to the current lottery mode and the current gaming state. And the information corresponding to the processing results of step S710 and step S711 are set in the game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. The game start command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that a new game has started, and is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize various information determined by the main side MPU 72. ..

When the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command, it grasps various information in the current game from the game start command. Then, the production side MPU 92 determines the content of the production in a manner corresponding to the various information grasped. Then, a data table corresponding to the determined content of the effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94, and according to the read data table, the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 are performed. Take control.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S309 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed (step S801). In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R was started in the previous game, and if not. Wait until the weight time elapses. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74. By performing this process, the stepping motor control process in step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) starts the stepping motor acceleration process, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start process. Further, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each stop button 42 to 44 when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed. Notify the players and the like.

After that, it is determined whether or not any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S802). If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated, the process of step S802 is repeatedly executed until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, whether or not the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 have been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. (Step S803). If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S802, and the process of step S802 is repeatedly executed until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S804). The stop command command is a command for causing the effector MPU 92 to recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is transmitted, the stop control process shown in steps S805 to S811 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position (specifically, the lower row) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S805). Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. After that, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S806).

In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are slid for one symbol and then stopped, a stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped after being slid by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped after being slid by three symbols, and four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, one is a stopping mode in which the machine is stopped after sliding. Therefore, in step S806, any value of "0" to "4" is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

After that, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined (step S807). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal (step S808), and if they are equal, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R The reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed (step S809). After that, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S810). If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed (step S811), and the process returns to step S802.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination, and by using the stop information. , It is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is stopped. As the stop information, the slide number data indicating the correspondence relationship between each symbol and the slide number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the slide number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. ..

As the process for setting the stop information, the stop information first setting process executed in step S709 of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) and the stop information first setting process executed in step S811 of the reel control process (FIG. 25) are executed. There is a stop information second setting process. In the stop information first setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. The stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the stop information first setting process or the previous stop information second setting process after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the stop result of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, 32R. ..

If it is determined in step S810 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the winning determination process is executed in step S812. In the winning determination process, the types of symbols stopped on the main line ML in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are grasped. Then, based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main RAM 74, the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes the winning combination in the winning combination process. It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponds to each other, and if the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, the winning combination process is executed as the winning combination is established.

In the winning processing, if the winning is a small winning combination, information on the number of game media to be granted is set in the main RAM 74 so that the gaming media can be granted in the medium granting process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed so that the re-game setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (step S302).

After executing the winning determination process, the winning result command is transmitted to the directing MPU 92 (step S813). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not the winning is successful this time, and if the winning is successful, data indicating the type of the winning is included.

Next, the corresponding processing at the end of the game executed in step S311 of the normal processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26. Since the process of step S311 in the normal process (FIG. 12) is executed after the reel control process (step S309), all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in one game as the corresponding process at the end of the game. It will be executed after it is done.

First, the CB process for performing the transition control and the progress control of the first CB state or the second CB state is executed (step S901). The processing for CB will be described in detail later. After that, the lottery mode control process is executed (step S903) on condition that it is neither the first CB state nor the second CB state (step S902: NO). In the control process of the lottery mode, if the 1st RT replay winning is established in this game, the mode is shifted from the normal mode to the 1st RT mode, and if the 2nd RT replay winning is established in this game, the first Shift from 1RT mode to 2RT mode, and if the 1st fall replay prize is established in this game, shift from 1RT mode to normal mode, and the 2nd fall replay prize is established in this game. If so, the mode is changed from the second RT mode to the first RT mode.

After that, the process jumps to the process corresponding to the current gaming state (step S904). Specifically, when the game state is a normal game state that is neither a preparation state, a pseudo bonus state, an ART state, or an end preparation state, the normal processing is executed (step S905), and the game state is in the preparation state. If there is, the preparation state process is executed (step S906), if the game state is the pseudo bonus state, the pseudo bonus process is executed (step S907), and if the game state is the ART state, the ART state is executed. The process is executed (step S908), and when the game state is the end preparation state, the second control process of the game section is executed (step S909). Further, even when any of the normal processing of step S905, the preparation state processing of step S906, the pseudo-bonus processing of step S907, and the ART state processing of step S908 is executed, the second control processing of the game section (step S909). To execute. The processing contents of steps S905 to S909 will be described in detail later.

When the current gaming state is the first CB state or the second CB state, affirmative determination is made in step S902 for normal processing in step S905, preparation state processing in step S906, and pseudo bonus in step S907. The process and the ART state process of step S908 are not executed. Therefore, in the case of the first CB state or the second CB state, the process for advancing the normal game state, the process for advancing the ready state, the process for advancing the pseudo-bonus state, and the process for advancing the ART state. Processing is not executed. On the other hand, even if the current gaming state is the first CB state or the second CB state, the second control process of the gaming section in step S909 is executed. Therefore, even in the case of the first CB state or the second CB state, the process for advancing the second section is executed.

<About game status and game section>
Next, the game state and the game section will be described. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state and a gaming section existing in the slot machine 10.

In this slot machine 10, there are a normal game state ST1, a first CB state ST2, a second CB state ST3, a preparation state ST4, a pseudo bonus state ST5, an ART state ST6, and an end preparation state ST7 as game states. doing. These gaming states ST1 to ST7 do not overlap with each other.

The normal game state ST1 is a game state in which a part of the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S104) or a whole is cleared (step S105) to stay. In addition, when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 that occurred in the normal game state ST1 ends, when the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends, the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur, or when the ART state ST6 ends. , And when the end preparation state ST7 is completed, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. In the normal game state ST1, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of bets on the game medium is "3" or "2".

In the normal game state ST1, the net increase expected value of the game medium in one game regardless of whether the bet is three or two (“the expected number of game media to be granted in one game” to “the game bet in one game”. The value obtained by subtracting the "number of media") is less than 1. Further, as described above, there are a normal mode, a first RT mode, and a second RT mode as the lottery modes, but in the normal game state ST1, any of these lottery modes can be stayed. Further, in the normal game state ST1, either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the non-internal state, or either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is the main side. There is an internal state stored in the RAM 74.

The first CB state ST2 is a gaming state that shifts when the first CB winning is established in a situation where the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. In the first CB state ST2, one game can be executed when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", while one game is executed when the number of bets on the game medium is "2". I can't. Further, the second CB state ST3 is a gaming state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 and the second CB winning is established. In the second CB state ST3, one game can be executed when the number of bets on the game medium is "2", while the upper limit of bets is set to "2", so that the game medium of "3" is bet. Can not do it.

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states that do not increase the game medium owned by the player. Furthermore, both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game media owned by the player at the end of the game state rather than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. It is a game state that reduces the number of. Details of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 will be described later.

The preparation state ST4 is a gaming state in which the player stays as a pre-stage to shift to the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, and can shift from the normal gaming state ST1. In the preparation state ST4, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of bets on the game medium is "3" or "2". In the preparation state ST4, a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, or one of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. There is an internal state that is being done.

In the preparation state ST4, when any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified. When the first bell prize is established, the game medium of "11" is given. As a result, it is possible to increase the expected number of game media to be given in one game in the prepared state ST4.

As described above, the lottery modes include the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, but in the ready state ST4, any of these lottery modes can be stayed. In the preparation state ST4 and in either the 1st RT mode or the 2nd RT mode, the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game is 1 or more when three bets are made. On the other hand, in the prepared state ST4 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game is less than 1 when two bets are made. Further, in the case of the preparation state ST4 and the normal mode, the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game is less than 1 regardless of whether the bet is three or two.

In the preparation state ST4 and the normal mode, when any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first RT replay winning is notified. .. Further, in the case of the preparation state ST4 and the first RT mode, when any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second RT replay winning is When notified and winning any of the index values IV = 17 to 22, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first fall replay winning is notified. When the second RT replay prize is established in the preparation state ST4 and the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode, the game state shifts to the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6.

In addition, the transition to the ready state ST4 may occur in the situation where the lottery mode is the second RT mode, but in this case, even if any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the second fall replay prize is won. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the above is not notified. Then, when the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode in the preparation state ST4 and then shifts to the second RT mode occurs, the lottery mode shifts to the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6. Further, when the preparation state ST4 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later is satisfied, the state shifts to the normal game state ST1.

The pseudo-bonus state ST5 is a gaming state in which the second RT replay winning is established in the preparation state ST4 and the lottery mode is changed to the second RT mode in the situation where the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is won. The pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends when the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 becomes "0". Transition to ART state ST6 in pseudo-bonus state ST5 If the winner is elected, the transition to ART state ST6 is performed when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. In the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the transition to the ART state ST6 is not won, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later, and the normal game state ST1 is entered. When the second section SC2 ends at the time of the transition, the state shifts to the end preparation state ST7. In the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the transition to the ART state ST6 is not won, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later, and the normal game state ST1 is entered. If the second section SC2 does not end at the time of the transition, the normal game state ST1 is entered without shifting to the end preparation state ST7. Further, when the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later is satisfied, the state shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST5, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of bets on the game medium is "3" or "2". In the pseudo-bonus state ST5, a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, or one of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. There is a memorized internal state.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST5, when any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified. When the first bell prize is established, the game medium of "11" is given. As a result, it is possible to increase the expected number of game media in one game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

As described above, the lottery modes include the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, but in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, any of these lottery modes can be stayed. In the pseudo-bonus state ST5, which is either the 1st RT mode or the 2nd RT mode, the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game is 1 or more when three bets are made. On the other hand, in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game is less than 1 when two bets are made. Further, in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and in the normal mode, the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game is less than 1 regardless of whether the bet is 3 or 2 cards.

Transition to pseudo-bonus state ST5 When the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started by shifting to the second RT mode in the preparation state ST4 of the winning situation, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is in the second RT mode, When any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the second fall replay winning is notified. Therefore, in the case of the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the player basically stays in the second RT mode, and in the case of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the second RT mode, as described above, if three cards are bet, the game is in one game. The expected net increase in the game medium is 1 or more.

However, a shift from the second RT mode to the first RT mode may occur in the pseudo bonus state ST5 due to an operation error in the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and further, the first RT mode is changed to the normal mode in the pseudo bonus state ST5. Migration may occur. On the other hand, in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and in the normal mode, when any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the first RT replay winning. The stop order is notified. Further, in the case of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the first RT mode, when any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second RT replay winning. Is notified, and when any of the index values IV = 17 to 22 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first fall replay winning is notified.

Even if the lottery mode shifts from the 2nd RT mode to the 1st RT mode or from the 1st RT mode to the normal mode in the pseudo bonus state ST5, even if the pseudo bonus state ST5 is maintained and the mode is not the 2nd RT mode. The number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is subtracted.

The ART state ST6 is a gaming state in which the second RT replay prize is established in the preparation state ST4 and the lottery mode is changed to the second RT mode in the situation where the transition to the ART state ST6 is won. Transition to ART state ST6 This is a gaming state that shifts when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends in a winning situation. The ART state ST6 ends when the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST6 becomes "0". When the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, and when the second section SC2 ends at the time of the transition to the normal game state ST1, the state shifts to the end preparation state ST7. If the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, and the second section SC2 does not end when shifting to the normal game state ST1, the ART state ST6 does not shift to the end preparation state ST7. It shifts to the normal game state ST1. Further, when the ART state ST6 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later is satisfied, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the ART state ST6, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of bets on the game medium is "3" or "2". In the ART state ST6, a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, or one of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. There is an internal state that is being done.

In the ART state ST6, when any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified. When the first bell prize is established, the game medium of "11" is given. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media in one game in the ART state ST6.

As described above, the lottery modes include the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, but in the ART state ST6, any of these lottery modes can be stayed. In the ART state ST6 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game is 1 or more when three bets are made. On the other hand, in the ART state ST6 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game is less than 1 when two bets are made. Further, in the case of the ART state ST6 and the normal mode, the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game is less than 1 regardless of whether the bet is three or two.

Transition to ART state ST6 ART state ST6 is started by shifting to the 2nd RT mode in the preparation state ST4 of the winning situation, and the pseudo bonus state ST5 that basically stays in the 2nd RT mode. The ART state ST6 is started when the process ends in the situation where the transition to the ART state ST6 is won. Then, in the case of the ART state ST6 and the second RT mode, when any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the second fall replay winning are stopped. The order is notified. Therefore, in the case of the ART state ST6, it basically stays in the second RT mode, and in the case of the ART state ST6 and the second RT mode, as described above, if three cards are bet, the game medium in one game. The expected net increase of is 1 or more.

However, a shift from the second RT mode to the first RT mode may occur in the ART state ST6 due to an operation error in the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and further, a shift from the first RT mode to the normal mode in the ART state ST6. May occur. On the other hand, in the ART state ST6 and the normal mode, when any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the first RT replay winning are stopped. The order is notified. Further, in the case of the ART state ST6 and the first RT mode, when any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second RT replay winning is When notified and winning any of the index values IV = 17 to 22, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first fall replay winning is notified.

Even if the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode or from the first RT mode to the normal mode in the ART state ST6, the ART state ST6 is maintained and the ART state is not set. The number of remaining games in ST6 is subtracted.

The end preparation state ST7 is a case where the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, and the second section SC2 at the time of the subsequent transition to the normal game state ST1. It is a game state that shifts when is finished. The end preparation state ST7 ends when one game is executed. When the end preparation state ST7 ends, it shifts to the normal game state ST1. In the end preparation state ST7, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of bets on the game medium is "3" or "2". The end preparation state ST7 is a game state in which the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game is less than 1 regardless of whether the bet is 3 or 2 cards. Further, as described above, the lottery modes include the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, but in the end preparation state ST7, any of these lottery modes can be stayed. Further, in the end preparation state ST7, neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in the non-internal state, or either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is the main side. There is an internal state stored in the RAM 74.

In the configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST7 exist as described above, a game section is set separately from these game states ST1 to ST7. A first section SC1 and a second section SC2 are set as game sections. That is, in this slot machine 10, as factors that determine the game situation, the number of bets of the game media of "2" and "3", the set values of "1" to "6", the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the first There are a lottery mode of 2RT mode, various game states ST1 to ST7, and game sections of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2.

The first section SC1 is a reel 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the player to establish a winning prize that is advantageous to the player when the winning combination to be established is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. By notifying the stop order of, the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in one game") is 1 or more. This is a section in which the advantageous gaming state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6) that can be possible is not started, and the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state does not continue. When a partial clear process (step S104) or a complete clear process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the normal game state ST1 and the normal mode are set to the first section SC1. Further, when the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed in the second section SC2, it also becomes the first section SC1. The second section SC2 is a section in which the advantageous gaming state can be started and the section in which the advantageous gaming state can be continued.

FIG. 28A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first section SC1 and the second section SC2. When the partial clearing process (step S104) or the entire clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed as described above, the first section SC1 is set and the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed. It also becomes the first section SC1. On the other hand, the second section SC2 shifts from the first section SC1 when a transition to the second section SC2 occurs based on the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first section SC1. In this case, if a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the first section SC1, a transition to the second section SC2 may occur, while the number of bets is "2" in the first section SC1. Even if a certain game is executed, the opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 does not occur. Therefore, the player who expects the transition to the second section SC2 in the first section SC1 needs to execute the game in which the bet number is "3" instead of executing the game in which the bet number is "2". There is.

In the first section SC1, the expected net increase of the game medium in one game is surely less than 1, whereas in the second section SC2, the expected net increase of the game medium in one game is less than 1. It may be 1 or more. Therefore, the second section SC2 is more advantageous than the first section SC1. Therefore, the player expects to shift to the second section SC2 in the first section SC1.

The first section SC1 ends when a transition to the second section SC2 occurs, and shifts to the second section SC2. On the other hand, the second section SC2 ends when the pseudo bonus state ST5, the ART state ST6 or the end preparation state ST7 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1, and shifts to the first section SC1. Further, as an end condition of the second section SC2, the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2 without the transition to the first section SC1 occurs is the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games). ), And by continuing the second section SC2 without the transition to the first section SC1, the limited total net increase of the game medium becomes the upper limit net increase (specifically, 2400). An ending condition is set that one of the conditions for reaching is satisfied. The limited total net increase in the number of game media is "the total number of game media granted by the game executed in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (in the situation where the game medium is not granted," 0. ")" To "the total number of game media digested to execute the game in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (" 0 "in the situation where the game is not executed)" is subtracted. In the case of a difference number of sheets, it is the number of sheets increased by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value with the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets as a predetermined reference value.

That is, when the limited total net increase number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase number by continuing the second section SC2, the second section SC2 ends and the second section SC2 ends. Shift to 1 section SC1. Further, when the second section SC2 is continued and the number of games executed from the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1. Transition. Then, when any one of these ending conditions is satisfied, the preparation state ST4 is terminated and the second section SC2 is terminated in the game in which the ending condition is satisfied even in the middle of the preparation state ST4. It shifts to the situation of the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1, and even in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST5, the pseudo bonus state ST5 is terminated and the second section SC2 is completed in the game in which the ending condition is satisfied. Is terminated and the game shifts to the situation of the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1, and even in the middle of the ART state ST6, the ART state ST6 is terminated and the second in the game in which the ending condition is satisfied. The section SC2 is terminated, and the situation shifts to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing excessively.

As shown in FIG. 27, the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state ST3 may stay in any of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2. On the other hand, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, the ART state ST6, and the end preparation state ST7 do not stay in the first section SC1, but only in the second section SC2.

FIG. 28B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each gaming state ST1 to ST7 in the second section SC2. As already explained, the normal game state ST1, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, the ART state ST6, and the end preparation state ST7 are games in any of the situations where the number of bets on the game medium is "3" and "2". It is possible to execute the game only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3" in the first CB state ST2, and the number of bets on the game medium is in the second CB state ST3. It is possible to execute the game only when it is "2". This is the same even if the game section is the second section SC2.

In the case of the normal gaming state ST1 in the second section SC2, regardless of whether the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed or the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed. The expected net increase in game media is less than one. In this case, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, as will be described later, the transition lottery process to the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 is performed based on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in each game. Although it can be executed, the transition lottery process is executed in the game in which the number of bets is "3", but is not executed in the game in which the number of bets is "2". Further, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, the value of the release game number counter 74e provided in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 each time one game is executed, and after the deduction, the value is decremented by 1. When the value of the release game number counter 74e is "0", the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed, but the subtraction of the release game number counter 74e is in the game in which the bet number is "3". Is executed, but not in games where the number of bets is "2". Therefore, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, it is better to execute the game having the bet number "3" than to execute the game having the bet number "2". It is advantageous for the player.

In the second section SC2, when any of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6 is executed, the expected net increase value of the game medium is 1 or more when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed. On the other hand, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the expected net increase value of the game medium is less than 1. Therefore, when any of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2, the game in which the bet number is "3" is executed so that the bet number is "2". It is more advantageous for the player than allowing the game to be executed.

As described above, it is advantageous to execute the game in which the number of bets is "3" in the normal game state ST1, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2. Even so, the number of game media granted in the game in which the number of bets is "2" in any one of the normal game state ST1, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2 is It is added as the limited total net increase number of game media in the second section SC2, and the number of bets is "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2. Is added as the total number of games played by continuing the second section SC2. That is, the game in which the number of bets is "2" in any one of the normal game state ST1, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2 is disadvantageous to the player. The game will contribute to the side that satisfies the ending condition of the second section SC2. From this point as well, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed when any of the normal game state ST1, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2. This is more advantageous for the player than allowing the game with a bet number of "2" to be played.

Even in the second section SC2, the first CB prize can be established and the second CB prize can be established as in the case of the first section SC1. When the first CB prize is established in the second section SC2, the first CB state ST2 is set in the second section SC2, and the second section SC2 is maintained even after the first CB state ST2 and the first CB state ST2 are completed. NS. Further, when the second CB prize is established in the second section SC2, the second section SC2 becomes the second CB state ST3, and when the second section SC2 is in the second CB state ST3 and after the second CB state ST3 ends, the second section SC2 remains. Be maintained. As described above, both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are games owned by the player at the end of the game state rather than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. It is a gaming state in which the number of media is reduced. That is, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are disadvantageous gaming states for the player. On the other hand, the games executed in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 in the second section SC2 are added as the total number of games executed by the continuation of the second section SC2. That is, although the game executed in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 is disadvantageous to the player, the game contributes to the side that satisfies the ending condition of the second section SC2. .. Therefore, when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, it becomes more disadvantageous for the player.

The end preparation state ST7 is the game medium regardless of whether the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed or the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the second section SC2. Although the expected net increase value is less than 1, it is a gaming state in which only one game is executed while the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6. Therefore, the game executed in the end preparation state ST7 does not contribute to the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2, and does not contribute to the total number of games in the second section SC2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the game is executed in the end preparation state ST7, it contributes to the limited total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2, and further in the second section SC2. It may be configured to contribute to the total number of games.

<About CB states ST2 and ST3>
Next, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 will be described in detail. FIG. 29A shows the first CB combination (that is, the index value IV in which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74) and the second CB combination (that is, the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74). FIG. 29B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the index value IV), and FIG. 29B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3.

As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the first CB combination can be won in a game in which the number of bets is "3", whereas it cannot be won in a game in which the number of bets is "2". In a game in which the number of bets is "3", the first CB combination is won with a probability of about 1 / 6.6. However, the winning state of the first CB combination (that is, the state in which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the winning state of the second CB combination (that is, the state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), In the case of either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the first CB combination is excluded from the lottery target in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

The second CB combination can be won in a game in which the number of bets is "2", whereas it cannot be won in a game in which the number of bets is "3". In a game in which the number of bets is "2", there is a probability of winning the second CB combination with a probability of about 1 / 2.2. However, the winning state of the first CB combination (that is, the state in which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the winning state of the second CB combination (that is, the state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), In the case of either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the second CB combination is excluded from the lottery target in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

In the winning state of the first CB combination, the first CB prize can be established in the game in which the number of bets is "3", while the first CB prize is not established in the game in which the number of bets is "2". Therefore, even if a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the first CB winning combination, the winning combination is not won in any index value IV in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). , The first CB prize is not established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, even if the index value IV in which the so-called omission may occur in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination is won when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the first CB winning combination, the reel The first CB prize is not established regardless of the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the first CB combination and the first CB winning is established, the first CB state ST2 is set.

As shown in FIG. 29B, in the first CB state ST2, it is possible to execute the game in which the number of bets is "3", and in the situation where the number of bets is 2 or less, the game can be executed. It is impossible. In the first CB state ST2, the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 with a probability of 3/10 in the winning combination process (FIG. 16) in each game, and when the normal replay winning data is stored, the left stop is performed. If the operation timing of the button 42 is a predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not a predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored.

In the first CB state ST2, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), or when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 but the left stop button 42 If the normal replay winning cannot be established because the operation timing is not a predetermined timing, the first bell winning can be established. In this case, the first bell winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, but the first bell winning may not be established depending on the stop operation timing of the left stop button 42.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first CB state ST2, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in order. And, the normal replay winning may be surely established regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first CB state ST2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stops of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped. The first bell winning may be surely established regardless of the operation timing.

If the first bell prize is established in the first CB state ST2, the game medium of "1" is given. As described above, in the first CB state ST2, the game can be executed only when the game medium of "3" is bet. On the other hand, the number of game media given in the game in the first CB state ST2 is "1". Then, the first CB state ST2 ends when the game medium of "30" is given. Therefore, in the first CB state ST2, it is necessary to generate the event that the game medium of "1" is given 30 times in the game executed by betting the game medium of "3". In this case, From the start to the end of the first CB state ST2, the game medium owned by the player is reduced by at least 60. Therefore, the first CB state ST2 becomes a disadvantageous gaming state for the player.

Further, in the first CB state ST2, as described above, the normal replay prize may be established, and both the normal replay prize and the first bell prize may not be established. Then, when the first CB state ST2 occurs in the second section SC2, the first CB state ST2, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues for 30 games or more, and the number of games is executed in the second section SC2. It will be added to the total number of games played.

In the winning state of the second CB combination, the second CB winning can be established in the game in which the number of bets is "2", while the second CB winning is not established in the game in which the number of bets is "3". Therefore, even if a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the second CB winning combination, the winning combination is not won in any index value IV in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). , The second CB prize is not established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, even if the index value IV in which the so-called omission may occur in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination is won when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the second CB winning combination, the reel The second CB prize is not established regardless of the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination and the second CB winning is established, the second CB state ST3 is set.

As shown in FIG. 29B, in the second CB state ST3, the game can be executed in a situation where the number of bets is "2", and the maximum number of bets on the game medium is "2". In the second CB state ST3, the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 with a probability of 3/10 in the winning combination process (FIG. 16) in each game, and when the normal replay winning data is stored, the left stop is performed. If the operation timing of the button 42 is a predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not a predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored.

In the second CB state ST3, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), or when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 but the left stop button 42 If the normal replay winning cannot be established because the operation timing is not a predetermined timing, the first bell winning can be established. In this case, the first bell winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, but the first bell winning may not be established depending on the stop operation timing of the left stop button 42.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the second CB state ST3, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in order. And, the normal replay winning may be surely established regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first CB state ST2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stops of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped. The first bell winning may be surely established regardless of the operation timing.

If the first bell prize is established in the second CB state ST3, the game medium of "1" is given. As described above, in the second CB state ST3, the game can be executed only when the game medium of "2" is bet. On the other hand, the number of game media given in the game in the second CB state ST3 is "1". Then, the second CB state ST3 ends when the game medium of "30" is given. Therefore, in the second CB state ST3, it is necessary to generate the event that the game medium of "1" is given in the game executed by betting the game medium of "2" 30 times. In this case, From the start to the end of the second CB state ST3, the game medium owned by the player is reduced by at least 30. Therefore, the second CB state ST3 is a disadvantageous gaming state for the player. However, this disadvantage of the second CB state ST3 is lower than that of the first CB state ST2.

Further, in the second CB state ST3, as described above, the normal replay prize may be established, and both the normal replay prize and the first bell prize may not be established. Then, when the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, the second CB state ST3, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues for 30 games or more, and the number of games is executed in the second section SC2. It will be added to the total number of games played.

In the configuration in which the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are set as the game states that are disadvantageous to the player as described above, the winning state of the second CB combination is obtained by executing the game in which the number of bets is "2". As a result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in each game, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped by executing the game in which the number of bets is "3" after preventing the second CB winning from being established. Regardless of the order and the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, it is possible to play the game while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. That is, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed and the second CB combination is won, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed thereafter to obtain the second CB combination. The second CB prize is not established even in the winning state of. Further, in the winning state of the second CB combination, even if the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the first CB combination is excluded from the lottery target in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16), so that the first CB combination Will not be in the winning state. Then, the first CB prize is not established because the first CB combination is not won, and the gaming state does not shift to the first CB state ST2. As a result, it is possible to execute the game in which the number of bets is "3" while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 from occurring. Then, by executing the game in which the number of bets is "3", the transition to the second section SC2 can occur as described above, and the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 can occur.

Here, in the slot machine 10, it is assumed that the entire main RAM 74 clearing process (step S105) is executed for the purpose of obtaining an illegal profit. For example, in a situation where medals are paid out, more medals than originally supposed to be paid out are paid out by preventing the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53 from detecting medals by using a fraudulent jig. It is expected that fraudulent acts will occur. On the other hand, as described above, the slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting the intrusion of the fraudulent jig, and the object detection sensor detects the intrusion of the fraudulent jig. In that case, the intrusion abnormality notification is executed. Therefore, even if the fraudulent jig is inserted so as not to be detected by the object detection sensor, the act of illegally paying out many medals using the fraudulent jig is repeated. The intrusion of the illegal jig may be detected by the object detection sensor and the intrusion abnormality notification may be executed. In this case, it is assumed that the fraudster illegally executes the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 to forcibly terminate the intrusion abnormality notification. Then, it is assumed that the game is played by using the illegally obtained medals in the slot machine 10 in which the intrusion abnormality notification is not executed.

However, when such an illegal act is performed, the entire main RAM 74 is cleared (step S105), so that the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74. That is, the second CB combination is not in the winning state. Then, when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in a state where the second CB combination is not in the winning state, the player can take the winning state of the first CB combination and the first CB prize is established, which is disadvantageous to the player. It becomes the first CB state ST2 which is a game state. This makes it possible to give a disadvantage to a person who commits the above-mentioned cheating. On the other hand, in the game hall, by executing a game in which the number of bets is "2" before the start of business and setting the winning state of the second CB role, it becomes a normal player who does not perform the above-mentioned cheating. On the other hand, it is possible to play a game in which the number of bets is "3" while preventing the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 from occurring.

As shown in FIG. 29 (a), in a game in which the number of bets is "2", the probability of winning the second CB combination is about 1 / 2.2, whereas in the game in which the number of bets is "3". The probability of winning the first CB role is about 1 / 6.6. That is, the probability of winning the second CB combination is set higher than the probability of winning the first CB combination. As a result, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in a game hall or the like to win the second CB combination, the number of games required to reach the winning state of the second CB combination is reduced. Is possible. On the other hand, even if the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed before the second CB combination is mistakenly won, the probability of winning the first CB combination is higher than the probability of winning the second CB combination. If it is low, it becomes difficult to win the first CB role.

The probability of winning the 2nd CB combination is not limited to a higher probability than the probability of winning the 1st CB combination, and the probability of winning the 1st CB combination is higher than the probability of winning the 2nd CB combination. The configuration may be high, and the probability of winning the first CB combination and the probability of winning the second CB combination may be the same or substantially the same.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a CB process executed by the main MPU 72. The CB process is executed in step S901 in the corresponding process (FIG. 26) at the end of the game. Since the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26) is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in one game as described above, the CB processing is also executed in one game, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It will be executed after all the rotations of are stopped.

By determining whether or not "1" is set in any of the first CB state flag and the second CB state flag provided in the main RAM 74, the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. (Step S1001). The first CB state flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game state is the first CB state ST2 by the main MPU 72, and the second CB state flag is mainly whether or not the game state is the second CB state ST3. It is a flag for specifying by the side MPU 72.

If a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the first CB prize has been established in this game (step S1002). That is, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the first CB winning is stopped at the main line ML in the situation where the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. When the first CB winning is established (step S1002: YES), "1" is set in the first CB state flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1003), and the first CB winning data of the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S1004). ). Then, a first CB winning command indicating that the state has shifted to the first CB state ST2 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1005). As a result, the gaming state becomes the first CB state ST2. In the first CB state ST2, as described above, the processes of steps S513 to S515 in the bet handling process (FIG. 14) are executed, so that the game is executed only in the situation where the game medium of "3" is bet. The Rukoto.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the second CB prize has been established in this game (step S1006). That is, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the second CB winning is stopped at the main line ML in the situation where the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. When the second CB winning is established (step S1006: YES), "1" is set in the second CB state flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1007), and the second CB winning data of the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S1008). ). Then, a second CB winning command indicating that the second CB state ST3 has been entered is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1009). As a result, the gaming state becomes the second CB state ST3. In the second CB state ST3, as described above, the game medium of "2" is bet by executing the processes of step S503, step S508, step S515 and step S516 in the bet handling process (FIG. 14). The game will be executed only at.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the first bell winning has been established in this game (step S1010). When the first bell winning is established (step S1010: YES), the value of the total grant counter provided in the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S1011). The total grant counter is a counter for specifying the total number of game media granted in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 by the main MPU 72, and the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is started. In case, "0" is cleared.

When the value of the total grant counter after 1 addition becomes "30", which is the end reference number of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 (step S1012: YES), the CB corresponding to the current CB states ST2 and ST3. The status flag is cleared to "0" (step S1013). Then, a CB end command indicating that the current CB states ST2 and ST3 have ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1014).

Next, a state in which the gaming state shifts to the CB states ST2 and ST3 and a state in which the transition to the CB states ST2 and ST3 are restricted will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 31 (a) shows the period during which the game is played in the situation where the game medium of “3” is bet, and FIG. 31 (b) shows the game is played in the situation where the game medium of “2” is bet. The period is shown, FIG. 31 (c) shows the period in which the first CB combination is in the winning state, FIG. 31 (d) shows the period in which the second CB combination is in the winning state, and FIG. 31 (e) shows the period. The period during which the first CB prize or the second CB prize can be established is shown, FIG. 31 (f) shows the period which is either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, and FIG. 31 (g) shows the first section. The period during which the transition to the second section SC2 is possible is shown in SC1, and FIG. 31 (h) shows the period during which the game is digested in the second section SC2.

First, a case where the transition to the CB states ST2 and ST3 is restricted will be described.

As shown in FIG. 31 (b), the game in which the number of bets is "2" is started at the timing of t1 which is the timing after the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed. In this case, in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, the game section is the first section SC1, the lottery mode is the normal mode, and the normal game state is ST1. be. Then, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeatedly executed, the second CB combination is won at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 31 (d). In this case, the transition to the second CB state ST3 does not occur by preventing the second CB winning from being established. Further, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed as shown in FIG. 31 (b) in the situation where the second CB combination is in the winning state, the second CB is executed as shown in FIG. 31 (e). It will be a period during which a prize can be established.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 31A, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeatedly executed. Even if the 2nd CB combination is won, if the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the 2nd CB winning will not be established, and in the winning state of the 2nd CB combination, the 1st CB combination will be won. There is nothing to do. Therefore, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 31 (e), it is a period during which the CB prize cannot be established. Further, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 does not occur, but when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the second section Since a transition to SC2 may occur, the transition to the second section SC2 is possible at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 31 (g).

After that, when a transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing of t4, the second section SC2 is set as shown in FIG. 31 (h), and then the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed. The game will be digested in the second section SC2.

After that, at the timing of t5, a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed as shown in FIG. 31 (b). In this case, since the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination, the second CB winning can be established as shown in FIG. 31 (e). Further, even if a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game digested in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 31 (h). After that, when the second CB prize is established at the timing of t6, the second CB state ST3 is set as shown in FIG. 31 (f). Even if the game in the second CB state ST3 is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a digested game in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 31 (h).

Next, a case where the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeated from the timing after the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 31A, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is started at the timing of t7, which is the timing after the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed. In this case, in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, the game section is the first section SC1, the lottery mode is the normal mode, and the normal game state is ST1. be. When a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, a transition to the second section SC2 may occur. Therefore, at the timing of the t7, the game to the second section SC2 is performed as shown in FIG. 31 (g). It will be a transitional period. After that, when a transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing of t8, the second section SC2 is set as shown in FIG. 31 (h), and then the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed. The game will be digested in the second section SC2.

After that, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeatedly executed, so that the first CB combination is won at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 31 (c). Further, when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed as shown in FIG. 31 (a) in the situation where the first CB combination is in the winning state, the first CB is executed as shown in FIG. 31 (e). It will be a period during which a prize can be established. After that, when the first CB prize is established at the timing of t10, the first CB state ST2 is set as shown in FIG. 31 (f). Even if the game in the first CB state ST2 is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a digested game in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 31 (h).

After that, at the timing of t11, the first CB state ST2 ends as shown in FIG. 31 (f). Even after the first CB state ST2 is completed, the second section SC2 is continued as shown in FIG. 31 (h), and the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed as shown in FIG. 31 (a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 31 (h), the game is treated as a digested game in the second section SC2.

Next, a case where the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated from the timing after the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 31 (b), the game in which the number of bets is "2" is started at the timing of t12, which is the timing after the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed. In this case, in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, the game section is the first section SC1, the lottery mode is the normal mode, and the normal game state is ST1. be. Then, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeatedly executed, the second CB combination is won at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 31 (d). In this case, the transition to the second CB state ST3 does not occur by preventing the second CB winning from being established. Further, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed as shown in FIG. 31 (b) in the situation where the second CB combination is in the winning state, the second CB is executed as shown in FIG. 31 (e). It will be a period during which a prize can be established. When the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 31 (g), the transition to the second section SC2 is possible. It doesn't become. After that, when the second CB prize is established at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 31 (f), the second CB state ST3 is set from the timing of t14 to the timing of t15.

Next, the contents of various notifications executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of bets on the game medium will be described.

As described above, although the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are disadvantageous game states for the player, the second CB combination is won by first executing the game in which the number of bets is "2". By executing the game in which the number of bets is "3", it is possible to aim for the occurrence of the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. .. In this case, the slot machine 10 is configured to notify that the second CB combination is not in the winning state and that the third CB combination is in the winning state.

32 (a) to 32 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the content of the notification related to the winning state of the first CB combination and the second CB combination executed by the image display device 63.

In a situation where the game can be executed and a situation where the game is being executed, the image display device 63 displays a moving image of the predetermined character image G11 as shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (c). .. In this case, in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed in a part of the area of the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 32 (a). .. The non-internal notification image G12 is displayed at a corner portion of the image display device 63 so as not to overlap the predetermined character image G11 in the front-rear direction. The display of the non-internal notification image G12 is maintained when the situation in which neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won continues.

As the non-internal notification image G12, the non-internal explicit image G21 showing that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, and neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. A non-internal digestion game number image G22 showing the number of games played in the situation is displayed. As the non-internal explicit image G21, the character image "returning" is specifically displayed. As a result, it is clarified that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won.

As the non-internal digestion game number image G22, specifically, a character image indicating the number of games executed in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won is displayed, such as "010 game". .. In this case, the first game in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won after the partial clear processing (step S104) or the entire clear processing (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed. Until the completion, "000 games" are displayed as the non-internal digestion game number image G22. Further, until the first game in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won after the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is completed, the non-internal digestion game number image G22 is used. "000 games" is displayed. After that, regardless of whether the number of bets is "3" or the number of bets is "2", the number of games displayed as the non-internal digestion game number image G22 each time one game is executed is 1 is added.

In a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, the second CB combination is won in the game in which the number of bets is "2", and the second CB combination is won. As shown in b), the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is terminated. In this case, although the display of the predetermined character image G11 is continued, the image clearly indicating that the second CB combination is in the winning state is not displayed on the image display device 63.

In a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the first CB combination is won in the game in which the number of bets is "3", and the first CB combination is won. As shown in c), the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is terminated. In this case, the first internal explicit image G13 that clearly indicates that the first CB combination is in the winning state is displayed in a part of the area of the image display device 63. The first internal explicit image G13 is displayed at a corner portion of the image display device 63 so as not to overlap the predetermined character image G11 in the front-rear direction. The display of the first internal explicit image G13 is maintained when the winning state of the first CB combination continues. Then, when the first CB winning is established and the gaming state shifts to the first CB state ST2, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 is completed.

In the first CB state ST2, the image display device 63 displays the CB state. Further, also in the second CB state ST3, the image display device 63 displays the CB state. The specific content of the display during the CB state is arbitrary, but for example, in a situation where the predetermined character image G11 is displayed on the image display device 63, the entire display surface of the image display device 63 may be displayed dimly. .. Further, an image showing the remaining number of payouts of the game medium required by the end of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 may be displayed.

In addition to the above notifications, various bet number-related notifications are executed as notifications related to the winning states of the first CB combination and the second CB combination. Specifically, as a bet number related notification, in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, if the second CB combination is won in the game in which the number of bets is "2", the reel The winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is executed by the timing when the stop operation of 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective. The execution mode of the notification of winning the second CB combination is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "winning the second CB combination" is output from the speaker 62. The notification of winning correspondence of the second CB combination occurs even after the game in which the second CB combination is won, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination.

In the winning state of the second CB combination, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the 2-bet correspondence notification is executed. The execution mode of the 2-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "two sheets are covered" is output from the speaker 62. In the 2-bet correspondence notification, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated without sandwiching the game in which the number of bets is "3" in the winning state of the second CB combination, the number of bets is "2". It does not occur in the second and subsequent games of the game.

In the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the 3-bet correspondence notification is executed when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed. The execution mode of the 3-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "three sheets are covered" is output from the speaker 62. The 3-bet correspondence notification is repeated without sandwiching a game in which the number of bets is "3" and a game in which the number of bets is "2" in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. In this case, it does not occur in the second and subsequent games of the game in which the number of bets is "3".

In the situation where neither the 1st CB combination nor the 2nd CB combination is won, the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is effective when the 1st CB combination is won in the game in which the number of bets is "3". The winning correspondence notification of the first CB combination is executed by the timing when becomes. The execution mode of the winning correspondence notification of the first CB combination is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "winning the first CB combination" is output from the speaker 62. However, the notification of winning correspondence of the first CB combination occurs only in the game in which the first CB combination is won, and the number of bets in the subsequent winning state of the first CB combination is "2" and the number of bets is "3". It does not run in any of the games.

In the winning state of the first CB combination, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the 2-bet correspondence notification is executed. The execution mode of the 2-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "two sheets are covered" is output from the speaker 62. In the 2-bet correspondence notification, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated without sandwiching the game in which the number of bets is "3" in the winning state of the first CB combination, the number of bets is "2". It does not occur in the second and subsequent games of the game.

Next, a state in which various notifications are executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of bets on the game medium will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 33. FIG. 33 (a) shows the execution period of the game in which the number of bets is “2”, FIG. 33 (b) shows the execution period of the game in which the number of bets is “3”, and FIG. 33 (c) shows the execution period of the game in which the number of bets is “3”. Indicates the period during which the notification sound at the time of "2" betting, which occurs when the game in which is "2" is executed, is output, and FIG. 33 (d) shows the period in which the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed. FIG. 33 (e) shows the period during which the notification sound at the time of “3” betting that occurs in the case of the above is output, and FIG. 33 (e) shows the period during which the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63. (F) shows the period during which the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63, FIG. 33 (g) shows the period during which the first CB combination is in the winning state, and FIG. 33 (h) shows the period in which the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed. The period in which the 2CB combination is won is shown, FIG. 33 (i) shows the period during which the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is executed, and FIG. 33 (j) shows the period in which the image display device 63 is in the CB state. Indicates the period during which the display is performed.

By starting the supply of the operating power to the slot machine 10, the effect execution control is started by the effect side MPU 92 at the timing of t1. In this case, since the process of clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105) is being executed, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. Therefore, at the timing of t1, the display of the non-internally notified image G12 is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 33 (e).

After that, at the timing of t2, a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed as shown in FIG. 33 (b). In this case, since the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the 3-bet correspondence notification is supported as shown in FIG. 33 (d). The notification sound is output. As a result, it is possible to make the player or the manager of the game hall recognize that the game in which the number of bets is "3" is being executed in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. It becomes. Further, at the timing of t2, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is updated from "000 games" to "001 games".

At the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed again in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. However, since the game is a game in which the number of bets is "3" from the second time onward, which is executed without sandwiching the game in which the number of bets is "2", the 3-bet correspondence notification is not executed. As a result, when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is intentionally repeated in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the 3-bet correspondence notification is repeatedly executed. It is possible to prevent it from happening. Further, at the timing of t3, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is updated from "001 game" to "002 game".

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed again in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. In the game, as shown in FIG. 33 (g), the first CB combination is won. Therefore, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), the notification sound corresponding to the winning correspondence notification of the first CB combination is output. As a result, it becomes possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the first CB role has been won. Further, the notification of winning correspondence of the first CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in the game in which the first CB combination is won. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the first CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the game in which the first CB combination is won. .. Further, at the timing of t4, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is updated from "002 game" to "003 game".

After that, the game in which the first CB combination is won at the timing of t5 ends without the establishment of the first CB prize. In this case, at the timing of t5, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is terminated as shown in FIG. 33 (e), and the first display in the image display device 63 is as shown in FIG. 33 (f). The display of the internal explicit image G13 is started. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the first CB combination has been won.

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the first CB combination. Then, at the timing of t7, which is the timing at which the game ends, as shown in FIGS. 33 (g) and 33 (i), the first CB prize is established, and the game shifts to the first CB state ST2. In this case, at the timing of t7, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 in the image display device 63 is terminated as shown in FIG. 33 (f), and the image display device 63 is displayed as shown in FIG. 33 (j). The display during the CB state is started.

After that, at the timing of t8, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the first CB state ST2. In the game as well, as shown in FIG. 33 (j), the display during the CB state in the image display device 63 is continued. After that, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeated, and the first CB state ST2 ends at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 33 (i). In this case, at the timing of t9, the display in the CB state in the image display device 63 is terminated as shown in FIG. 33 (j). Further, since neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 starts at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 33 (e). Will be done. In this case, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is "000 games".

After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 33A, a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. At the timing of t10, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is updated from "000 games" to "001 games".

After that, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 33A, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed again in the situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. In the game, as shown in FIG. 33 (h), the second CB combination is won. Therefore, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the notification sound corresponding to the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is output. As a result, it becomes possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB role has been won. Further, the notification of winning correspondence of the second CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in the game in which the second CB combination is won. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the game in which the second CB combination is won. .. Further, at the timing of t11, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is updated from "001 game" to "002 game".

After that, the game in which the second CB combination is won at the timing of t12 ends without the establishment of the second CB prize. In this case, at the timing of t12, the display of the non-internally notified image G12 on the image display device 63 is terminated as shown in FIG. 33 (e). This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB role has been won.

After that, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 33A, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the notification sound corresponding to the 2-bet correspondence notification is output, and the notification sound corresponding to the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is output again. As a result, it becomes possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the game in which the number of bets is "2" has been executed in the winning state of the second CB role, and the second CB role is won. It is possible to make the player and the manager of the game hall recognize that the player is present. Further, the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

Then, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 33A, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed again in the winning state of the second CB combination. However, since the game is a game in which the number of bets is "2" from the second time onward, which is executed without sandwiching the game in which the number of bets is "3", the 2-bet correspondence notification is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeatedly executed when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is intentionally repeated in the winning state of the second CB combination. Become. On the other hand, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the notification sound corresponding to the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is output again. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that he / she has won the second CB role. Further, the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 33B at each of the timing of t15 and the timing of t16, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. Since it is originally assumed that the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the 2nd CB combination, the 3-bet correspondence notification and the winning correspondence of the 2nd CB combination are supported for the game. No notification is executed.

After that, at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 33A, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the notification sound corresponding to the 2-bet correspondence notification is output, and the notification sound corresponding to the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is output again. As a result, it becomes possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the game in which the number of bets is "2" has been executed in the winning state of the second CB role, and the second CB role is won. It is possible to make the player and the manager of the game hall recognize that the player is present. Further, the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

Then, at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 33A, the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed again in the winning state of the second CB combination. However, since the game is a game in which the number of bets is "2" from the second time onward, which is executed without sandwiching the game in which the number of bets is "3", the 2-bet correspondence notification is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeatedly executed when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is intentionally repeated in the winning state of the second CB combination. Become. On the other hand, at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the notification sound corresponding to the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is output again. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that he / she has won the second CB role. Further, the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is started before the timing when the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

Next, a processing configuration for performing various notifications executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of bets on the game medium as described above will be described.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the internal notification control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. The internal notification control process is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

First, it is determined whether or not the command at the start of supply is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1101). When the main MPU 72 starts supplying the operating power, if there is no abnormality in the storage state of the main RAM 74, the return command is used as the command at the start of the supply in the main process (FIG. 10). Send either an initialization command or a partial initialization command. As already explained, the return command is sent to the address before the power is cut off without executing the partial clear process (step S104) and the full clear process (step S105) when no abnormality has occurred in the storage state of the main RAM 74. This command is sent when returning. The all initialization command is a command transmitted when the all clear process (step S105) is executed as described later. The partial initialization command is a command transmitted when the partial clear process (step S104) is executed as described later.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the control process at the start of supply is executed (step S1102). FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a control process at the start of supply.

When the all clear process (step S105) is executed in the main process (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 72 and the all initialization command is received (step S1201: YES), the non-internal notification image in the image display device 63. The display of G12 is started (step S1202). When the all clear process (step S105) is executed, since the entire area of the main RAM 74 is initialized as described in detail later, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. It becomes a situation. Therefore, when all the initialization commands are received, the display of the non-internally notified image G12 on the image display device 63 is started. In this case, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games".

When a partial clear process (step S104) is executed in the main process (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 72 and a partial initialization command is received (step S1203: YES), the partial initialization command is executed. Based on the set information, it is determined whether or not the second CB combination is in the winning state (step S1204). When the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed, the area where the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 is not initialized and the area other than the area (the area other than the area) (details will be described later). The area where the first CB winning data is stored) is initialized.

If the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, the main side even after the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed after the supply of the operating power is restarted. The state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the RAM 74 is maintained. On the other hand, if the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 immediately before the supply of the operating power is stopped, after the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed after the supply of the operating power is restarted. However, the state in which the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 is maintained. As will be described later, the partial initialization command is set with information indicating whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. Therefore, in step S1204, it is specified whether or not the information indicating that the second CB winning data is stored is partially included in the initialization command.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1205). In this case, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games". When an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, "1" is set in the second CB internal middle flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1206). The second CB internal middle flag is a flag for the effecting side MPU 92 to specify that the second CB state is the winning state.

When the return command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1207: YES), it is determined whether or not the second CB combination is in the winning state based on the information set in the return command (step S1208). As described above, the return command is set with information indicating whether or not any of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. When the second CB combination is in the winning state (step S1208: YES), "1" is set in the second CB internal middle flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1209).

If the second CB combination is not in the winning state (step S1208: NO), it is determined whether or not the first CB combination is in the winning state based on the information set in the return command (step S1210). When the first CB combination is not in the winning state (step S1210: NO), the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1211). In this case, the display content of the non-internal digestion game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games". When the first CB combination is in the winning state (step S1210: YES), the display of the first internal explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1212). After that, "1" is set in the first CB internal middle flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1213). The 1st CB internal middle flag is a flag for the effecting side MPU 92 to specify that the 1st CB state is the winning state.

Returning to the explanation of the internal notification control process (FIG. 34), when the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), the information set in the winning result command is used in this game. It is determined whether or not the first CB prize has been established while winning the 1CB combination (step S1104). The main MPU 72 transmits a winning result command to the directing MPU 92 in step S813, which is a process executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game are stopped in the reel control process (FIG. 25). The winning result command includes information corresponding to the type of winning data stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game, and whether or not the winning is established in the current game. Information and, if a prize has been established in this game, information on the type of prize for which the prize has been established are set. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, "1" is set in the first CB internal middle flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1105), and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is terminated (step S1106). , The display of the first internal explicit image G13 in the image display device 63 is started (step S1107).

In the internal notification control process, when the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), the second CB combination is won in this game from the information set in the winning result command, and the second CB combination is won. It is determined whether or not the 2CB winning is established (step S1108). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1108, "1" is set in the second CB internal middle flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1109), and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 in the image display device 63 is terminated (step S1110). ..

In the internal notification control process, when the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is further determined whether or not the first CB winning command or the second CB winning command is received from the main MPU 72. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the first CB prize or the second CB prize is established in this game (step S1111). As already explained, the main MPU 72 transmits the first CB winning command in step S1005 of the CB processing (FIG. 30) when the first CB winning is established, and the CB processing when the second CB winning is established. The second CB winning command is transmitted in step S1009 of FIG. 30 (FIG. 30).

If any of the CB winnings is established (step S1111: YES), the CB internal middle flag clearing process is executed (step S1112). In the CB internal medium flag clearing process, when "1" is set in the first CB internal medium flag of the effect side RAM 94, the first CB internal medium flag is cleared to "0", and the inside of the second CB of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared. When "1" is set in the middle flag, the middle flag inside the second CB is cleared by "0". After that, the end processing of various displays is executed (step S1113). In the termination process, when the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is terminated, and the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63. If so, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 is terminated. After that, the display in the CB state in the image display device 63 is started (step S1114).

In the internal notification control process, when the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is determined whether or not the CB end command is received from the main MPU 72 to determine the execution target. It is determined whether or not the CB states ST2 and ST3 that have been changed have been completed (step S1115). As described above, the main MPU 72 transmits a CB end command in step S1014 of the CB process (FIG. 30) when the CB states ST2 and ST3 to be executed are completed.

When the CB states ST2 and ST3 that have been the execution targets are completed (step S1115: YES), the CB state display in the image display device 63 is terminated (step S1116). After that, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1117).

In the internal notification control process, when the game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), both the 1st CB internal medium flag and the 2nd CB internal internal flag of the effect side RAM 94 are set to "1". If is not set (step S1119 and step S1120: NO), the non-internal medium notification process is executed (step S1121). Further, when the game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), and "1" is set in the first CB internal middle flag of the production side RAM 94 (step S1119: YES). , The first CB internal notification process is executed (step S1122). Further, when the game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), and "1" is set in the second CB internal middle flag of the production side RAM 94 (step S1120: YES). , The second CB internal notification process is executed (step S1123).

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a non-internal medium notification process executed in step S1121 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 34).

First, the value of the returning counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 is added by 1 (step S1301). The returning counter is a counter for the effector MPU 92 to specify the number of times the game has been executed since the display of the non-internal notification image G12 was started on the image display device 63, and is set in the returning counter. The number corresponding to the value is displayed as the non-internal digestion game number image G22 in the non-internal notification image G12. When the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is started on the image display device 63, the value of the returning counter is cleared to "0". After that, the display content of the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed so that the number corresponding to the value set in the returning counter after 1 addition is displayed in the non-internal digestion game number image G22 in the non-internal notification image G12. Update (step S1302).

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S1303). As described above, the main MPU 72 transmits the first bet number command if the bet number of the game is "3" in the start setting process (FIG. 15) that is executed when one game is started. Then (step S603), if the bet number of the game is "2", the second bet number command is transmitted (step S604). In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the first bet number command is received from the main MPU 72.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, the "3" bet notification process is executed on condition that "1" is not set in the "3" bet notification flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1304: NO). After that (step S1305), "1" is set in the "3" bet notification flag (step S1306). In the "3" bet notification process, a 3-bet correspondence notification is provided to notify that a game in which the number of bets is "3" has been executed in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. To be executed. As a result, for example, a message such as "Three sheets are covered" is output from the speaker 62. The "3" bet notification flag is a flag for the directing MPU 92 to specify whether or not the 3-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeated. When "1" is set in the "3" bet notification flag, the "3" bet notification process is not executed, so that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. When the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeated in the situation, it is possible to prevent the 3-bet correspondence notification from being repeated.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S1304, or when the process of step S1306 is executed, whether or not the first CB combination has been won in this game is determined from the information set in the game start command received this time. Determine (step S1307). When the first CB combination is won (step S1307: YES), the notification process at the time of winning the first CB is executed (step S1308). In the notification process at the time of winning the first CB, the winning correspondence notification of the first CB combination is executed. As a result, for example, a message such as "winning the first CB combination" is output from the speaker 62.

When a negative determination is made in step S1303, that is, when the number of bets in this game is "2" and the second bet number command is received from the main MPU 72, the "3" bet notified flag of the production side RAM 94 Is cleared to "0" (step S1309). The "3" bet notification flag is cleared to "0" even when neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won.

After that, it is determined whether or not the second CB combination has been won in this game from the information set in the game start command received this time (step S1310). When the second CB combination is won (step S1310: YES), the notification process at the time of winning the second CB is executed (step S1311). In the notification process at the time of winning the second CB, the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, for example, a message such as "winning the second CB combination" is output from the speaker 62.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the first CB internal internal notification process executed in step S1122 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 34).

First, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S1401). As described above, the main MPU 72 transmits the first bet number command if the bet number of the game is "3" in the start setting process (FIG. 15) that is executed when one game is started. Then (step S603), if the bet number of the game is "2", the second bet number command is transmitted (step S604). In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the second bet number command is received from the main MPU 72.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the "2" bet notification process is executed on condition that "1" is not set in the "2" bet notification flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1402: NO). After that (step S1403), "1" is set in the "2" bet notified flag (step S1404). In the "2" bet notification process, the 2-bet correspondence notification for notifying that the game in which the number of bets is "2" has been executed in the winning state of the first CB combination is executed. As a result, for example, a message such as "two sheets are covered" is output from the speaker 62. The "2" bet notification flag is a flag for the directing MPU 92 to specify whether or not the 2-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated. When "1" is set in the "2" bet notification flag, the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the first CB combination by not executing the "2" bet notification process. When the game is repeated, it is possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeated.

When a negative determination is made in step S1401, the "2" bet notification flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1405). The "2" bet notification flag is cleared to "0" even when the first CB combination is won, and is cleared to "0" when the second CB combination is won.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a second CB internal internal notification process executed in step S1123 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 34).

First, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S1501). As described above, the main MPU 72 transmits the first bet number command if the bet number of the game is "3" in the start setting process (FIG. 15) that is executed when one game is started. Then (step S603), if the bet number of the game is "2", the second bet number command is transmitted (step S604). In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the second bet number command is received from the main MPU 72.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the "2" bet notification process is executed on condition that "1" is not set in the "2" bet notification flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1502: NO). After that (step S1503), "1" is set in the "2" bet notification flag (step S1504). In the "2" bet notification process, the 2-bet correspondence notification for notifying that the game in which the number of bets is "2" has been executed in the winning state of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, for example, a message such as "two sheets are covered" is output from the speaker 62. The "2" bet notification flag is a flag for the directing MPU 92 to specify whether or not the 2-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is repeated. When "1" is set in the "2" bet notification flag, the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination by not executing the "2" bet notification process. When the game is repeated, it is possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeated.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, or when the process of step S1504 is executed, the notification process at the time of winning the second CB is executed (step S1505). In the notification process at the time of winning the second CB, the winning correspondence notification of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, for example, a message such as "winning the second CB combination" is output from the speaker 62. By executing the notification processing at the time of winning the second CB as described above, in the winning state of the second CB combination, every time the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is notified. It will be executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1501, the "2" bet notification flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1506). The "2" bet notification flag is cleared to "0" even when the first CB combination is won, and is cleared to "0" when the second CB combination is won.

Next, the contents of the area of the main RAM 74 to be initialized in each of the partial clear process (step S104) and the full clear process (step S105) in the main MPU 72 will be described.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of the main RAM 74. As shown in FIG. 39, an address is set in each storage area of the main RAM 74. The address is set as serial number information. Specifically, the address of "00FF" is set as the start address, the address of "01FF" is set as the address of the next order, and the address of "02FF" is set as the address of the next order. The address is set so that it will be a serial number even after that.

As a storage area corresponding to the start address "00FF", a second CB winning data area, which is an area for storing the second CB winning data, is set. When the index value IV in which the second CB winning data is set is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the second CB winning data is set in the second CB winning data area, and the second CB winning is established. Clears the 2nd CB winning data from the 2nd CB winning data area.

The first CB winning data area, which is an area for storing the first CB winning data, is set as the storage area corresponding to the next order "01FF" with respect to the starting address "00FF". When the index value IV in which the first CB winning data is set is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the first CB winning data is set in the first CB winning data area, and the first CB winning is established. Clears the 1st CB winning data from the 1st CB winning data area.

As a storage area corresponding to "02FF", which is the next order with respect to "01FF", a set value storage area, which is an area for storing the set value to be set, is set. The set value selected in the set value update process (step S106) of the main process (FIG. 10) is stored in the set value storage area.

FIG. 40A is a flowchart showing a complete clearing process executed in step S105 of the main process (FIG. 10).

First, "00FF", which is the start address of the main RAM 74, is set as the target address (step S1601). After that, a clear execution process for clearing the storage area corresponding to the current target address in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S1602).

After that, the address update process for setting the target address to the address in the next order in the address of the main RAM 74 is executed (step S1603). As a result, if the target address up to that point is "00FF", which is the start address, the target address becomes "01FF", and if the target address up to that point is "01FF", the target address becomes "02FF". ".

After that, it is determined whether or not the target address after being updated by the address update process corresponds to the end address (step S1604). The end address is an address corresponding to the final address set in the main RAM 74 in the following order. If a negative determination is made in step S1604, the process returns to step S1602. By repeating the processes of steps S1602 to S1604 in this way, all the storage areas of the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, the initial setting is executed for the storage area targeted for the clear execution process of step S1602 in this all clear process. After that, an all initialization command indicating that the all clearing process has been executed for the main RAM 74 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1606).

FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing a partial clearing process executed in step S104 of the main process (FIG. 10).

First, "01FF", which is an address in the following order with respect to the start address of the main RAM 74, is set as the target address (step S1701). As a result, the second CB winning data area, which is the storage area corresponding to the start address "00FF" of the main RAM 74, is excluded from the execution target of clearing "0" and is excluded from the execution target of the initial setting process (step S1705). Is also excluded. After that, a clear execution process for clearing the storage area corresponding to the current target address in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S1702).

After that, the address update process for setting the target address to the address in the next order in the address of the main RAM 74 is executed (step S1703). As a result, if the target address up to that point is "01FF", which is the address in the next order with respect to the start address of the main RAM 74, the target address becomes "02FF" and the target address up to that point is "02FF". If it is, the target address becomes "03FF".

After that, it is determined whether or not the target address after being updated by the address update process corresponds to the end address (step S1704). The end address is an address corresponding to the final address set in the main RAM 74 in the following order. If a negative determination is made in step S1704, the process returns to step S1702. By repeating the processes of steps S1702 to S1704 in this way, all of the storage areas other than the second CB winning data area, which is the storage area corresponding to the start address of the main RAM 74, among the storage areas of the main RAM 74 "0" is cleared.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, the initial setting is executed for the storage area targeted for the clear execution process of step S1702 in the partial clear process this time. After that, a partial initialization command indicating that the partial clearing process has been executed for the main RAM 74 is transmitted to the effecting MPU 92 (step S1706). In this case, it is specified whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the second CB winning data is stored, a partial initialization command is issued with the corresponding information set. Will be sent.

Next, a state in which the partial clearing process (step S104) and the full clearing process (step S105) are executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 41 (a) shows the period during which the operating power is supplied to the main MPU 72, and FIG. 41 (b) shows the period during which the main process (FIG. 10) is executed by the main MPU 72. c) indicates the execution timing of the setting update start operation in which the power switch 55 is turned on when the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is not pressed. 41 (d) shows the execution of the RAM clear operation in which the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is being turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is being pressed. The timing is shown, FIG. 41 (e) shows the period during which the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed by the main MPU 72, and FIG. 41 (f) shows the entire clearing process (step S105) by the main MPU 72. 41 (g) shows the period in which the first CB combination is in the winning state, and FIG. 41 (h) shows the period in which the second CB combination is in the winning state.

First, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started with the second CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, and a partial clearing process (FIG. 40 (b)) is executed by the main MPU 72. Will be described.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is not pressed. By performing the setting update start operation, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started as shown in FIG. 41 (a) at the timing of t1, and the main side is started as shown in FIG. 41 (b). The main process (FIG. 10) is started at the MPU 72, and then a part of the clear process (FIG. 40 (b)) is performed at the main MPU 72 from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 41 (e). Is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 41 (h), the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started in a state where the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, but the second CB is also started after the timing of t3. The state in which the winning data is stored is maintained. The set value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t3.

When the setting update start operation is performed as described above, the partial clearing process (FIG. 40 (b)) is executed so that the operating power to the main MPU 72 in the winning state of the second CB combination is executed. Even if the set value update process (step S106) is executed when the supply of the operating power is subsequently restarted when the supply of the set value is stopped, after the execution of the set value update process (step S106). It is also possible to maintain the winning state of the second CB role. As a result, the manager of the game hall does not repeatedly execute the game in which the number of bets is "2" before the opening of the game hall to make the second CB winning state a winning state every time the set value is changed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a bad event.

Next, with the second CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started, and the main MPU 72 executes all clear processing (FIG. 40 (a)). The case will be described.

At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 41 (d), the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is being turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is being pressed. When the RAM clear operation is performed, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started as shown in FIG. 41 (a) at the timing of t4, and the main MPU 72 is started as shown in FIG. 41 (b). The main process (FIG. 10) is started at, and the entire clear process (FIG. 40 (a)) is executed by the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 41 (f) from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6 thereafter. Will be done. In this case, as shown in FIG. 41 (h), the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started in a state where the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, but the second CB winning is performed at the timing of t6. The data will be erased. The set value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t6.

When the RAM clear operation is performed as described above, the all clear process (FIG. 40 (a)) is executed so that the second CB winning data is erased, so that the all clear process is illegally performed (FIG. 40). When (a)) is executed, it is possible to set the situation in which the first CB combination and the second CB combination have not been won. Then, if the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed as it is without winning the second CB combination, the first CB prize is established and the player may shift to the first CB state ST2, which is disadvantageous to the player. It will be. As a result, it is possible to suppress the profit obtained by illegally performing the all clearing process (FIG. 40A).

Next, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started with the first CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, and a partial clearing process (FIG. 40 (b)) is executed by the main MPU 72. This case will be described.

At the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is not pressed. By performing the setting update start operation, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started as shown in FIG. 41 (a) at the timing of t7, and the main side is started as shown in FIG. 41 (b). The main process (FIG. 10) is started at the MPU 72, and then a part of the clear process (FIG. 40 (b)) is performed at the main MPU 72 from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 41 (e). Is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 41 (g), the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started with the first CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, but the first CB winning is performed at the timing of t9. The data will be erased. The set value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t9.

In the original game, the first CB winning data is deleted even if a part of the clearing process (FIG. 40 (b)) is executed when the setting update start operation is performed as described above. It is possible to eliminate the state in which the first CB winning data, which is an abnormal state, is stored when the set value is changed.

<About the second section SC2>
Next, the second section SC2 will be described. First, the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42. The first control process of the game section is executed in step S711, which is a process executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1801). The second section flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game section is the second section SC2, and when "1" is set in the second section flag, the second section SC2 The case where the value of the second section flag is "0" is the first section SC1. When "1" is set in the second section flag (step S1801: YES), the processing after step S1802 is not executed. As a result, in the case of the second section SC2, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806 and the stay mode lottery process in step S1810 are not executed.

When "1" is not set in the second section flag (step S1801: NO), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S1802). When the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S1802: YES), the processes after step S1803 are not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806, and step S1810. The lottery process for the stay mode will not be executed.

When the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S1802: NO), by determining whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter of the main RAM 74 is "3". , It is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S1803). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S1803: NO), the processes after step S1804 are not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the first section SC1, the process for setting to the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806, and the stay mode in step S1810. The lottery process will not be executed.

When the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S1803: YES), it is determined whether or not any index value IV has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the current combination (step S1804). ). If the lottery process (FIG. 16) for this combination is out of order (step S1804: NO), the processes after step S1805 are not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is out of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the process for setting it in the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806. And the lottery process of the stay mode in step S1810 will not be executed.

When any index value IV is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of this combination (step S1804: YES), "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74, and the main RAM 74 Clear each of the continuous game number counter 74c (see FIG. 9) and the total acquisition number counter 74d (see FIG. 9) provided in the above (step S1805). When "1" is set in the second section flag, it becomes the second section SC2.

The continuous game number counter 74c is used by the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the game has been executed since the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1. It is a counter of. When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) in the second section SC2, even if it is in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, The second section SC2 is terminated in the reached game, and the situation shifts to the situation in which the first section SC1 is in the normal game state ST1.

The total acquisition number counter 74d sets the limited total net increase number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 to the main MPU 72 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1. It is a counter for identifying. As already explained, the limited total net increase in the number of game media is the total number of game media granted by the game executed in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (the grant of the game medium occurs). The total number of game media digested to execute the game in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued from "0" in the situation where the game is not executed (" 0" in the situation where the game is not executed). When the value obtained by subtracting "" is used as the predetermined difference number of sheets, the number of sheets increased by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value with the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets as the predetermined reference value. When the value of the total acquired number counter 74d reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400 sheets) in the second section SC2, even if it is in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, The second section SC2 is terminated in the reached game, and the situation shifts to the situation in which the first section SC1 is in the normal gaming state ST1.

After that, the direct hit lottery process is executed (step S1806). In the direct hit lottery process, it is decided by lottery whether or not to win the direct hit in the ART state ST6. FIG. 43A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning the direct hit in the ART state ST6 in the direct hit lottery process. As shown in FIG. 43 (a), in the role lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game, if the index value IV = 5 is won, there is a 4% probability that the ART state ST6 will be directly hit. If the index value IV = 6 is won, there is a 1% probability that the ART state ST6 will be directly hit, and if the index value IV = 8 is won, there is a 3% probability that the ART state ST6 will be directly hit. Therefore, if the index value IV = 9 is won, there is a 2% probability that the ART state ST6 will be directly hit. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of winning a direct hit in the ART state ST6. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

The index values IV = 5, 6, 8 and 9, which can be directly hit in the ART state ST6, are the roles in which the winning probability does not fluctuate in the set values of "1" to "6". On the other hand, even if the index values IV = 7 and 10 whose winning probability fluctuates in the set values of "1" to "6" are won, the direct hit lottery process does not result in the direct hit winning in the ART state ST6. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage due to the set values of "1" to "6" from occurring with respect to the probability of winning the direct hit in the ART state ST6. Even if the index value IV = 7 or 10 is won, the direct hit lottery process is executed, but the configuration is not limited to the structure that prevents the direct hit from the ART state ST6, and the index value IV = 7 , 10 may be configured so that the direct hit lottery process is not executed. Further, even if an index value IV = 1 to 3 or 11 or later is won, the direct hit lottery process is not limited to a configuration in which the direct hit of the ART state ST6 is not won, and the direct hit of the ART state ST6 is won. It may be a configuration in which the direct hit lottery process is not executed.

When the direct hit of the ART state ST6 is won in the direct hit lottery process (step S1807: YES), "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1808). The transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed. When "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6, a process for shifting the game state to the ART state ST6 is executed when the current game ends.

After that, the lighting process of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S1809). In the lighting process of the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lit state. As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 is started by the section display unit 67.

If the direct hit lottery process does not result in a direct hit in the ART state ST6 (step S1807: NO), the stay mode lottery process is executed (step S1810). The stay mode is a mode for determining the maximum number of games required until the transition condition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 is satisfied. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stay mode.

As shown in FIG. 44, A mode, B mode and C mode are set as stay modes. In these A mode, B mode and C mode, there is a difference in the player's advantage in relation to the maximum number of games required until the transition condition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is satisfied.

Specifically, in the A mode, 700 games are set as the number of ceiling games. That is, when the A mode is set at the time of transition to the second section SC2, the number of games in which the number of bets executed in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2 is "3" is 700 games. Upon reaching it, the transition condition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is satisfied.

If the transition condition to the ART state ST6 is not satisfied in the pseudo bonus state ST5, the end preparation state ST7 is set when the pseudo bonus state ST5 is completed, and then the normal game state ST1 is set. Further, when shifting to the normal gaming state ST1, the gaming section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. As a result, the A mode ends. On the other hand, when the condition for shifting to the ART state ST6 is satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the state shifts to the ART state ST6 after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is completed. In this case, the second section SC2 continues. Then, when the state shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the ART state ST6 ends, the game section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. As a result, the A mode ends.

Here, as described above, when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1, the number of games executed from the start of the second section SC2 is the upper limit number of games (specifically, When the value corresponding to (1500 games) is reached, the second section SC2 is terminated in the reached game even in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, and the first section SC1 is reached. Then, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. In addition, the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 39 games. Further, in the preparation state ST4 that occurs before the transition from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, when the stop operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are performed according to the stop order of the notified reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The maximum number of continuous games assumed is the relationship between the probability of winning any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the normal mode and the probability of winning any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the first RT mode. It will be 70 games. Then, if 700 games are required to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, 70 games are digested in the preparation state ST4, and 39 games are digested in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, after the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST5. The remaining maximum number of games in the second section SC2 in the above is 691 games.

Further, when a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the situation of the preparation state ST4 and the first RT mode, the number of bets is "3" in the situation of the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the second RT mode. When the game is executed, and when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the situation where the ART state is ST6 and the second RT mode is executed, the expected acquisition value of the game medium in one game ("1"). The value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in the game") is about 2.5. The maximum number of continuous games (35 games) assumed in the preparation state ST4 which is the first RT mode, the number of continuous games (39 games) in the pseudo bonus state ST5 which is the second RT mode, and the remaining upper limit of the ART state ST6. When 2.5 cards are added to the sum of the number of games (691 games), the result is about 1912 games. This value is less than the upper limit net increase of 2400 sheets in the second section SC2. Therefore, when the ART state ST6 occurs in the A mode, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is 691 games.

In the B mode, 500 games are set as the number of first ceiling games. That is, when the B mode is set at the time of transition to the second section SC2, the number of games executed in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2 reaches 500 games, and the first pseudo The conditions for transition to the bonus state ST5 are satisfied. The number of the first ceiling games is smaller than the number of ceiling games in the A mode. Therefore, the B mode is more advantageous than the A mode.

If the condition for shifting to the ART state ST6 is not satisfied in the pseudo bonus state ST5, the normal game state ST1 is set without shifting to the end preparation state ST7 when the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends. However, even if the normal game state ST1 is entered, the second section SC2 is maintained and the B mode is maintained. On the other hand, when the condition for shifting to the ART state ST6 is satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the state shifts to the ART state ST6 after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is completed. Then, when the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, the normal game state ST1 is set without shifting to the end preparation state ST7. However, even if the normal game state ST1 is entered, the second section SC2 is maintained and the B mode is maintained.

When the second normal game state ST1 is reached in the B mode, 80 games are set as the number of the second ceiling games. As a result, when the number of games executed in the normal game state ST1 reaches 80 games, the condition for shifting to the second pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the B mode is satisfied. That is, in the A mode, when the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 occurs once, the second section SC2 ends and shifts to the first section SC1 at the time of the subsequent transition to the normal game state ST1, and the A mode changes. It will be terminated. On the other hand, in the B mode, even if the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 occurs once, it is maintained in the second section SC2 and maintained in the B mode at the time of the subsequent transition to the normal game state ST1. The number of second ceiling games in the B mode is set to be smaller than the number of ceiling games in the A mode. Therefore, from this point as well, the mode is more advantageous than the A mode. Further, the number of the second ceiling games in the B mode is shorter than the number of the first ceiling games in the B mode. As a result, in the B mode, the first transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 occurs, and then the transition to the normal game state ST1 and then the second transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occur again. It is possible to reduce the maximum number of games required by.

If the transition condition to the ART state ST6 is not satisfied in the second pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the B mode, and the ending condition of the second section SC2 is not satisfied in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the pseudo-bonus When the state ST5 ends, the end preparation state ST7 is set, and then the normal game state ST1 is set. Further, when shifting to the normal gaming state ST1, the gaming section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. As a result, the B mode ends. On the other hand, when the condition for shifting to the ART state ST6 is satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the state shifts to the ART state ST6 after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is completed. In this case, the second section SC2 continues. Then, when the state shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the ART state ST6 ends, the game section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. As a result, the B mode ends.

Here, as described above, when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1, the number of games executed from the start of the second section SC2 is the upper limit number of games (specifically, When the value corresponding to (1500 games) is reached, the second section SC2 is terminated in the reached game even in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, and the first section SC1 is reached. Then, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. In addition, the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 39 games. Further, in the preparation state ST4 that occurs before the transition from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, when the stop operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are performed according to the stop order of the notified reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The maximum number of continuous games assumed is the relationship between the probability of winning any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the normal mode and the probability of winning any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the first RT mode. It will be 70 games. Then, if it takes 500 games to shift to the first pseudo-bonus state ST5, 70 games are digested in the preparation state ST4, and 39 games are digested in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. It takes 80 games to shift to the normal game state ST1 without satisfying the transition condition to the ART state ST6 in the bonus state ST5, and further to the second pseudo bonus state ST5, and 70 games in the ready state ST4. When 39 games are digested in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the remaining maximum number of games in the second section SC2 after the end of the second pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 702 games.

Further, when a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the situation of the preparation state ST4 and the first RT mode, the number of bets is "3" in the situation of the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the second RT mode. When the game is executed, and when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the situation where the ART state is ST6 and the second mode is executed, the expected acquisition value of the game medium in one game ("1"). The value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in the game") is about 2.5. Further, even if the first RT mode continues for 35 games in the preparation state ST4 before the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 starts and 39 games continue in the first pseudo-bonus state ST5, the total net increase of the game medium is limited. The number of sheets is 185. This total net increase is when 80 games, which is the number of the second ceiling games, is executed in the subsequent normal game state ST1 without satisfying the transition condition to the ART state ST6 in the first pseudo-bonus state ST5. It is the number of sheets that are all digested. That is, if the transition condition to the ART state ST6 is not satisfied in the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 and 80 games, which is the number of the second ceiling games, is executed in the subsequent normal game state ST1, the first time. Regardless of the game result until the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the total net increase of the limited number of game media is 0 at the time when the preparation state ST4 that occurs before the second pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started. There is a high possibility that it has become. Then, the maximum number of continuous games (35 games) assumed in the preparation state ST4 which is the first RT mode, the maximum number of continuous games (39 games) in the pseudo bonus state ST5 which is the second RT mode, and the ART state ST6. When 2.5 cards are added to the sum of the remaining maximum number of games (702 games), the result is about 1940 games. This value is less than the upper limit net increase of 2400 sheets in the second section SC2. Therefore, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 when the ART state ST6 occurs only once in the B mode is 702 games. This minimum value is a larger number of games than 691 games, which is the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 in the A mode.

In the C mode, 100 games are set as the number of ceiling games. That is, when the C mode is set at the time of transition to the second section SC2, the number of games executed in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2 reaches 100 games, and the pseudo bonus state ST5 The transition condition to is satisfied. The number of the first ceiling games is smaller than the number of ceiling games in the A mode and the number of ceiling games in the B mode. Therefore, the C mode is more advantageous than the A mode, and is more advantageous than the B mode in terms of the number of first ceiling games.

If the transition condition to the ART state ST6 is not satisfied in the pseudo bonus state ST5, the end preparation state ST7 is set when the pseudo bonus state ST5 is completed, and then the normal game state ST1 is set. Further, when shifting to the normal gaming state ST1, the gaming section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. As a result, the C mode ends. On the other hand, when the condition for shifting to the ART state ST6 is satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the state shifts to the ART state ST6 after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is completed. In this case, the second section SC2 continues. Then, when the state shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the ART state ST6 ends, the game section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. As a result, the C mode ends.

Here, as described above, when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1, the number of games executed from the start of the second section SC2 is the upper limit number of games (specifically, When the value corresponding to (1500 games) is reached, the second section SC2 is terminated in the reached game even in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, and the first section SC1 is reached. Then, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. In addition, the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 39 games. Further, in the preparation state ST4 that occurs before the transition from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, when the stop operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are performed according to the stop order of the notified reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The maximum number of continuous games assumed is the relationship between the probability of winning any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the normal mode and the probability of winning any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the first RT mode. It will be 70 games. Then, if 100 games are required to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, 70 games are digested in the preparation state ST4, and 39 games are digested in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, after the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST5. The remaining maximum number of games in the second section SC2 in the above is 1291 games.

Further, when a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the situation of the preparation state ST4 and the first RT mode, the number of bets is "3" in the situation of the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the second RT mode. When the game is executed, and when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the situation where the ART state is ST6 and the second mode is executed, the expected acquisition value of the game medium in one game ("1"). The value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in the game") is about 2.5. The maximum number of continuous games (35 games) assumed in the preparation state ST4 which is the first RT mode, the number of continuous games (39 games) in the pseudo bonus state ST5 which is the second RT mode, and the remaining upper limit of the ART state ST6. When 2.5 cards are added to the sum of the number of games (1291 games), the result is about 3413 games. This value is larger than the upper limit net increase of 2400 sheets in the second section SC2. Therefore, when the ART state ST6 occurs in the C mode, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is 886 games based on the upper limit net increase number of the second section SC2. This number of games is larger than 691 games, which is the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 in the A mode, and the ART state ST6 is in the B mode. The number of games is larger than 702 games, which is the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 when it occurs only once.

In the stay mode lottery process (step S1810) in the first control process (FIG. 42) of the game section, the stay mode of the second section SC2 to be started this time is determined by lottery from A mode, B mode, and C mode. .. FIG. 43B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the selection probabilities of the A to C modes in the lottery process of the stay mode.

As shown in FIG. 43 (b), in the role lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is won, there is a 95% probability that the A mode will be set. B mode is selected with a probability of 3%, C mode is selected with a probability of 2%, and if the index value IV = 4 is won, mode A is selected with a probability of 90% and a probability of 7%. B mode is selected with, C mode is selected with a probability of 3%, and if the index value IV = 5 is won, A mode is selected with a probability of 50% and B mode is selected with a probability of 40%. C mode is selected with a probability of 10%, and if the index value IV = 6 is won, mode A is selected with a probability of 85%, mode B is selected with a probability of 10%, and C is selected with a probability of 5%. When the mode is selected and the index value IV = 7 is won, the A mode is selected with a probability of 88%, the B mode is selected with a probability of 9%, the C mode is selected with a probability of 3%, and the index is indexed. If the value IV = 8 is won, the A mode is selected with a probability of 60%, the B mode is selected with a probability of 30%, the C mode is selected with a probability of 10%, and the index value IV = 9 is won. If so, A mode is selected with a probability of 70%, mode B is selected with a probability of 20%, mode C is selected with a probability of 10%, and if the index value IV = 10 is won. A mode is selected with a probability of 80%, mode B is selected with a probability of 15%, mode C is selected with a probability of 5%, and if the index value IV = 11 or later is won, there is a probability of 98%. A mode is selected, B mode is selected with a probability of 1%, and C mode is selected with a probability of 1%. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of selecting the C mode and a higher probability of selecting the B mode. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

Index values IV other than index values IV = 7 and 10 play a role in which the winning probability does not fluctuate in the set values of "1" to "6", and index values IV = 7 and 10 are set in "1" to "6". It is a role that the winning probability fluctuates in the value. On the other hand, as described above, each of the B mode and the C mode can be selected regardless of the index value IV, and the index values IV = 7 and 10 are compared with the index values IV = 1 to 3 and 11 and later. The probability of selecting B mode and C mode is high. As a result, it is possible to generate an advantage or a disadvantage by the set value of "1" to "6" with respect to the selection mode of the stay mode.

After executing the stay mode lottery process (step S1810) in the first control process (FIG. 42) of the game section, the stay mode setting process is executed (step S1811). FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a stay mode setting process.

When the stay mode selected at the time of setting the second section SC2 this time is A mode (step S1901: YES), "1" is set to the A mode flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1902). “700” is set in the release game number counter 74e (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1903). The A mode flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is in the A mode, and the release game number counter 74e sets the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is confirmed to the main MPU 72. It is a counter for identifying.

When the stay mode selected at the time of setting the second section SC2 this time is the B mode (step S1904: YES), "1" is set to the B mode flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1905). The release game number counter 74e (see FIG. 9) of the main RAM 74 is set to "500" (step S1906), and the heaven preparation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1907). The B mode flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is in the B mode. The heaven preparation flag is the situation after the ART state ST6 started before the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed in the B mode, or the first pseudo-bonus state. When the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs after the end of ST5, it is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the situation is after the end of the ART state ST6.

When the stay mode selected at the time of setting the second section SC2 this time is C mode (step S1904: NO), "1" is set to the C mode flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1908). “100” is set in the release game number counter 74e (see FIG. 9) of the main RAM 74 (step S1909). The C mode flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the mode is C mode.

Returning to the description of the first control process (FIG. 42) of the game section, after executing the stay mode setting process (step S1811), the lighting lottery process of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S1812). In the lighting lottery process of the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is lit from the beginning (that is, immediately lit) when the second section SC2 is set this time, or the section display unit is changed to the preparation state ST4 thereafter. Whether to put 67 in the lighting state (that is, waiting for lighting) is determined by lottery. FIG. 43C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the respective selection probabilities of immediate lighting and lighting standby in the lighting lottery process of the section display unit 67.

As shown in FIG. 43 (c), in the role lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is won, the probability of immediate lighting is 50%. If it is selected and the lighting standby is selected with a probability of 50%, if the index value IV = 4 is won, the immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 60%, the lighting standby is selected with a probability of 40%, and the index value IV is selected. If = 5 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a 90% probability, lighting standby is selected with a 10% probability, and if index value IV = 6 is won, there is a 65% probability of immediate lighting. Lighting is selected and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 35%, and if the index value IV = 7 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 62% and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 38%, and the index is indexed. If the value IV = 8 is won, the immediate lighting is selected with an 80% probability, the lighting standby is selected with a 20% probability, and if the index value IV = 9 is won, the 75% probability is selected. Immediate lighting is selected with, and lighting standby is selected with a 25% probability, and if the index value IV = 10 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a 70% probability and lighting standby is selected with a 30% probability. If the index value IV = 11 or later is won, the immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 40%, and the lighting standby is selected with a probability of 60%. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of selecting immediate lighting.

When immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S1812) of the section display unit 67 (step S1813: YES), the lighting process of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S1814). In the lighting process of the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lit state. As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 is started by the section display unit 67.

On the other hand, when lighting standby is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S1812) of the section display unit 67 (step S1813: NO), "1" is set in the lighting standby flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1813: NO). Step S1815). The lighting standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify in the second section SC2 that the section display unit 67 is waiting to be switched from the off state to the lighting state.

Next, the timing at which the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the on state in the second section SC2 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 46 (a) shows a period in which one game is executed, FIG. 46 (b) shows a period in which the second section SC2 is set, and FIG. 46 (c) shows a period in which the normal game state is ST1. FIG. 46 (d) shows a period of any one of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the end preparation state ST7 that occurs when the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends, and FIG. 46 (e) shows the ART state ST6 and The period of any of the end preparation states ST7 that occurs when the ART state ST6 ends is shown, FIG. 46 (f) shows the period of A mode, and FIG. 46 (g) shows the period of B mode. FIG. 46 (h) shows the period during which the section display unit 67 is lit. The number of bets is "3" in each game in the time chart of FIG. 46.

In the first section SC1, one game is executed at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 46 (a). In this case, the winning combination will not be won in any of the index values IV in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur.

After that, a new game is executed at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 46 (a). In the game, one of the index values IV is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the second section SC2 is set at the timing of t2, which is the timing at which the current game is started. Further, since the A mode is selected as the stay mode, the A mode is set at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 46 (f). However, the lighting standby is selected in the lighting lottery process of the section display unit 67 executed at the timing of t2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46 (h), at the timing of t2 when the second section SC2 is started, the section display unit 67 is maintained in the extinguished state without being switched to the lit state.

After that, the game is repeatedly played in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1. Then, in this situation, a new game is started at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 46 (a). When the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed in the game, the normal game state ST1 is in the ready state at the timing of t4, which is the timing at which the game ends, as shown in FIGS. 46 (c) and 46 (d). Move to ST4. In addition, the transition to the ready state ST4 in which the expected net increase value of the game medium in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in one game") can be 1 or more. At the timing of t4, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the on state as shown in FIG. 46 (h).

That is, although the section display unit 67 can be maintained in the off state even if it shifts to the second section SC2, it is surely turned on when it shifts to the game state in which the expected net increase value of the game medium can be 1 or more. .. As a result, in a game state in which the expected net increase value of the game medium can be 1 or more, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the game state is the game state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46A at the timing of t5, a new game is started in the situation where the second section SC2 is in the ready state ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46 (h), the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state. After that, as the game is repeatedly played, the transition from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is digested. Even in this case, the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state.

Then, at the timing of t6, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 46 (a). In the game immediately before this game, the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 0 games, and the transition to the ART state ST6 in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 has not been confirmed. Is A mode. Therefore, this game is in the end preparation state ST7 that occurs when the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends. Then, in the game in the end preparation state ST7, the game shifts from the end preparation state ST7 to the normal game state ST1 at the timing of t7, which is the timing at which the game ends, as shown in FIGS. 46 (c) and 46 (d). Further, at the timing of t7, the second section SC2 ends as shown in FIG. 46 (b) to become the first section SC1, and the A mode ends as shown in FIG. 46 (f). Further, since the second section SC2 ends, the section display unit 67 is turned off at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 46 (h).

After that, a new game is executed at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 46 (a). In the game, one of the index values IV is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the second section SC2 is set at the timing of t8, which is the timing at which the current game is started. Further, since the A mode is selected as the stay mode, the A mode is set at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 46 (f). Further, immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process of the section display unit 67 executed at the timing of t8. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46 (h), the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the on state at the timing of t8 when the second section SC2 is started.

After that, the game is repeatedly played in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1. Then, in this situation, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 46A, the game in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed ends. Therefore, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIGS. 46 (c) and 46 (d), the normal game state ST1 shifts to the ready state ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46 (h), the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46A at the timing of t10, a new game is started in the situation where the second section SC2 is in the ready state ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46 (h), the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state. After that, as the game is repeatedly played, the transition from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is digested. Even in this case, the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state. Then, in this situation, the game is terminated at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 46 (a), so that the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 becomes 0 games. In this case, the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state ST5. Therefore, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIGS. 46 (d) and 46 (e), the pseudo-bonus state ST5 shifts to the ART state ST6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46 (h), the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46A at the timing of t12, a new game is started in the situation where the second section SC2 is in the ART state ST6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46 (h), the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state. After that, the ART state ST6 is digested by repeatedly playing the game.

Then, at the timing of t13, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 46 (a). In the game immediately before this game, the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST6 is 0 games, and the stay mode this time is A mode. Therefore, this game is in the end preparation state ST7, which occurs when the ART state ST6 ends. Then, in the game in the end preparation state ST7, as shown in FIGS. 46 (c) and 46 (e), the game shifts from the end preparation state ST7 to the normal game state ST1 at the timing of t14, which is the timing at which the game ends. Further, at the timing of t14, the second section SC2 ends as shown in FIG. 46 (b) to become the first section SC1, and the A mode ends as shown in FIG. 46 (f). Further, since the second section SC2 ends, the section display unit 67 is turned off at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 46 (h).

After that, a new game is executed at the timing of t15 as shown in FIG. 46 (a). In the game, one of the index values IV is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the second section SC2 is set at the timing of t15, which is the timing at which the current game is started. Further, since the B mode is selected as the stay mode, the B mode is set at the timing of t15 as shown in FIG. 46 (g). Further, immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process of the section display unit 67 executed at the timing of t15. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46 (h), the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the on state at the timing of t15 when the second section SC2 is started.

After that, the game is repeatedly played in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1. Then, in this situation, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 46A, the game in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed ends. Therefore, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIGS. 46 (c) and 46 (d), the normal game state ST1 shifts to the ready state ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46 (h), the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46A at the timing of t17, a new game is started in the situation where the second section SC2 is in the ready state ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46 (h), the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state. After that, as the game is repeatedly played, the transition from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is digested. Even in this case, the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state.

In this situation, when the game is terminated as shown in FIG. 46 (a) at the timing of t18, the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 becomes 0 games. In this case, although the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed in the pseudo bonus state ST5, the pseudo bonus state ST5 ending this time is the first pseudo bonus state ST5 in the B mode. Therefore, the transition to the end preparation state ST7 does not occur, and the pseudo bonus state ST5 shifts to the normal game state ST1 at the timing of t18 as shown in FIGS. 46 (c) and 46 (d). Further, even if the transition to the normal gaming state ST1 occurs in this way, the second section SC2 is maintained as shown in FIG. 46 (b) and the B mode is maintained as shown in FIG. 46 (g). .. Further, as shown in FIG. 46 (h), the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state.

That is, when the section display unit 67 is switched to the lighting state once in the second section SC2, the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lighting state until the end of the second section SC2. As a result, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the second section SC2 is continuing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46A at the timing of t19, a new game is started in the situation where the second section SC2 is in the normal game state ST1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46 (h), the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state. After that, the game is played repeatedly. Then, in this situation, at the timing of t20, as shown in FIG. 46A, the game in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed ends. Therefore, at the timing of t20, as shown in FIGS. 46 (c) and 46 (d), the normal game state ST1 shifts to the ready state ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46 (h), the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46A at the timing of t21, a new game is started in the situation where the second section SC2 is in the ready state ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46 (h), the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state. After that, as the game is repeatedly played, the transition from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is digested. Even in this case, the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state.

In this situation, when the game is terminated as shown in FIG. 46 (a) at the timing of t22, the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 becomes 0 games. In this case, the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state ST5. Therefore, at the timing of t22, as shown in FIGS. 46 (d) and 46 (e), the pseudo-bonus state ST5 shifts to the ART state ST6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46 (h), the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46A at the timing of t23, a new game is started in the situation where the second section SC2 is in the ART state ST6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46 (h), the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state. After that, the ART state ST6 is digested by repeatedly playing the game.

Next, the second control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47. The second control process of the game section is executed in step S909 in the corresponding process (FIG. 26) at the end of the game. As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped, the second control processing of the game section is also the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game. Is executed after all are stopped.

When "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S2001: YES), the current state of the flag of the main RAM 74 is confirmed. It is determined whether or not the game state is the end preparation state ST7 (step S2002). As described above, the end preparation state ST7 is a case where the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2 described later, and when the transition to the normal game state ST1 is performed thereafter. It is a gaming state that shifts when the second section SC2 ends.

When the end preparation state is ST7 (step S2002: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the end preparation completion flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2003). The end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST7. In the pseudo-bonus processing (step S907) in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26), the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 0 games, and the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed. Further, when it is specified that the second section SC2 ends at the time of the subsequent transition to the normal game state ST1, the flag for setting the end preparation state ST7 is set and the end preparation completion flag is set. "0" is cleared. Further, in the ART state processing (step S908) in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26), the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST6 is 0 games, and the subsequent transition to the normal game state ST1 is performed. When it is specified that the two sections SC2 are in the end state, the flag for setting the end preparation state ST7 is set and the end preparation completion flag is cleared to "0".

If "1" is not set in the end preparation completion flag (step S2003: NO), the processing after step S2005 is executed after setting "1" in the end preparation completion flag. When "1" is set in the end preparation completion flag (step S2003: YES), it means that one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST7. In this case, the process for terminating the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed (step S2014). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, regardless of whether the player is in the ready state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, or the ART state ST6, a counter for storing the number of continuous games in the game states ST4 to ST6. By clearing various data indicating that the game states are ST4 to ST6 including the above, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the flag for specifying the stay mode is cleared by "0", and the release game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is cleared by "0". Therefore, even if the current game state is any of the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state ST3, the remaining number of released games (that is, the number of ceiling games) at that time is invalidated, and then The remaining number of unlocked games is reset at the time of a new transition to the second section SC2. Although the second section SC2 is terminated by executing the initialization process of the second section SC2 even in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 Continues as it is without being terminated.

After that, when the section display unit 67 is in the lit state, the section display unit 67 is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state (step S2015). As a result, the notification that the section display unit 67 is the second section SC2 is completed. After that, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2016). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 makes it possible to execute the effect corresponding to the end of the second section SC2 when the ending condition is satisfied.

When the end preparation state is not ST7 (step S2002: NO), or when the process of step S2004 is executed, the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S2005). As already explained, the continuous game number counter 74c sets the number of game executions from the start of the second section SC2 to the main MPU 72 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1. It is a counter for identifying.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous game number counter 74c after 1 addition is 1500 or more, which is the upper limit number of games (step S2006). When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is 1500 or more, it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S2006, and a process for terminating the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed (step S2014). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, regardless of whether the player is in the ready state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, or the ART state ST6, a counter for storing the number of continuous games in the game states ST4 to ST6. By clearing various data indicating that the game states are ST4 to ST6 including the above, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the flag for specifying the stay mode is cleared by "0", and the release game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is cleared by "0". Therefore, even if the current game state is any of the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state ST3, the remaining number of released games (that is, the number of ceiling games) at that time is invalidated, and then The remaining number of unlocked games is reset at the time of a new transition to the second section SC2. Although the second section SC2 is terminated by executing the initialization process of the second section SC2 even in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 Continues as it is without being terminated.

After that, when the section display unit 67 is in the lit state, the section display unit 67 is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state (step S2015). As a result, the notification that the section display unit 67 is the second section SC2 is completed. After that, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2016). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 makes it possible to execute the effect corresponding to the end of the second section SC2 when the ending condition is satisfied.

When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is less than 1500 (step S2006: NO), in this game, the first chance replay prize, the second chance replay prize, the normal replay prize, the first RT replay prize, the second RT replay prize , It is determined whether or not any of the first fall replay prize and the second fall replay prize is established (step S2007). In this case, regardless of whether the number of bets in this game is "2" or "3", it is subject to the determination in step S2007, and this game is in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB. Regardless of which of the game states of the state ST3, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6, the game is subject to the determination in step S2007.

If none of the replay winnings is established (step S2007: NO), the number of bets in this game (that is, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total number of acquisition counters 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S2008). .. In this case, even if the replay winning is established in the previous game and the current game corresponds to the replay due to the establishment of the replay winning, the number of bets in this game (that is, the bet number setting counter 74a) Value) is subtracted from the total acquisition number counter 74d.

As already explained, the total acquisition number counter 74d determines the total net increase in the number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without sandwiching the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying by the main MPU 72. As already explained, the limited total net increase in the number of game media is the total number of game media granted by the game executed in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (the grant of the game medium occurs). The total number of game media digested to execute the game in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued from "0" in the situation where the game is not executed (" 0" in the situation where the game is not executed). When the value obtained by subtracting "" is used as the predetermined difference number of sheets, the number of sheets increased by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value with the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets as the predetermined reference value.

After that, whether or not any of the small winning combination prizes (1st bell prize, 2nd bell prize, 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize and cherry prize) that the game medium is given in this game is established. Determine (step S2009). In this case, regardless of whether the number of bets in this game is "2" or "3", it is subject to the determination in step S2009, and this game is in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB. Regardless of which of the game states of the state ST3, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6, the game is subject to the determination in step S2009. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2009, the number of game media given in this game is added to the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S2010).

When a negative determination is made in step S2009, or when the process of step S2010 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 is 0 or more (step S2011). When the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than 0 (step S2011: NO), the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" (step S2012).

As described above, since the number of bets for the current number of games is subtracted from the total number of acquisition counters 74d in step S2008, for example, any small winning combination is established in the game in the normal game state ST1 immediately after the transition to the second section SC2. If not, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d will be less than 0. In this case, by making a negative determination in step S2011, the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" in step S2012. As a result, from "the total number of game media granted by the game executed in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (" 0 "in the situation where the game medium is not granted)" to "the second section". When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media digested to execute the game in the situation where SC2 is continued (“0” in the situation where the game is not executed) ”is set as the predetermined difference number. With the minimum value of the predetermined difference number as the predetermined reference value, the limited total net increase number of game media, which is the number of the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, is measured by using the total acquisition number counter 74d. It becomes possible.

When the affirmative judgment is made in step S2007, when the affirmative judgment is made in step S2011, or when the process of step S2012 is executed, whether the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number "2400". Whether or not it is determined (step S2013). When the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds "2400", it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S2013, and a process for terminating the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed (step S2014). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, regardless of whether the player is in the ready state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, or the ART state ST6, a counter for storing the number of continuous games in the game states ST4 to ST6. By clearing various data indicating that the game states are ST4 to ST6 including the above, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the flag for specifying the stay mode is cleared by "0", and the release game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is cleared by "0". Therefore, even if the current game state is any of the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state ST3, the remaining number of released games (that is, the number of ceiling games) at that time is invalidated, and then The remaining number of unlocked games is reset at the time of a new transition to the second section SC2. Although the second section SC2 is terminated by executing the initialization process of the second section SC2 even in the middle of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 Continues as it is without being terminated.

After that, when the section display unit 67 is in the lit state, the section display unit 67 is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state (step S2015). As a result, the notification that the section display unit 67 is the second section SC2 is completed. After that, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2016). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 makes it possible to execute the effect corresponding to the end of the second section SC2 when the ending condition is satisfied.

Here, if any of the replay prizes is established, the process of steps S2008 to S2012 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S2007. In a game in which a replay prize is established, the game medium owned by the player is used when setting a bet at the start of the game, but the profit from the establishment of the replay prize is the same as the number of bets in the game in which the replay prize is established. It is possible to replay a new game based on the number of bets. That is, the number of game media owned by the player does not change in the game in which the replay prize is established. In this case, by not executing the processes of steps S2008 to S2012 in the game in which the replay winning is established, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d in the game in which the number of game media owned by the player does not change. It is possible to omit the execution of the process for changing the value, and it is possible to omit the unnecessary execution of the process.

On the other hand, even in the game in which the replay winning is established, in step S2013, it is determined whether or not the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number of "2400". As a result, in the game before the game in which the replay prize was established, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d has already exceeded the upper limit net increase of "2400", but the second cause is noise or the like. Even if the initialization process of the section SC2 is not executed, it is specified that the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number "2400" in the game in which the subsequent replay winning is established. This makes it possible to execute the initialization process of the second section SC2.

If a negative determination is made in step S2013, the ending correspondence process is executed (step S2017). FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the ending correspondence process.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the ending start flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2101). The ending start flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the ending effect of the second section SC2 has been executed.

When "1" is not set in the ending start flag (step S2101: NO), the value of the continuous game number counter 74c, which is a counter for measuring the continuous game number of the second section SC2 in the main RAM 74, and the main It is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter, which is a counter for measuring the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the side RAM 74, is 1500 or more, which is the upper limit number of games (step S2102). ). Further, the value of the continuous game number counter 74c, which is a counter for measuring the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 in the main RAM 74, and the counter for measuring the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 in the main RAM 74. It is determined whether or not the sum with the value of the ART continuation counter is 1500 or more, which is the upper limit number of games (step S2103). Further, in the main RAM 74, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d, which is a counter for measuring the limited total net increase number of game media, and in the main RAM 74, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state ST5 is measured. It is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter, which is the counter, and the value obtained by integrating the expected acquisition value of "2.5" exceeds the upper limit net increase of "2400" (step S2014). ). Further, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d, which is a counter for measuring the limited total net increase number of game media in the main RAM 74, and the counter for measuring the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 in the main RAM 74. It is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the ART continuation counter and the value obtained by integrating the expected acquisition value of "2.5" exceeds the upper limit net increase of "2400" (step S2015). The expected acquisition value is the case where the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the situation where the pseudo bonus state ST5 is in the second RT mode, and the ART state ST6 is the second mode. It is a value obtained by subtracting "the number of game media bet in one game" from "the expected number of game media granted in one game" when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the situation.

When an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S2102 to S2105, it means that there is a high possibility that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, the ending start flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2106), and the ending start command is further transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2107). The production side MPU 92 starts the ending production by receiving the ending start command. As a result, when there is a high possibility that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, the ending effect is executed before the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied and the second section SC2 is completed. It becomes possible to.

However, in a configuration in which the ending condition of the second section SC2 can be satisfied not only in the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 but also in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, the second CB state ST3, and the preparation state ST4. While the ending effect can be executed in the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6, the ending effect is not executed in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, the second CB state ST3, and the preparation state ST4. As a result, when the second section SC2 ends in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6, which are advantageous states for the player, the ending effect can be provided as a privilege. In the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, the second CB state ST3, and the preparation state ST4, the ending condition of the second section SC2 is not conspicuous by preventing the ending effect from being executed. Is possible.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an ending effect control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. The ending effect control process is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

When the ending start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2201: YES), the ending effect start process is executed (step S2202). In the ending effect start process, the ending effect table that enables the execution of the ending effect of the second section SC2 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the ending effect table, the ending effect of the second section SC2 is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

When a game start command indicating that one game has been newly started is received from the main MPU 72 during the execution of the ending effect (step S2203: YES), the ending effect update process is executed. (Step S2205). As a result, the data group to be referred to in the ending effect table already read in the effect side RAM 94 in the previous step S2202 is changed with the start of a new game, and the ending effect of the second section SC2 is changed. Will be updated with the start of a new game.

When the second section initialization command is received from the main MPU 72 during the execution of the ending effect of the second section SC2 (step S2203: YES), the ending process of the ending effect is executed (step S2207). ). In the ending process of the ending effect, the ending end effect table that enables the execution of the ending end effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the ending end effect table, the ending end effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

<About normal game state ST1>
Next, the processing contents in the normal game state ST1 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an advantageous lottery process at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72. The advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is a process that is executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery processing (FIG. 16) and before the first control processing (step S711) of the game section. It is executed in S710.

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2301). As already explained, the second section flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game section is the second section SC2, and "1" may be set in the second section flag. The second section SC2, and the case where the value of the second section flag is "0" is the first section SC1. If "1" is not set in the second section flag (step S2301: NO), the processes after step S2302 are not executed. As a result, in the case of the first section SC1, the direct hit lottery process in step S2308 and the transition lottery process in step S2311 are not executed.

When "1" is set in the second section flag (step S2301: YES), if the current game state is the preparation state ST4 or the pseudo bonus state ST5 before shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST5 (step S2302: YES), the pseudo-bonus process at the start of the game is executed (step S2303), and if the current gaming state is the preparation state ST4 or the ART state ST6 before shifting to the ART state ST6 (step S2304: YES), the game The ART processing at the start is executed (step S2305). The pseudo-bonus processing at the start of the game and the ART processing at the start of the game will be described later.

When "1" is set in the second section flag (step S2301: YES), and the gaming state is neither the preparation state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, or the ART state ST6 (step S2302 and step S2304). : NO), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2306). When the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2306: YES), the processes after step S2307 are not executed. As a result, even in the second section SC2, in the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the direct hit lottery process in step S2309 and the transition lottery process in step S2312 are not executed.

When the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S2306: NO), by determining whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter of the main RAM 74 is "3". , It is determined whether or not the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S2307). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S2307: NO), the processes after step S2308 are not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the second section SC2, the direct hit lottery process in step S2309 and the transition process in step S2312 are not executed.

When the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S2307: YES), it is determined whether or not the index value IV = 5 to 10 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the current combination. (Step S2308). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2308, the direct hit lottery process is executed (step S2309). In the direct hit lottery process, it is decided by lottery whether or not to win the direct hit in the ART state ST6.

FIG. 51 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning the direct hit in the ART state ST6 in the direct hit lottery process of step S2309. As shown in FIG. 51 (a), in the role lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game, if the index value IV = 5 is won, there is a 4% probability that the ART state ST6 will be directly hit. If the index value IV = 6 is won, there is a 1% probability that the ART state ST6 will be directly hit, and if the index value IV = 7 is won, there is a 1% probability that the ART state ST6 will be directly hit. If the index value IV = 8 is won, there is a 3% probability that the ART state ST6 will be hit directly, and if the index value IV = 9 is won, there is a 2% probability that the ART state ST6 will be won. If you win the direct hit and the index value IV = 10, there is a 1% chance that you will win the direct hit in the ART state ST6. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of winning a direct hit in the ART state ST6. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

Here, in the direct hit lottery process (step S1806) executed when shifting from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 in the first control process (FIG. 42) of the game section, "1" to "6" are set. Even if the index value IV = 7 or 10 in which the winning probability fluctuates in the value is won, the direct hit lottery process does not result in the direct hit winning in the ART state ST6. On the other hand, in the direct hit lottery process (step S2309) executed in the game started in the situation of the second section SC2 in the advantageous lottery process (FIG. 50) at the start of the game, "1" to "6". Even if the index value IV = 7 or 10 in which the winning probability fluctuates in the set value of is won, the direct hit lottery process may result in the direct hit winning in the ART state ST6. As a result, regarding the probability of winning the direct hit in the ART state ST6, in the situation of transitioning from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2, the advantage or disadvantage due to the set values of "1" to "6" should not occur. In the game executed after shifting to the second section SC2, it is possible to generate an advantage or a disadvantage by the set value of "1" to "6".

When the direct hit of the ART state ST6 is won in the direct hit lottery process (step S2310: YES), "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2311). The transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed. When "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6, a process for shifting the game state to the ART state ST6 is executed when the current game ends.

If the direct hit lottery process does not result in a direct hit in the ART state ST6 (step S2310: NO), the transition lottery process is executed (step S2312). In the transition lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

FIG. 51B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning the transition of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the transition lottery process of step S2312. As shown in FIG. 51 (b), in the role lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game, if the index value IV = 5 is won, there is a 50% probability that the pseudo bonus state ST5 will be won. , If the index value IV = 6 is won, there is a 20% probability that the pseudo bonus state ST5 will be won, and if the index value IV = 7 is won, there is a 10% probability that the pseudo bonus state ST5 will be won. If the index value IV = 8 is won, there is a 40% probability that the pseudo bonus state ST5 will be won, and if the index value IV = 9 is won, there is a 30% probability. The transition winning of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is obtained, and if the index value IV = 10 is won, the transition winning of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is performed with a probability of 20%. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of winning the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

When the transition winning of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is obtained in the transition lottery process (step S2313: YES), "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2314). The transition confirmation flag of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed. When "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the pseudo-bonus state ST5, a process for shifting the game state to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed when the current game ends.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal processing is executed in step S905 in the corresponding processing (FIG. 26) at the end of the game. As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped, the normal processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped. Will be executed later.

When "1" is set in the second section flag of the main RAM 74 and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S2401: YES), the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". Is set (step S2402). If the direct hit lottery process (step S1806 or step S2309) at the start of this game is a direct hit to the ART state ST6, "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6.

When "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 (step S2402: YES), "1" is set in the ART state flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2403). The ART state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify which of the state before the transition to the ART state ST6 and the ART state ST6. Further, the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2404). Further, "1" is set in the preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2405). The preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is in the preparation state ST4. When "1" is set in both the preparation state flag and the ART state flag, the main MPU 72 can specify that it is the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the ART state ST6. In this situation, when the lottery mode shifts from the 1st RT mode to the 2nd RT mode, the preparation status flag is "0" and the ART status flag is "1" by clearing the preparation status flag "0". Therefore, the main MPU 72 can specify that the state has shifted to the ART state ST6. Further, a preparation start command for ART indicating that the preparation state ST4 has been reached before shifting to the ART state ST6 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2406). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 makes the effect corresponding to the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the ART state ST6 executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the lighting standby flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2407). As already described, the lighting standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify in the second section SC2 that the section display unit 67 is waiting to be switched from the off state to the lighting state. When "1" is set in the lighting standby flag (step S2407: YES), the lighting processing of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S2408). In the lighting process of the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lit state. As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 is started by the section display unit 67. When the process of step S2408 is executed, the lighting standby flag is cleared to "0".

When the transition to the preparation state ST4 occurs in the situation where "1" is set in the lighting standby flag as described above, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lighting state. The preparation state ST4 is a gaming state in which the expected net increase in game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in one game") can be 1 or more. Is. That is, although the section display unit 67 can be maintained in the off state even if it shifts to the second section SC2, it is surely turned on when it shifts to the game state in which the expected net increase value of the game medium can be 1 or more. .. As a result, in a game state in which the expected net increase value of the game medium can be 1 or more, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the game state is the game state.

When a negative determination is made in step S2402, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the pseudo bonus state ST5 in the main RAM 74 (step S2409). If the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is won in the transition lottery process (step S2312) at the start of this game, "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

When a negative determination is made in step S2409, whether or not the number of bets in the current game is "3" is determined by determining whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter of the main RAM 74 is "3". Is determined (step S2410). If the number of bets in this game is "2" (step S2410: NO), the processes after step S2411 are not executed. As a result, even in the second section SC2, in the game in which the bet number is “2”, the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the release game number counter 74e in step S2411 is not executed. That is, even if the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the normal game state ST1 of the second section SC2, the number of remaining unlocked games (that is, the number of ceiling games) is not reduced, and the number of bets is ". By executing the game of "3", the number of remaining unlocked games (that is, the number of ceiling games) is reduced.

When the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S2410: YES), the value of the release game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2411). As a result, the number of remaining unlocked games (that is, the number of ceiling games) is reduced by one game, and the maximum number of remaining games required to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is reduced by one game. After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the release game number counter 74e after 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2412).

In the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the normal process (step S905) is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S902 in the corresponding process (FIG. 26) at the end of the game. Therefore, if the game shifts to the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 during the normal game state ST1, the normal game state ST1 is temporarily interrupted, and the number of games digested in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is It is not treated as the digestion of the remaining number of unlocked games in the normal game state ST1. When the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 ends, the normal game state ST1 is restarted while the lottery mode remains the normal mode.

When the value of the release game number counter 74e is "0" (step S2412: YES), it means that the number of remaining release games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 0 games. In this case, "1" is set in the pseudo bonus state flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2413). The pseudo-bonus state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify which of the state before the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the pseudo-bonus state ST5. Further, "1" is set in the preparation status flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2414). When "1" is set in both the preparation state flag and the pseudo bonus state flag, the main MPU 72 can specify that it is the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST5. In this situation, when the lottery mode shifts from the 1st RT mode to the 2nd RT mode, the preparation status flag is "0" and the pseudo bonus status flag is "1" by clearing the preparation status flag "0". Because of the situation, the main MPU 72 can specify that the pseudo-bonus state ST5 has been entered. Further, a preparation start command for the pseudo bonus indicating that the preparation state ST4 has been reached before the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2415). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 makes the effect corresponding to the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST5 executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the lighting standby flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2416). As already described, the lighting standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify in the second section SC2 that the section display unit 67 is waiting to be switched from the off state to the lighting state. When "1" is set in the lighting standby flag (step S2416: YES), the lighting processing of the section display unit 67 is executed (step S2417). In the lighting process of the section display unit 67, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lit state. As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 is started by the section display unit 67. When the process of step S2417 is executed, the lighting standby flag is cleared to "0".

When the transition to the preparation state ST4 occurs in the situation where "1" is set in the lighting standby flag as described above, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lighting state. The preparation state ST4 is a gaming state in which the expected net increase in game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media granted in one game") can be 1 or more. Is. That is, although the section display unit 67 can be maintained in the off state even if it shifts to the second section SC2, it is surely turned on when it shifts to the game state in which the expected net increase value of the game medium can be 1 or more. .. As a result, in a game state in which the expected net increase value of the game medium can be 1 or more, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the game state is the game state.

On the other hand, when "1" is set in the pseudo-bonus state transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 (step S2409: YES), after clearing the pseudo-bonus state transition confirmation flag "0" (step S2418), The processes of steps S2413 to S2417 already described are executed. As a result, the preparation state ST4 before the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is set, and the corresponding effect is started. Further, when the section display unit 67 is waiting for switching from the off state to the lit state, the section display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the lit state.

Next, the stop order notification control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53. The stop order notification control process is performed in step S712, which is a process executed after the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) and after the first control processing (step S711) of the game section. Will be executed.

When the current gaming state is any one of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6 (step S2501: YES), the notification control process for the advantageous state is executed (step S2502). In the notification control process for the advantageous state, reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the first bell winning when any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 and 5 is won in this game. The display corresponding to the stop order is displayed on the combined display unit 66, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning is notified on the image display device 63. A command for doing so is transmitted to the production side MPU 92.

In the notification control process for the advantageous state, reels 32L, 32M, which enable the establishment of the first RT replay winning when any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the normal mode is won in this game, The display corresponding to the stop order of the 32R is displayed on the combined display unit 66, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first RT replay winning is notified on the image display device 63. A command for making the above is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. In the notification control process for the advantageous state, reels 32L, 32M that enable the establishment of the second RT replay winning when any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the first mode is won in this game. , 32R, the display corresponding to the stop order of 32R is displayed on the combined display unit 66, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which enables the establishment of the second RT replay winning is notified by the image display device 63. A command to be executed is transmitted to the production side MPU 92.

In the notification control process for the advantageous state, if any of the index values IV = 17 to 22 in the first RT mode is won in this game, the reel 32L that can avoid the establishment of the first fall replay winning. , 32M, 32R The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is an image display device so that the display corresponding to the stop order of 32M, 32R is performed on the combined display unit 66 and the establishment of the first fall replay winning can be avoided. A command for being notified at 63 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. In the notification control process for the advantageous state, the index value IV = 11 to 16 in the second RT mode is set in this game on condition that the game state is either the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6. If the player is elected, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which makes it possible to avoid the establishment of the second fall replay prize, is displayed on the combined display unit 66, and the second fall replay is performed. A command is transmitted to the effecting side MPU 92 so that the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the winning.

If a negative determination is made in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the index value IV = 5 has been won in this game (step S2503). In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the index value IV = 5 is not won, so that the case where a negative judgment is made in step S2501 and the case where a positive judgment is made in step S2503 is normal. The game state is ST1.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the ART state transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 (step S2504). As already explained, the ART state transition confirmation flag is the first control process (FIG. 42) of the game section executed before the stop order notification control process is executed in this game, or the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game. This is a flag in which "1" is set by winning a direct hit to the ART state ST6 in the direct hit lottery process (step S1806 or step S2309) in FIG. 50. Then, in the direct hit lottery process (step S1806 or step S2309), when the index value IV = 5 is won, there is a 4% probability that the direct hit to the ART state ST6 will be won.

When "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 (step S2504: YES), the display data setting process for the left first stop is executed (step S2505). As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary is started on the combined display unit 66. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. It will be terminated.

After that, the left first stop command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2506). When the production side MPU 92 receives the left first stop command, the image display device 63 starts the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. It will be terminated.

On the other hand, when "1" is not set in the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 (step S2504: NO), the display data setting process for the right first stop is executed (step S2507). As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary is started on the combined display unit 66. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. It will be terminated.

After that, the right first stop command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2508). When the production side MPU 92 receives the right first stop command, the image display device 63 starts the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. It will be terminated.

The operation of executing the processes of steps S2503 to S2508 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b). FIG. 54 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a situation when it is notified that the first stop is the left reel 32L when the index value IV = 5 is won, and FIG. 54 (b) is an explanatory diagram. Is an explanatory diagram for explaining a situation when it is notified that the first stop is the right reel 32R when the index value IV = 5 is won.

As described above, the index value IV = 5 is set with the first bell winning data and the second bell winning data. Then, when the index value IV = 5 is won and the left reel 32L is stopped as the first stop, the second bell winning is established regardless of the remaining stop order. In this case, the second bell winning is surely established regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the index value IV = 5 is won and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, the first bell winning is established regardless of the remaining stop order. In this case, the first bell winning is surely established regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

When the processes of step S2505 and step S2506 are executed in the stop order notification control process (FIG. 53), in the image display device 63, the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary as shown in FIG. 54 (a1). The display corresponding to the stop order is performed, and the combined display unit 66 displays the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary, as shown in FIG. 54 (a2). Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the order according to the notification, the second bell winning is established on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 54 (a3).

When the processes of step S2507 and step S2508 are executed in the stop order notification control process (FIG. 53), in the image display device 63, the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary as shown in FIG. 54 (b1). The display corresponding to the stop order is performed, and the combined display unit 66 displays the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary, as shown in FIG. 54 (b2). Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the order according to the notification, the first bell winning is established on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 54 (b3).

The case where the processes of steps S2505 and S2506 are executed is the case where the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed, and the case where the processes of steps S2507 and S2508 are executed is the case where the transition to the ART state ST6 is executed. This is the case when the migration has not been finalized. In this case, if the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed based on the fact that the index value IV = 5 is won, the second bell prize is established, and the ART state 6 although the index value IV = 5 is won. If the transition to is not confirmed, the first bell prize will be established. Then, the second bell prize is not established if the index value IV = 5 is not won. As a result, it becomes possible to notify the player that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed based on the winning of the index value IV = 5 by the establishment of the second bell winning on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. ..

On the other hand, the first bell winning can be established even when the index value IV = 5 is not won. If the index value IV = 5 is won but the transition to the ART state 6 is not confirmed, the first bell prize is established, so that the ART state is established even though the index value IV = 5 is won. It is possible to make the fact that the transition to ST6 is not confirmed inconspicuous to the player in the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

In particular, when the index value IV = 5 is won but the transition to the ART state 6 is not confirmed, the image display device 63 corresponds to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary. The display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary is also displayed on the combined display unit 66. Assuming that the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is not displayed corresponding to the stop order in the dual-purpose display unit 66, the index value IV = 5 is won from the display content of the dual-purpose display unit 66. It may be inferred that the transition to the ART state 6 has not been confirmed, but as described above, the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary in the dual-purpose display unit 66. By displaying the display, it is possible to prevent such an analogy from being performed.

The number of game media granted is "11" regardless of whether the first bell prize is established or the second bell prize is established. Therefore, when the index value IV = 5 is won, the type of winning that promotes the establishment is different by different the notification mode of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R depending on whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed. Even if it is made, the profit related to the granting of the game medium does not change. In this case, the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not directly linked to the profit of the player. Therefore, when the notification of the stop order as described above is performed, the section display unit 67 is lit. Whether or not it is optional.

Returning to the explanation of the stop order notification control process (FIG. 53), when a negative determination is made in step S2503, when the process of step S2506 is executed, or when the process of step S2508 is executed, the index value in this game It is determined whether or not IV = 4 is won (step S2509). Since the index value IV = 4 is not won in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, it is normal that a negative judgment is made in step S2501 and an affirmative judgment is made in step S2509. The game state is ST1.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2509, the push order generation lottery process is executed on condition that "1" is set in the second section flag (step S2510: YES) (step S2511). In the push order generation lottery process, it is selected that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified with a probability of 25%, and the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary with a probability of 25%. Is selected, and there is a 25% probability that the first stop is on the middle reel 32M and the rest is arbitrary, and there is a 25% chance that the first stop will be on the right reel 32R. It is selected to inform the stop order where there is and the rest is arbitrary.

When it is selected to notify one of the stop orders in the push order generation lottery process (step S2512: YES), the display corresponding to the selected stop order is started on the combined display unit 66 (step S2513). ). The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. It will be terminated. Further, a stop command corresponding to the selected stop order is transmitted to the effecting side MPU 92 (step S2514). When the production side MPU 92 receives the stop command, the production side MPU 92 causes the image display device 63 to display the display corresponding to the selected stop order. The display is started before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is generated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. It will be terminated.

As already explained, only the 1st bell winning data is set in the index value IV = 4, and regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the 1st bell winning is established and each stop. The first bell winning is established regardless of which stop operation timing the buttons 42 to 44 are operated. In this case, when the winning order is won with the index value IV = 4, if any of the stop order notifications is selected in the push order generation lottery process (step S2511), the selected stop order is changed. It is notified by the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66. As a result, not only when the index value IV = 5 is won in the normal game state ST1, but also when the index value IV = 4 is won, the first bell is won after the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified. Can be created in a situation where

The stop order also includes a stop order notified when the index value IV = 5 is won but the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed. As a result, even if a situation occurs in which the first bell winning is established after the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the normal game state ST1, the index value IV = 5 is won, but the ART state ST6 It is possible to prevent the player from being able to identify whether or not the cause is that the transition to the reels has not been confirmed.

In particular, when the index value IV = 4 is won and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified by the image display device 63, the display corresponding to the stop order is also displayed on the combined display unit 66. Will be. If the dual-purpose display unit 66 does not display the corresponding stop order, it may be inferred from the display contents of the dual-purpose display unit 66 that the index value IV = 4 has been won. As described above, by making the display corresponding to the stop order also performed in the combined display unit 66, it is possible to prevent such an analogy from being performed.

When the index value IV = 4 is won, the first bell winning is established regardless of whether or not the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified. Therefore, even if the notification mode of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is changed when the index value IV = 4 is won, the profit related to the addition of the game medium does not change. In this case, the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not directly linked to the profit of the player. Therefore, when the notification of the stop order as described above is performed, the section display unit 67 is lit. Whether or not it is optional.

<Preparation state ST4>
Next, the processing contents in the preparation state ST4 will be described.

In the preparation state ST4, the preparation state processing is executed in step S906 in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26). Here, as described above, the preparation state ST4 includes a preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST5 and a preparation state ST4 before shifting to the ART state ST6.

In the preparation state processing in the case of the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST5, the preparation status flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" when the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. Then, it is assumed that the value of the preparation state flag of the main RAM 74 is "0" and the pseudo bonus state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". Further, the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "39", which is a value corresponding to the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. In addition, a pseudo-bonus start command indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST5 has been entered is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. As a result, the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is started.

If any of the index values IV = 5 to 10 is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is displayed. Whether or not to increase is determined by lottery, and if it is determined by lottery to increase, the determined number of games may be added to the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

In the preparation state processing in the case of the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the ART state ST6, when the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode, the preparation status flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". It is assumed that the value of the ready state flag of the main RAM 74 is "0" and the ART state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". Further, the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "10", which is a value corresponding to the number of continuous games in the start period described later in the ART state ST6, and the main MPU 72 is informed that it is the start period of the ART state ST6. "1" is set in the start period flag provided in the main RAM 74 in order to specify. In addition, an ART state start command indicating that the state has shifted to the ART state ST6 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. As a result, the effect side MPU 92 causes the effect corresponding to the ART state ST6 to be executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

If any of the index values IV = 5 to 10 is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the preparation state ST4 before the transition to the ART state ST6, the number of continuous games in the start period in the ART state ST6. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to increase the number of games, and if it is decided by lottery to increase the number of games, the determined number of games may be added to the number of initial continuous games in the start period in the ART state ST6.

<About pseudo bonus state ST5>
Next, the processing contents in the pseudo bonus state ST5 will be described. FIG. 55 (a) is a flowchart showing a pseudo-bonus process at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72. The pseudo-bonus process at the start of the game is executed in step S2303 in the advantageous lottery process (FIG. 50) at the start of the game, and the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game determines whether or not the winning combination is true in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). It is executed in step S710, which is a process that is executed after the completion and before the first control process (step S711) of the game section.

When any of the index values IV = 5 to 10 is won in the lottery process of this combination (FIG. 16) (step S2601: YES), "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S2602). The transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state ST5 this time. When "1" is not set in the transition confirmation flag (step S2602: NO), the transition lottery process of the ART state ST6 is executed (step S2603). In the transition lottery process of the ART state ST6, it is determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the ART state ST6 after the pseudo bonus state ST5 is completed.

FIG. 55B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning the transition of the ART state ST6 in the transition lottery process of the ART state ST6 in step S2603. As shown in FIG. 55 (b), in the role lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game, if the index value IV = 5 is won, there is a 50% probability that the ART state ST6 will be won. If the index value IV = 6 is won, there is a 20% probability that the ART state ST6 will be won, and if the index value IV = 7 is won, there is a 10% chance that the ART state ST6 will be won. If the index value IV = 8 is won, there is a 40% probability that the ART state ST6 will be won, and if the index value IV = 9 is won, there is a 30% probability that the ART state ST6 will be won. If the transition is won and the index value IV = 10 is won, there is a 20% probability that the transition will be won in the ART state ST6. In this case, the index value IV, which has a lower probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), has a higher probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST6. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV having a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

When the transition winning of the ART state ST6 is won in the transition lottery process of the ART state ST6 (step S2604: YES), "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2605). After that, a transition confirmation command indicating that the transition of the ART state ST6 has been won is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2606). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 makes the effect corresponding to the confirmation of the transition to the ART state ST6 executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

Next, the pseudo-bonus process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The pseudo-bonus process is executed in step S907 in the corresponding process (FIG. 26) at the end of the game. As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped, the pseudo bonus processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped. Is executed after.

First, the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2701). As already explained, the pseudo-bonus continuation counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 by the main MPU 72, and is a pseudo-bonus continuation counter when shifting from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5. Is set to "39".

In the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the pseudo-bonus process (step S907) is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S902 in the corresponding process (FIG. 26) at the end of the game. Therefore, if the player shifts to the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST5, the pseudo bonus state ST5 is temporarily interrupted, and the number of games consumed in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is It is not treated as the number of digested games in the pseudo bonus state ST5. When the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 ends, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is restarted while the lottery mode remains the normal mode without shifting to the preparation state ST4.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter after 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2702). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous games remaining in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 0 games. When the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S2702: YES), the pseudo-bonus state ST5 this time is determined by determining whether or not "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74. In (step S2703), it is determined whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed.

When "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag (step S2703: YES), the start setting process of the ART state ST6 is executed (step S2704). In the start setting process, the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "10", which is a value corresponding to the number of continuous games in the start period described later in the ART state ST6, and the start period of the ART state ST6 is set. “1” is set in the start period flag provided in the main RAM 74 for identification by the main MPU 72. After that, an ART state start command indicating that the state has shifted to the ART state ST6 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2705). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 causes the effect corresponding to the ART state ST6 to be executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. After that, the transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2706).

On the other hand, when "1" is not set in the transition confirmation flag (step S2703: NO), the advantageous end processing is executed (step S2707). FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the advantageous termination process. First, the advantageous end command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2801). The advantageous end command is a command transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 when the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2. When the effecting side MPU 92 receives the advantageous end command in the situation of the pseudo bonus state ST5, the effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. To.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the heaven preparation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2802). The heaven preparation flag is the situation after the ART state ST6 started before the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed in the B mode, or the first pseudo-bonus state. When the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs after the end of ST5, it is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the situation is after the end of the ART state ST6. When the second section SC2 in the B mode is started, "1" is set in the heaven preparation flag, and the first pseudo bonus state ST5 is set after the second section SC2 in the B mode is started. Until the end, until the ART state ST6 started before the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed, or after the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs. If so, the state in which "1" is set in the heaven preparation flag is maintained until the ART state ST6 is completed. On the other hand, when the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends in the second section SC2 which is the B mode, when the ART state ST6 started before the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed ends, or when the first pseudo-bonus state ST6 ends. If the transition to the ART state ST6 has occurred after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 of the above has ended, the heaven has occurred when the transition to the normal gaming state ST1 has been performed when the ART state ST6 has ended. The preparation flag is cleared to "0".

When "1" is not set in the heaven preparation flag (step S2802: NO), the setting process of the end preparation state ST7 is executed (step S2803). In the setting process, if the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Further, in the setting process, "1" is set in the end preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74. The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is the end preparation state ST7, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST7. After that, the end preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2804). As described above, the end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST7.

When "1" is set in the heaven preparation flag (step S2802: YES), "80" is set in the release game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S2805). As already described, the release game number counter 74e is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed. By setting "80" in the release game number counter 74e in step S2805, the number of games required until the transition to the next pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the B mode is confirmed becomes 80 games. After that, the game state setting process is executed (step S2806). In the setting process, if the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST1. In addition, the heaven preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2807).

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an effect control process for a pseudo bonus executed by the effect side MPU 92. The effect control process for the pseudo bonus is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, a 4 millisecond cycle).

First, it is determined whether or not the ending effect of the second section SC2 is being executed (step S2901). When the ending effect of the second section SC2 is being executed (step S2901: YES), the processes after step S2902 are not executed. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the execution of the ending effect of the second section SC2.

If the ending effect of the second section SC2 is not being executed (step S2901: NO), the processes after step S2902 are executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not a pseudo bonus start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2902). When the pseudo bonus start command is received (step S2902: YES), the effect setting process at the start is executed (step S2903). In the effect setting process at the start, a pseudo bonus effect table that enables execution of the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the pseudo bonus effect table, the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

In the pseudo-bonus effect table stored in the effect side RAM 94 when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started, an effect corresponding to the fact that the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed. The data is set. If the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the pseudo-bonus effect table is referred to as it is, so that the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5. The display effect indicating is executed. On the other hand, when the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the data for finally executing the display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs is produced. It is set for the pseudo bonus effect table stored in the side RAM 94.

When a game start command indicating that one game has been newly started is received from the main MPU 72 in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 (step S2904: YES), the effect update process is executed (step S2905). As a result, the data group to be referred to in the pseudo-bonus effect table already read in the effect side RAM 94 in the previous step S2903 is changed with the start of a new game, and corresponds to the pseudo-bonus state ST5. The content of the production to be performed is updated with the start of a new game.

When a transition confirmation command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state ST5 this time is received from the main MPU 72 in the pseudo bonus state ST5 (step S2906: YES), the execution lottery process of the resurrection effect is executed. (Step S2907). The revival effect is a display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur when the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 is started, and then all reels 32L, 32M, in the final game. This is an effect of executing a display effect indicating that a transition to the ART state ST6 occurs when an ART state start command is received from the main MPU 72 after the rotation of the 32R is stopped. In the execution lottery process of the revival effect, there is a 20% chance that the revival effect will be executed and won.

Execution of revival effect If the winner is not won (step S2908: NO), the setting process of the normal transition effect is executed (step S2909). In the setting process of the normal transition effect, a display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the current game that triggered the transmission of the transition confirmation command is executed, and the pseudo bonus state ST5 from this game is executed. A display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed is executed over the final game of the above, and when the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 is started, the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs. Data for executing the display effect indicating the above is set for the pseudo bonus effect table stored in the effect side RAM 94. As a result, in the image display device 63, a display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the current game that triggered the transmission of the transition confirmation command is executed, and a pseudo bonus state is executed from this game. A display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed is executed over the final game of ST5, and when the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 is started, the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs. A display effect indicating that is executed. Further, in the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62, effects corresponding to these display effects are executed.

Execution of revival effect When the winner is won (step S2908: YES), the revival effect setting process is executed (step S2910). In the setting process of the revival effect, all reels 32L, 32M in the final game after the display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur when the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 is started is executed. , The data for executing the display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs when the ART state start command is received from the main MPU 72 after the rotation of 32R is stopped is on the effect side. It is set for the pseudo bonus effect table stored in the RAM 94. As a result, the image display device 63 does not execute the display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed in the current game that triggered the transmission of the transition confirmation command, and is simulated from this game. The display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed is not executed over the final game of the bonus state ST5, and further, when the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 is started, the ART state ST6 is started. After the display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state does not occur is executed, the display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the final game is displayed. Is executed. Further, in the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62, effects corresponding to these display effects are executed.

When the ART state start command is received in the pseudo bonus state ST5 (step S2911: YES), and when it is determined that the resurrection effect is executed in the pseudo bonus state ST5 this time (step S2912: YES), the resurrection Execution processing of the effect is executed (step S2913). In the execution process of the resurrection effect, the data to be referred to in the pseudo bonus effect table stored in the effect side RAM 94 is changed to the data group corresponding to the execution of the resurrection effect. As a result, in the image display device 63, the display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 started in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 does not occur is completed, and the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs. The display effect indicating is started. Further, in the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62, effects corresponding to these display effects are executed.

When the advantageous end command is received in the pseudo bonus state ST5 (step S2914: YES), the end effect setting process is executed (step S2915). In the end effect setting process, a table for executing an effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST5 of this time ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. Let me. As a result, in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, an effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST5 of this time ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1 is executed. This effect is continued until the end preparation state ST7 ends and the normal game state ST1 is entered.

Next, how the pseudo-bonus state ST5 progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 59. FIG. 59 (a) shows the period during which one game is executed, FIG. 59 (b) shows the period during which the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is performed, and FIG. 59 (c) shows the period during which the normal game state ST1 is executed. (D) shows the period in which the ART state ST6 is present, and FIG. 59 (e) shows the period in which the end effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs. FIG. 59 (f) shows the period during which the revival effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs is executed, FIG. 59 (g) shows the period during which the end preparation state ST7 is performed, and FIG. 59 (h) shows the period. Indicates the period during which the section display unit 67 is lit.

First, a case where the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is completed and then the state shifts to the ART state ST6 and the revival effect is executed will be described.

At the timing of t1, the first game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed as shown in FIG. 59 (a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the pseudo bonus state ST5 is already set when the previous game is ended. Further, since the section display unit 67 is in the lit state at least at the timing when the preparation state ST4 before the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is started, even at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 59 (h). The section display unit 67 is lit.

After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), a new game is started in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. This game is the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5. In the pseudo-bonus state ST5 this time, the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the middle, and it is decided that the revival effect is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59 (e), at the timing of t2, which is the timing at which the current game is started, the end effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends without the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs. To be started. FIG. 60A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution content of the end effect in the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 60A, in the end effect, the end image G31 indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends without the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs is displayed.

After that, at the timing of t3, which is the end timing after the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 is stopped, the end effect is ended as shown in FIG. 59 (e). As shown in FIG. 59 (f), the revival effect is started. FIG. 60B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution content of the revival effect in the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 60B, in the resurrection effect, the resurrection image G32 showing that the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur but the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player who has recognized that the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur due to the end effect recognize that the transition to the ART state ST6 actually occurs. The revival effect started at the timing of t3 is continued until the timing of t4, which is the start timing of the next game, as shown in FIG. 59 (f).

Further, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIGS. 59 (b) and 59 (d), the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends and the ART state ST6 starts. Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (h), the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state during all the above periods.

Next, a case where the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur in the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 of the B mode will be described.

At the timing of t5, the first game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed as shown in FIG. 59 (a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the pseudo bonus state ST5 is already set when the previous game is ended. Further, since the section display unit 67 is in the lit state at least at the timing when the preparation state ST4 before the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is started, even at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 59 (h). The section display unit 67 is lit.

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), a new game is started in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. This game is the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5. In the pseudo bonus state ST5 this time, the transition to the ART state ST6 has not been confirmed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59 (e), at the timing of t6, which is the timing at which the current game is started, the end effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends without the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs. To be started. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (e), the end effect is ended at the timing of t7, which is the end timing after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 is stopped.

Further, this time, since the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur in the first pseudo bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 of the B mode, the second section SC2 is not ended even if the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends. .. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 59 (b) and 59 (c) at the timing of t7, the normal game state ST1 is started without ending the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and shifting to the end preparation state ST7. Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (h), the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state during all the above periods. After that, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the first game after shifting to the normal game state ST1 is started.

Next, a case where the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur in the pseudo bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 of the A mode will be described.

At the timing of t9, the first game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed as shown in FIG. 59 (a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the pseudo bonus state ST5 is already set when the previous game is ended. Further, since the section display unit 67 is in the lit state at least at the timing when the preparation state ST4 before the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is started, even at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 59 (h). The section display unit 67 is lit.

After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), a new game is started in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. This game is the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5. In the pseudo bonus state ST5 this time, the transition to the ART state ST6 has not been confirmed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59 (e), at the timing of t10, which is the timing at which the current game is started, the end effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends without the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs. To be started. After that, at the timing of t11, which is the end timing after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 is stopped, the end effect is ended as shown in FIG. 59 (e).

Further, this time, since the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur in the pseudo bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 of the A mode, as shown in FIGS. 59 (b) and 59 (g) at the timing of t11. The pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends and the state shifts to the end preparation state ST7. After that, in the end preparation state ST7, the game is executed from the timing of t12 to the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 59 (a). Then, at the timing of t13 when the game ends, the end preparation state ST7 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1 as shown in FIGS. 59 (c) and 59 (g). Further, at the timing of t13, the section display unit 67 switches from the lit state to the extinguished state as shown in FIG. 59 (h). After that, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the first game after shifting to the normal game state ST1 is started.

At the timing of t11, an effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST5 of this time ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1 is started. This effect is continued until the timing of t13, which is the timing at which the end preparation state ST7 ends.

As described above, even if the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without the transition to the ART state ST6 being confirmed in the second section SC2 of the A mode, the end preparation state of one game after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. Since the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state in the end preparation state ST7 at the same time as ST7, it is the timing after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have been stopped in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5. However, the section display unit 67 is lit. As a result, the section is displayed at the timing when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 in the situation where the effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed is not executed. Even if the unit 67 is confirmed, it cannot be specified that the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur. Therefore, in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the situation where the effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed is not executed, the revival effect is performed at the timing when the stops of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are completed. It is possible to make the player expect that it will be executed, and it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the transition to the ART state ST6 will be confirmed.

<About ART state ST6>
Next, the ART state ST6 will be described. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the ART state ST6. The ART state ST6 has a start period ST11, a first unit execution time ST12, and a second unit execution time ST13.

The start period ST11 is a gaming state that occurs when the ART state ST6 is newly started. The start period ST11 continues for 10 games. In the start period ST11, the point lottery process is executed based on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in each game, and the points selected in the point lottery process are added. Then, when the start period ST11 ends, the number of stocks of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 and the first unit execution that occur after the end of the start period ST11 are based on the total points acquired in the current start period ST11. The type of continuation rate mode that determines the continuation rate when the continuation lottery process is executed at the ST12 is determined. The types of the continuation rate mode are the first continuation mode in which the continuation rate is 50%, the second continuation mode in which the continuation rate is 60%, and the third continuation mode in which the continuation rate is 70%. There is a fourth continuation mode that is 80%.

The first unit execution time ST12 is a gaming state that occurs after the start period ST11 ends in the ART state ST6. The initial number of games in the first unit execution time ST12 is any of 29 games to 32 games. Further, when the additional condition is satisfied for the number of continuous games of the first unit execution time ST12, the number of additional games determined when the additional condition is satisfied when the first unit execution time ST12 is started is the initial game. It is added to the number. When a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started, the initial number of games of the execution time is first notified in the start game of the execution time, and if the addition condition is satisfied, after that. The number of additional games determined when the additional condition is satisfied is notified to. Then, after each of these notifications is made, the total number of continuous games in the current execution times is displayed, and the display of the number of continuous games is continued. In this case, each time one game is digested, the display of the number of continuous games is subtracted by one.

In the first unit execution round ST12, the continuation rate increase lottery process is executed based on the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game, and the continuation rate increase lottery process results in an increase in the winning lottery process. Is promoted to a continuation rate mode in which the continuation rate of is higher than before. When the number of continuous games remaining in the first unit execution time ST12 becomes 0 games, if the stock number of the first unit execution time ST12 is 1 or more, the stock number is subtracted by 1 and then the first unit execution time ST12 A new execution time of is started. On the other hand, when the number of stocks of the first unit execution time ST12 is "0", the continuous lottery process is executed according to the continuation rate corresponding to the continuation rate mode at that time. Then, if the continuous lottery process results in continuous winning, new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started, and if the continuous lottery process does not result in continuous winning, the ART state ST6 ends. do.

The second unit execution time ST13 is a gaming state that occurs when the first unit execution time ST12 is executed 12 times and the continuation conditions of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are further satisfied. That is, the 1st to 12th unit execution times ST12 and ST13 of the ART state ST6 become the 1st unit execution time ST12, and the 13th and subsequent unit execution times ST12 and ST13 become the 2nd unit execution time ST13. The initial number of games in the second unit execution time ST13 is any of 29 games to 32 games. In the second unit execution time ST13, unlike the first unit execution time ST12, the number of continuous games is not added. Further, since the stock number of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 determined in the start period ST11 is 6 or less, the stock number does not remain in the second unit execution time ST13.

When the number of continuous games remaining in the second unit execution time ST13 becomes 0, the continuous lottery process is executed at the specific continuation rate. The specific continuation rate is a continuation rate equal to or higher than the continuation rate corresponding to the continuation rate mode, which is the highest continuation rate among the continuation rate modes in the first unit execution time ST12. Specifically, the first unit execution time ST12 The highest continuation rate in is 80%, while the specific continuation rate in the second unit execution time ST13 is set to 90%, which is a continuation rate higher than the continuation rate. As a result, the second unit execution time ST13 is more likely to be continuously won in the continuous lottery process than the first unit execution time ST12. If the continuous lottery process results in continuous winning, a new execution time of the second unit execution time ST13 is started, and if the continuous lottery process does not result in continuous winning, the ART state ST6 ends.

Next, the distribution of the number of games in the ART state ST6 will be described. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution of the number of games in the ART state ST6.

As already explained, in the second section SC2, the maximum number of games (specifically 1500 games) is set and the maximum net increase number (specifically 2400) is set, and the ending condition of any of these is set. If it is established, even if it is in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, these game states are terminated in the middle with the forced termination of the second section SC2. Further, the second section SC2 has stay modes A mode to C mode, and the number of games digested after the start of the second section SC2 reaches the number of ceiling games regardless of the stay mode. As a result, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed. In this case, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is the case where the A mode is set in the second section SC2, and the minimum value is necessary until the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is confirmed. The relationship between the number of ceiling games, the maximum number of continuous games assumed in the ready state ST4, and the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, which shifts after the number of ceiling games is reached, is shown in FIG. 62A. As you can see, it will be 691 games.

As described above, the ART state ST6 has a start period ST11, a first unit execution time ST12, and a second unit execution time ST13. The number of continuous games in the start period ST11 is 10 games as shown in "B" of FIG. 62. The initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 29 to 32 games as shown in "C" of FIG. 62, and the total number of the initial games when the first unit execution time ST12 occurs 12 times is FIG. 62. As shown in "D" of the above, the number of games is 348 to 384. Further, although the number of continuous games may be added in the first unit execution time ST12, the maximum number of additional games that can occur in the first unit execution time ST12 is 170 games as shown in "E" of FIG. 62. It has become. That is, the first unit execution time ST12 is executed a maximum of 12 times as described above, but the maximum number of games that can be added within the range of the maximum 12 times is 170 games. The maximum number of games in total of the above-mentioned "B", the above-mentioned "D", and the above-mentioned "E" is 564 games as shown in "F" of FIG. 62.

The 564 games of the above "F" have a smaller number of games than the 691 games of the above "A", which is the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6. The difference between the above "A" and the above "F" is 127 games as shown in the "G" of FIG. 62. As a result, in the case where the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is 691 games, which is the minimum expected value, the first unit execution time ST12 is executed 12 times and the first unit execution time ST12 is executed. Even when the total number of additional games generated in the above situation is 170 games, which is the maximum number of games, it is possible to leave room for the second unit execution times ST13 to occur a plurality of times. Specifically, it is possible to leave room for the second unit execution time ST13 to occur at least three times. Therefore, when the second section SC2 shifts to the first ART state ST6, the second unit regardless of the game content in the second section SC2 until the ART state ST6 is started. It is possible to enable a situation in which the continuous lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the execution times ST13 is executed at the specific continuation rate, which is the highest continuation rate.

Next, the processing contents in the ART state ST6 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing ART processing at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72. The ART processing at the start of the game is executed in step S2305 in the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game (FIG. 50), and the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game completes the winning / failing determination of the combination in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). It is executed in step S710, which is a process that is executed after the game section and before the first control process (step S711) of the game section.

When the current state is the start period ST11 (step S3001: YES), the point lottery process is executed (step S3002). In the point lottery process, any of the points "1" to "3" is selected by lottery. In this case, the point lottery process is performed so that the person who wins the index value IV with a low winning probability in the role lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game has a larger expected value of the selected points. Will be executed. Then, the points selected by the point lottery process are added to the point counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3003). The point counter is a counter for specifying the total points acquired in the start period ST11 by the main MPU 72. The point counter is cleared to "0" when the ART state ST6 is newly started.

After that, by referring to the value of the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not this game is the final game of the start period ST11 (step S3004). In the case of the final game of the start period (step S3004: YES), the number of stocks corresponding to the value of the point counter of the main RAM 74 is specified, and the stock number is set in the stock number counter provided in the main RAM 74. (Step S3005). The stock number counter is a counter for specifying the stock number of the first unit execution time ST12 by the main MPU 72. The maximum number of stocks that can be selected in step S3005 is "6", and if the value of the point counter is any of "13 to 15", "1" is selected as the stock number and the stock number counter. Is set to "1", and if the value of the point counter is any of "16 to 18", "2" is selected as the stock number, "2" is set to the stock number counter, and the point counter is used. When the value of the counter is any of "19 to 21", "3" is selected as the number of stocks, "3" is set to the number of stocks counter, and the value of the point counter is "22 to 24". If it is either, "4" is selected as the stock number, "4" is set in the stock number counter, and if the value of the point counter is any of "25 to 27", it is set as the stock number. When "5" is selected and "5" is set in the stock number counter, and when the value of the point counter is 28 or more, "6" is selected as the stock number and "6" is set in the stock number counter. Will be done.

After that, the continuation mode corresponding to the value of the point counter of the main RAM 74 is specified, and the value corresponding to the continuation mode is set in the continuation mode counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3006). The continuation mode counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the continuation rate when the continuous lottery process is executed when the first unit execution time ST12 is completed. Specifically, when the value of the point counter is any of "10 to 15", "1" corresponding to the first continuation mode in which the continuation rate is 50% is set in the continuation mode counter, and points are set. When the value of the counter is any of "16 to 20", "2" corresponding to the second continuation mode in which the continuation rate is 60% is set in the continuation mode counter, and the value of the point counter is ". If it is any of "21 to 25", "3" corresponding to the third continuation mode in which the continuation rate is 70% is set in the continuation mode counter, and if the value of the point counter is 26 or more, “4” corresponding to the fourth continuation mode in which the continuation rate is 80% is set in the continuation mode counter.

When the current state is not the start period ST11 (step S3001: NO), it is determined whether or not the game is the start game of the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13 (step S3007). In the case of the start game of the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13 (step S3007: YES), the process for starting the current set is executed (step S3008). The details of the start processing of this set will be described later, but the processing for setting the number of continuous games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 to be started this time is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the completion counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 10 or less (step S3009). The completion counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are executed in the current ART state ST6 by the main MPU 72. When the first unit execution time ST12 is started, the value of the completion counter is "0", and the value of the completion counter is incremented by 1 each time the continuation of the first unit execution time ST12 occurs. Further, as described above, the first unit execution time ST12 is executed up to 12 times. Therefore, when the value of the completion counter is 10 or less, it means that the start target of this time is the first unit execution times ST12 of the first to eleventh times.

When the value of the completion counter is 10 or less (step S3009: YES), the addition process of the next set is executed (step S3010), and when the value of the completion counter is 11 or more (step S3009: NO). ), Do not execute the addition process of the next set. That is, when the first to eleventh first unit execution times ST12 are started, the next set addition process (step S3010) is executed, and the twelfth first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time is executed. When ST13 is started, the next set addition process (step S3010) is not executed. The details of the addition process of the next set will be described later, but in the next 1st unit execution time ST12 when the 1st unit execution time ST12 of this time is continued, it is added to the initial number of games of the next 1st unit execution time ST12. Execute a process for determining the number of additional games to be added.

When a negative determination is made in step S3007, a negative determination is made in step S3009, or the process of step S3010 is executed, the current status is determined by determining whether or not the value of the completion counter is 11 or less. It is determined whether or not the first unit is executed at ST12 (step S3011). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3011, the continuation rate increase lottery process is executed (step S3012). In the continuation rate increase lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to promote the continuation mode that determines the continuation rate of the continuous lottery process executed when the first unit execution round ST12 is completed to the current continuation mode. In this case, those who have won the index value IV, which has a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game, have a higher probability of winning the winning in the continuation rate increase lottery process.

When the result of the continuation rate increase lottery process is an increase win (step S3013: YES), the continuation rate increase process is executed (step S3014). In the continuation rate increase process, if the current state is the fourth continuation mode that is the maximum continuation rate (specifically, 80%) in the first unit execution time ST12, the fourth continuation mode is maintained and the first continuation mode is maintained. In the case of any of the third continuation modes, the value of the continuation mode counter of the main RAM 74 is added by 1 so that the continuation mode has a continuation rate one step higher.

When a negative judgment is made in step S3011, a negative judgment is made in step S3013, or the process of step S3014 is executed, by referring to the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74, this game is the current unit. It is determined whether or not the game is the final game in the execution times ST12 and ST13 (step S3015). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3015, it is determined whether or not the value of the stock number counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3016). When the value of the stock number counter is 1 or more, it means that the stock number of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 1 or more as described above, and when the value of the stock number counter is "0". It means that the number of stocks of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is "0". In this case, if this time is the first unit execution time ST12, the value of the stock number counter may be 1 or more, whereas if this time is the second unit execution time ST13, the value of the stock number counter is ". It is "0".

When the value of the stock number counter is 1 or more, a continuation confirmation command indicating that the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is confirmed is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3020). By receiving the continuation confirmation command, the effect side MPU 92 is set to execute the effect indicating that the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is confirmed. The continuation confirmation command is transmitted with the numerical information set in the additional counter 74h of the main RAM 74 set. Although details will be described later, the additional counter 74h is set with numerical information corresponding to the number of additional games added to the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 when the next unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started. Will be done.

When the value of the stock number counter is "0" (step S3016: NO), the continuous lottery process is executed (step S3017). In the continuous lottery process, if this time is the first unit execution time ST12, the continuous lottery table corresponding to the value of the continuous mode counter of the main RAM 74 is read. In this case, if the value of the continuation mode counter is "1", the continuation lottery table having a continuation rate of 50% is read, and if the value of the continuation mode counter is "2", the continuation rate is 60%. Is read, and if the value of the continuation mode counter is "3", the continuation rate is 70%. The continuation lottery table is read, and if the value of the continuation mode counter is "4", the continuation rate is 80%. Is read. Further, if this time is the second unit execution time ST13, the continuation lottery table in which the continuation rate is 90% is read regardless of the value of the continuation mode counter of the main RAM 74. Then, the numerical information is acquired from the random number counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74, and the acquired numerical information is collated with the read continuous lottery table.

When the result of the continuous lottery process (step S3017) is continuous winning (step S3018: YES), "1" is set in the continuous confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3019). The continuation confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 has been confirmed. After that, a continuation confirmation command indicating that the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is confirmed is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3020). By receiving the continuation confirmation command, the effect side MPU 92 is set to execute the effect indicating that the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is confirmed.

Next, the ART state processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The ART state process is executed in step S908 in the corresponding process (FIG. 26) at the end of the game. As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped, the ART state processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in one game are stopped. Will be executed later.

First, the value of the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S3101). The ART continuation counter is used to specify the remaining number of continuous games in the start period ST11 by the main MPU 72 if the start period is ST11, and if the unit execution times are ST12 and ST13, the unit execution times are ST12 and ST13. It is used to specify the remaining number of continuous games in the main MPU 72.

In the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the ART state process (step S908) is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S902 in the corresponding process (FIG. 26) at the end of the game. Therefore, if the game shifts to the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 in the middle of the ART state ST6, the ART state ST6 is temporarily interrupted, and the number of games digested in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is the ART state. Not treated as the number of digestion games in ST6. When the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is completed, the ART state ST6 is restarted while the lottery mode remains the normal mode without shifting to the preparation state ST4.

After that, by determining whether or not "1" is set in the start period flag of the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the current state is the start period ST11 (step S3102). When the start period ST11 is set (step S3102: YES), the number of continuous games remaining in the start period ST11 is set to 0 by determining whether or not the value of the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is "0". It is determined whether or not it has become (step S3103).

When the value of the ART continuation counter is "0" (step S3103: YES), the maximum number of additional games in the current ART state ST6 is set to the additional remaining counter 74f (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74. A certain "170" is set (step S3104). The additional remaining counter 74f is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of remaining additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the ART state ST6 this time. After that, the setting process of the first unit execution time ST12 is executed (step S3105). In the setting process of the first unit execution time ST12, "1" is set in the unit execution flag provided in the main RAM 74, and the start period flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared by "0". The unit execution flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13. After that, a transition command to the first unit execution time ST12 indicating that the start period ST11 has shifted to the first unit execution time ST12 is transmitted to the effecting side MPU 92 (step S3106). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 causes the effect corresponding to the first unit execution time ST12 to be executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

When the current state is not the start period ST11 (step S3102: NO), the remaining of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are determined by determining whether or not the value of the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is "0". It is determined whether or not the number of continuous games has reached 0 (step S3107). When the value of the ART continuation counter is "0" (step S3107: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the stock number counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3108). When the value of the stock number counter is 1 or more, it means that the stock number of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 1 or more as described above, and when the value of the stock number counter is "0". It means that the number of stocks of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is "0". In this case, if this time is the first unit execution time ST12, the value of the stock number counter may be 1 or more, whereas if this time is the second unit execution time ST13, the value of the stock number counter is ". It is "0". When the value of the stock number counter is 1 or more (step S3108: YES), after subtracting 1 from the value of the stock number counter (step S3109), the processing when the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in steps S3112 to S3115 are continued. To execute.

When the value of the stock number counter is "0" (step S3108: NO), it is determined at the start of this game by determining whether or not "1" is set in the continuation confirmation flag of the main RAM 74. In the executed continuous lottery process (step S3017), it is determined whether or not the continuous winning is achieved (step S3110). When "1" is set in the continuation confirmation flag (step S3110: YES), after clearing the continuation confirmation flag "0" (step S3111), the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in steps S3112 to S3115 are continued. Perform time processing.

That is, in a situation where the number of stocks of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 1 or more and the remaining number of continuous games of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13 becomes 0 games, the stock number is exhausted by 1. The next unit execution times ST12 and ST13 occur without executing the continuous lottery process. On the other hand, if the number of stocks of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is "0" and the remaining number of continuous games of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13 becomes 0 games, the continuous lottery process is executed and the continuation is performed. By continuing to win in the lottery process, the next unit execution times ST12 and ST13 will occur.

As the processing when the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are continued, first, the value of the completion counter of the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S3112). As already described, the completion counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are executed in the current ART state ST6 by the main MPU 72. Then, by determining whether or not the value of the completion counter after the 1 addition is "12", the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 to be executed by the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 this time are the first. It is determined whether or not the unit execution time ST12 has changed to the second unit execution time ST13.

When the value of the completion counter is not "12" (step S3113: NO), the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 indicating that the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 of the same type as the current execution target unit execution times ST12 and ST13 have been continued are continued. , ST13 continuation command is transmitted to the directing side MPU 92 (step S3114). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 gives the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 the effect corresponding to the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 of the same type as the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 which are the current execution targets. To be executed. On the other hand, when the value of the completion counter is "12" (step S3113: YES), it indicates that the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 to be executed have changed from the first unit execution time ST12 to the second unit execution time ST13. The transition command of the second unit execution time ST13 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3115). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the start of the second unit execution time ST13.

On the other hand, when "1" is not set in the continuation confirmation flag (step S3110: NO), that is, the number of stocks of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is "0" and the result of the continuous lottery process (step S3017) continues. If it is not won, the advantageous termination process is executed (step S3116). The processing content of the advantageous termination process is the same as the processing content of the advantageous termination process executed in step S2707 in the pseudo-bonus process (FIG. 56).

That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 57, first, the advantageous end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2801). The advantageous end command is a command transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 when the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2. When the effecting side MPU 92 receives the advantageous end command in the situation of the ART state ST6, the effect indicating that the ART state ST6 is terminated is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. ..

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the heaven preparation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2802). The heaven preparation flag is the situation after the ART state ST6 started before the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed in the B mode, or the first pseudo-bonus state. When the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs after the end of ST5, it is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the situation is after the end of the ART state ST6. When the second section SC2 in the B mode is started, "1" is set in the heaven preparation flag, and the first pseudo bonus state ST5 is set after the second section SC2 in the B mode is started. Until the end, until the ART state ST6 started before the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed, or after the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs. If so, the state in which "1" is set in the heaven preparation flag is maintained until the ART state ST6 is completed. On the other hand, when the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends in the second section SC2 which is the B mode, when the ART state ST6 started before the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed ends, or when the first pseudo-bonus state ST6 ends. If the transition to the ART state ST6 has occurred after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 of the above has ended, the heaven has occurred when the transition to the normal gaming state ST1 has been performed when the ART state ST6 has ended. The preparation flag is cleared to "0".

When "1" is not set in the heaven preparation flag (step S2802: NO), the setting process of the end preparation state ST7 is executed (step S2803). In the setting process, if the current gaming state is the ART state ST6, the ART state flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Further, in the setting process, "1" is set in the end preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74. The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is the end preparation state ST7, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST7. After that, the end preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2804). As described above, the end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST7.

When "1" is set in the heaven preparation flag (step S2802: YES), "80" is set in the release game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S2805). As already described, the release game number counter 74e is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed. By setting "80" in the release game number counter 74e in step S2805, the number of games required until the transition to the next pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the B mode is confirmed becomes 80 games. After that, the game state setting process is executed (step S2806). In the setting process, if the current gaming state is the ART state ST6, the ART state flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST1. In addition, the heaven preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2807).

Next, the loop lottery process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The loop lottery process is executed in step S307, which is a process executed at a timing after one game is started in the normal process (FIG. 12) and before the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is executed. ..

First, it is determined whether or not the game is the start game of a new execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13 (step S3201). Since the loop lottery process is a process for determining which of the 29 games to 32 games the initial number of games of each unit execution time ST12 and ST13 is, the first unit execution time ST12 or the second It is executed only in the start game of the new execution times in the unit execution times ST13.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, the numerical information corresponding to the first waiting period is set in the update waiting counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3202). In the loop lottery process (FIG. 65), the acquisition of the second random number from the second random number circuit 76 may be repeated. The second random number is 1-byte numerical information consisting of 8 bits. The second random number circuit 76 sequentially updates the second random number in the numerical range of "0 to 255" based on the clock signal output from the clock circuit, and when the update of the second random number makes one round, a new initial stage is obtained. The update of the next lap of the second random number is started from the value. When the second random number is repeatedly acquired in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65), at least the first waiting period is secured from the acquisition of the second random number once to the acquisition of the second random number next time. .. This first standby period is set as a period equal to or longer than the period required for the update of the second random number to make one round in the second random number circuit 76. Specifically, the update of the second random number in the second random number circuit 76. Is set to 1.49 milliseconds, which is a longer period than the period required for one lap. The update waiting counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the first waiting period has elapsed.

After executing the process of step S3202, the update process of the update waiting counter is executed (step S3203). Specifically, the value of the update waiting counter is subtracted by 1. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the update waiting counter after the subtraction of 1 has become "0" (step S3204). If the value of the update waiting counter is not "0" (step S3204: NO), the process returns to step S3203 and the update processing of the update waiting counter is executed again. Then, the update process of the update waiting counter is repeated until the value of the update waiting counter becomes "0".

When the value of the update waiting counter is "0" (step S3204: YES), it means that the first waiting period has elapsed, so the process proceeds to step S3205. In step S3205, “15”, which is the number of repetitions, is set in the repetition number counter 74g (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3205). In the loop lottery process (FIG. 65), the acquisition of the second random number from the second random number circuit 76 can be repeated as described above. When the second random number is repeatedly acquired, not only the first waiting period is secured as a fixed period from the acquisition of the second random number to the next acquisition of the second random number. , A second waiting period is secured as a period of fluctuation. Even if the maximum value of the second waiting period is reached, it is less than or equal to the first waiting period, and more specifically, it is shorter than the first waiting period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second waiting period may be the same as the first waiting period, or the second waiting period may be longer than the first waiting period. The waiting period may be configured to always be a period equal to or longer than the first waiting period.

After that, the second random number acquired in the previous step S3212 is read from the second random number acquisition area provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3206). After the partial clearing process (step S104) or the entire clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, a second random number having a decimal value of "0" is generated in the second random number acquisition area. It will be stored. After that, the lower 4 bits of the 8-bit second random number read in step S3206 are stored in the register of the main MPU 72 as a variation value (step S3207). In this case, since the variation value is 4-bit numerical information, the minimum value is "0" and the maximum value is "15".

After that, it is determined whether or not the variation value stored in the register of the main MPU 72 is smaller than the value of the repetition counter 74g of the main RAM 74 (step S3208). That is, the process for determining the magnitude relationship is executed. When the variation value is smaller than the value of the repetition counter 74g (step S3208: YES), the process proceeds to step S3209 by the JUMP instruction, and when the variation value is equal to or more than the value of the repetition counter 74g (step S3208). : NO), the process proceeds to step S3209 by the NOP instruction. In step S3209, the value of the repetition counter 74g is subtracted by 1. Then, if the value of the repetition counter 74g after 1 subtraction is 1 or more (step S3210: NO), the process returns to step S3208, and if the value of the repetition counter 74g after 1 subtraction is “0” (step S3210: NO). Step S3210: YES), the process proceeds to step S3211.

As described above, the process proceeds to step S3209 regardless of whether the affirmative judgment is made in step S3208 or the negative judgment is made in step S3208, but the JUMP instruction is more than the case where the NOP instruction is executed. Is executed, the processing time required to proceed to the processing of step S3209 is longer by about 10 microseconds. Then, as described above, the JUMP instruction is executed and the NOP instruction is executed depending on whether or not the variation value determined as the lower 4 bits of the second random number acquired last time is smaller than the value of the repetition counter 74g. There are cases where it is executed. Further, each time the process of step S3209 is executed, the value of the repetition counter 74g is subtracted by 1, and the processes of steps S3208 and S3209 are repeated until the value of the repetition counter 74g after 1 subtraction becomes "0". .. As a result, the value of the lower 4 bits of the second random number obtained last time is the ratio of the number of times the JUMP instruction is executed in step S3208 to the number of times the NOP instruction is executed in step S3208 out of the 15 repetition times. As a result, the second waiting period can be changed.

In step S3211, the value of the lottery execution counter provided in the main RAM 74 is added by 1. The lottery execution counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the additional lottery process (step S3213) has been executed in the current start game in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

After that, the second random number at that time is acquired from the second random number circuit 76 and stored in the second random number acquisition area of the main RAM 74 (step S3212). Then, the addition lottery process is executed (step S3213). In the addition lottery process, the addition lottery table stored in advance in the main ROM 73 is read out, and the second random number is collated with the read-out addition lottery table, so that the second random number is set in the addition lottery table. Judge whether or not it matches the numerical information. Only one additional lottery table is provided, and the above-mentioned winning numerical information is set so that the probability of winning the additional winning in the additional lottery process is 60%.

Here, as described above, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is executed at a timing prior to the timing at which the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is executed in the normal process (FIG. 12). The result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in the above does not affect the additional lottery process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is executed at a timing later than the timing at which the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is executed in the normal process (FIG. 12). By setting the addition lottery table according to the type of index value IV that can be won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game is the addition lottery process. It may be a configuration that affects.

If the additional lottery process (step S3213) does not result in an additional winning (step S3214: NO), the loop lottery process ends as it is. That is, if the addition lottery process (step S3213) does not result in the addition winning, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is performed without executing the process for increasing the initial number of games in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. It will be terminated.

When the addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3213) (step S3214: YES), the value of the initial addition counter provided in the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S3215). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the lottery execution counter of the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S3216). As described above, since the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 29 to 32 games, the maximum number of games that can be added as the initial number of games in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is 3 games. The maximum number of times the additional lottery process (step S3213) is executed is three.

If the value of the lottery execution counter is less than 3, it means that the number of times of the additional lottery process (step S3213) executed in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) has not reached 3 times. The negative determination is made, and the process returns to the process of step S3202. On the other hand, when the value of the lottery execution counter is "3", it means that the number of times of the additional lottery process (step S3213) executed in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) has reached the maximum value of three times. Therefore, an affirmative determination is made in step S3216 to end the loop lottery process.

Next, a state in which the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 66A shows a period during which one game is executed, FIG. 66B shows a period during which the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is executed, and FIG. 66C shows a period during which the first waiting period is executed. 66 (d) shows the period which is the second waiting period, and FIG. 66 (e) shows the timing when the additional lottery process (step S3213) is executed.

At the timing of t1, one game is started as shown in FIG. 66 (a). The game is the first game when new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started. Therefore, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 66 (b). Further, at the timing of t1, the measurement of the first waiting period is started as shown in FIG. 66 (c).

After that, the measurement of the first waiting period started at the timing of t1 is completed at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 66 (c). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3204 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). Therefore, at the timing of t2, the measurement of the second waiting period is started as shown in FIG. 66 (d). In the second waiting period, the combination of the processes of step S3208 and step S3209 is repeated 15 times. Then, at the timing of t3, the measurement of the second waiting period is completed as shown in FIG. 66 (d). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3210 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66 (e) at the timing of t3, a second random number is acquired from the second random number circuit 76, and the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed using the acquired second random number. .. If no addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3213), the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is completed without adding 1 to the value of the initial addition counter. In this case, since the value of the initial addition counter remains "0", the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 started this time is 29 games.

In the case of FIG. 66, the addition winning is achieved in the addition lottery process (step S3213) executed at the timing of t3. Therefore, the value of the initial addition counter is added by 1. Then, at the timing of t3, the measurement of the first waiting period is newly started as shown in FIG. 66 (c).

After that, the measurement of the first waiting period started at the timing of t3 is completed at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 66 (c). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3204 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). In this case, the first waiting period from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2 and the first waiting period from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4 are the same period.

At the timing of t4, the measurement of the second waiting period is started as shown in FIG. 66 (d). In the second waiting period, the combination of the processes of step S3208 and step S3209 is repeated 15 times. Then, at the timing of t5, the measurement of the second waiting period is completed as shown in FIG. 66 (d). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3210 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). In this case, the second waiting period between the timing of t2 and the timing of t3 is different from the second waiting period between the timing of t4 and the timing of t5.

As shown in FIG. 66 (e) at the timing of t5, a second random number is acquired from the second random number circuit 76, and the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed using the acquired second random number. If no addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3213), the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is completed without adding 1 to the value of the initial addition counter. In this case, since the value of the initial addition counter remains "1", the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 started this time is 30 games.

In the case of FIG. 66, the addition winning is achieved in the addition lottery process (step S3213) executed at the timing of t5. Therefore, the value of the initial addition counter is added by 1. Then, at the timing of t5, the measurement of the first waiting period is newly started as shown in FIG. 66 (c).

After that, the measurement of the first waiting period started at the timing of t5 is completed at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 66 (c). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3204 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). In this case, the first waiting period from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, the first waiting period from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, and the first waiting period from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6 are the same period. ing.

At the timing of t6, the measurement of the second waiting period is started as shown in FIG. 66 (d). In the second waiting period, the combination of the processes of step S3208 and step S3209 is repeated 15 times. Then, at the timing of t7, the measurement of the second waiting period is completed as shown in FIG. 66 (d). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3210 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). In this case, the second waiting period from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3, the second waiting period from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5, and the second waiting period from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7 are all different periods. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 66 (e) at the timing of t7, a second random number is acquired from the second random number circuit 76, and the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed using the acquired second random number. If no addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3213), the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is completed without adding 1 to the value of the initial addition counter. In this case, since the value of the initial addition counter remains "2", the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 started this time is 31 games. On the other hand, when the addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3213), the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is terminated after the value of the initial addition counter is added by 1. In this case, since the value of the initial addition counter is "3", the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 started this time is 32 games.

The loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is completed at the timing of t7, regardless of whether or not the addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3213) executed at the timing of t7. After that, the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the winning combination in this game is executed.

As described above, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is executed in the first game when the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started. Then, the addition lottery process is repeatedly executed on condition that the addition winning is achieved in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65), so that the initial number of games of the newly started unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 29 games or more. It is decided from 32 games. In the addition lottery process, the second random number acquired from the second random number circuit 76 is used, but when the addition lottery process is repeatedly executed, the range of one processing time of the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). The second random number is repeatedly acquired within.

In this case, not only the first waiting period is secured as a fixed period but also the second waiting period as a variable period from the acquisition of the second random number once to the acquisition of the second random number. The period is secured. The first standby period is set as a period equal to or longer than the period required for the update of the second random number to make one round in the second random number circuit 76. Specifically, the update of the second random number is performed in the second random number circuit 76. It is set to 1.49 milliseconds, which is a longer period than the period required to make one lap. As a result, the random number in the second random number circuit 76 is updated at least once between the time when the second random number is acquired once and the time when the second random number is acquired next, so that the second random number can be updated in a short period of time. Even when the acquisition is repeated, it is possible to acquire any numerical value of the second random number in the numerical range of "0 to 255" as the second random number at each acquisition timing. Further, since the second standby period is secured as the period of fluctuation, it is possible to prevent the acquisition timing of the second random number from being biased within the range of one round of the second random number in the second random number circuit 76. It will be possible.

Next, the addition process of the next set executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 67. The addition process of the next set is executed in step S3010 in the ART process (FIG. 63) at the start of the game. As described above, the addition process of the next set is executed in the game in which the first to eleventh new execution times in the first unit execution time ST12 are started. Further, as already explained, the addition process of the next set is the initial number of games of the next 1st unit execution time ST12 in the next 1st unit execution time ST12 when the current 1st unit execution time ST12 is continued. Execute a process for determining the number of additional games to be added.

First, the additional lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the continuation mode counter of the main RAM 74 and the value of the completion counter of the main RAM 74 is read from the main ROM 73 (step S3301). Then, the additional lottery process is executed (step S3302). In the additional lottery process, numerical information at that time is acquired from a random number counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74, and the acquired numerical information is collated with the additional lottery table.

In the additional lottery table, 0 games, 10 games, 30 games and 80 games are set as the number of additional games, and the numerical information of the random number counter is set for each of the 0 games, 10 games, 30 games and 80 games. Numerical range is set. Further, a plurality of types of additional lottery tables are set, and the plurality of types of additional lottery tables are associated with a combination of the continuation mode and the number of executions of the first unit execution time ST12. Then, as described above, when the additional lottery process (step S3302) is executed, the additional lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the continuation mode counter and the value of the completion counter is read, so that the additional lottery table is the current continuation mode and the current state. It corresponds to the combination of the number of times of execution of the first unit execution time ST12 of.

In the first continuation mode (specifically, 50%) and the second continuation mode (specifically, 60%) in which the continuation rate is relatively low, the current number of executions of the first unit execution time ST12 is from the first time to If it is the 5th time, the additional lottery table (for example, the expected value of 10 games) with a relatively low expected value of the number of additional games is selected, and if it is the 6th time or later, the expected value of the number of additional games is given. An additional lottery table with a relatively high value (for example, an expected value of 30 games) is selected. On the other hand, in the third continuation mode (specifically 70%) and the fourth continuation mode (specifically 80%) in which the continuation rate is relatively high, the current number of executions of the first unit execution time ST12 is 1. An additional lottery table (for example, an expected value of 30 games) with a relatively high expected value of the number of additional games is selected in the case of the 5th to 5th times, and the number of additional games is given in the case of the 6th time or later. An additional lottery table with a relatively low expected value (for example, an expected value of 10 games) is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the above relationship may be reversed.

When the result of the additional lottery process (step S3302) is the additional winning (step S3303: YES), that is, when the number of additional games other than 0 games is selected in the additional lottery process (step S3302), the addition of the main RAM 74 is added. It is determined whether or not the value of the remaining counter 74f is larger than the number of additional games selected this time in the additional lottery process (step S3302) (step S3304). As already described, the additional remaining counter 74f is a counter for specifying the number of remaining additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the ART state ST6 this time by the main MPU 72. As described above, the additional remaining counter 74f is set to "170", which is the maximum number of additional games, when the start period ST11 ends and the first first unit execution time ST12 is started.

That is, in step S3304, the number of remaining additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 is larger than the number of additional games selected this time in the additional lottery process (step S3302). It is judged whether or not it is. In step S3304, the remaining number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the ART state ST6 this time is selected this time in the additional lottery process (step S3302). It may be configured to determine whether or not the number of additional games is equal to or greater than the number of additional games.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3304, the number of games selected in the additional lottery process (step S3302) is set in the additional counter 74h provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3305). The addition counter 74h specifies the number of additional games to be added to the initial number of games of the next execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 when the current execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is continued by the main MPU 72. It is a counter for. After that, the number of games selected in the additional lottery process (step S3302) is subtracted from the value of the additional remaining counter 74f of the main RAM 74 (step S3306).

Even if one or more additional games are selected in the additional lottery process (step S3302) as described above, the remaining number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the ART state ST6 this time is the additional lottery. If the number of additional games is not larger than the number of additional games selected this time in the process (step S3302), the selected number of additional games is invalidated without being added. That is, when the remaining number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the ART state ST6 this time is not set as the addition target, but the additional winning is not achieved in the additional lottery process (step S3302). Similarly, the number of additional games is 0. This not only makes it possible to reduce the number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the ART state ST6 to the maximum number of games or less, but also makes it possible to reduce the number of additional games that can occur in the first unit execution time ST12 in the rear execution time. Even so, it is possible to increase the possibility that the number of additional games will be given.

Next, the process for starting the current set executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The process for starting the set this time is executed in step S3008 in the process for ART at the start of the game (FIG. 63). As already explained, the process for starting this set is executed in the game in which the new execution times in the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13 are started, and the unit execution time ST12, It is executed to set the number of continuous games of the current execution times in ST13.

First, "29", which is the minimum value of the initial number of games, is set in the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3401). As already explained, the ART continuation counter is used to specify the remaining number of continuous games in the start period ST11 in the start period ST11, and the unit execution in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. It is used to specify the remaining number of continuous games in ST12 and ST13 by the main MPU 72.

After that, the value of the initial addition counter of the main RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3402). In the initial addition counter, the number of games to be added to the number of initial games selected in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) executed when the current game is started is set. After executing the process of step S3402, the value of the initial addition counter is cleared to "0".

After that, by determining whether or not the value of the completion counter of the main RAM 74 is 11 or less, it is determined whether or not the current state is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S3403). When the current state is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S3403: YES), the value of the addition counter 74h of the main RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3404). After that, the value of the additional counter 74h is cleared to "0" (step S3405).

In the addition counter 74h, the number of addition games selected in the addition process (FIG. 67) of the next set executed in the game in which the previous execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 is started is set. Therefore, when the execution times of the first unit execution time ST12 are continued and a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started, the execution time is one time before the newly started execution time. The number of the selected additional games of 1 or more is added to the initial number of the newly started execution times, provided that the number of additional games of 1 or more is selected at the start of.

Since the next set addition process (step S3010) is not executed in the start period ST11, the number of games is not added to the initial number of games in the first first unit execution time ST12. As a result, in the configuration in which the maximum number of additional games (specifically 170 games) can be set as the number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the ART state ST6 this time, the first in the rear side execution time. Even if the unit execution time is ST12, it is possible to increase the possibility that the number of additional games will be given. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first unit execution time ST12 is obtained by executing the additional lottery process (step S3302) at the start of the start period ST11 or the first first unit execution time ST12. However, the configuration may be such that the number of games can be added to the initial number of games.

When a negative determination is made in step S3403, or when the process of step S3404 is executed, the start command of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3406). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the start of the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an effect control process for ART executed by the effect side MPU 92. The effect control process for ART is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

It is determined whether or not the ending effect of the second section SC2 is being executed (step S3501). When the ending effect of the second section SC2 is being executed (step S3501: YES), the processes after step S3502 are not executed. As a result, it is possible to prioritize the execution of the ending effect of the second section SC2.

When the ending effect of the second section SC2 is not being executed (step S3501: NO), the effect control process for the start period is executed on condition that the start period is ST11 (step S3502: YES) (step S3503). .. In the effect control process for the start period, a process for advancing the effect of the start period ST11 in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is executed based on the reception of the game start command from the main MPU 72. As described above, the main MPU 72 determines the number of stocks of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in the final game of the start period ST11, but the stock number may be notified by the image display device 63 or the like. It may not be notified.

In the effect control process for ART, it is determined whether or not a command indicating the start of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3504). The command indicating the start of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is to the first unit execution time ST12 transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the start period ST11 ends and the first first unit execution time ST12 is started. Transition command, the continuation command of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the first unit execution time ST12 continues and a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started, 12 The transition command to the second unit execution time ST13 and the second unit execution sent from the main MPU 72 when the first first unit execution time ST12 ends and the first second unit execution time ST13 starts. The continuation command of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the times ST13 continues and a new execution time of the second unit execution time ST13 is started is included.

When the transition command to the first unit execution time ST12 is received, the production corresponding to the start period ST11 is ended in the other processing of step S3515, and the production corresponding to the first unit execution time ST12 is started. Execute the process to make it. Further, when the transition command to the second unit execution time ST13 is received, the production corresponding to the first unit execution time ST12 is terminated in the other processing of step S3515, and the production corresponding to the second unit execution time ST13 is completed. Executes the process for starting.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3504, the lottery process for the common effect is executed (step S3505). In the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, a common effect is executed from the start game to the game one time before the final game. The common effect is executed regardless of whether the next unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are continued or not, and whether the next unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are continued from the contents of the common effect. It is not possible to specify whether or not. A plurality of types of production stories are set for the common production, and in the lottery process of the common production, one production story is selected from the plurality of types of production stories.

By the way, the number of continuous games in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 may change depending on the number of initial games, and in the first unit execution time ST12, when the number of additional games is added to the initial number of games, it varies depending on the number of additional games. Can be done. However, at the stage of determining the lottery process of the common effect, it is not possible to specify the number of continuous games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. Therefore, as for the common production, the production contents for 5 games are set for any of the production stories, and the production contents for these 5 games are repeated during the period when the common production is executed in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. Will be.

After executing the common effect lottery process (step S3505), the common effect setting process is executed (step S3506). In the common effect setting process, the common effect table corresponding to the effect story selected in the common effect lottery process is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the common effect table, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the common effect corresponding to the effect story selected this time.

After that, the lottery process for the discontinuous effect is executed (step S3507). In the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the final game effect for clearly indicating whether or not a new unit execution time ST12 and ST13 occurs in the final game is executed. As the final game effect, a discontinuous effect executed when the new unit execution times ST12 and ST13 do not occur and a continuous effect executed when the new unit execution times ST12 and ST13 occur are set. There is. A plurality of types of production stories are set for the discontinuous production, and in the lottery process of the discontinuous production, one production story is selected from the plurality of types of production stories.

After executing the lottery process for the discontinuous effect (step S3507), the setting process for the discontinuous effect is executed (step S3508). In the discontinuity effect setting process, the discontinuity effect table corresponding to the effect story selected in the discontinuity effect lottery process is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. Whether or not a new execution time of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 occurs after the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 of the current execution time is completed is the start of the final game in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 of the current execution time. Sometimes it will definitely be decided. Then, as described above, when the main MPU 72 decides to generate a new execution time of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the main side MPU 72 transmits a continuation confirmation command at the start of the final game in the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13. However, if it is decided not to generate new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the continuation confirmation command is not transmitted at the start of the final game in the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13. If the directing MPU 92 does not receive the continuation confirmation command from the main MPU 72 at the start of the final game in the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the production side MPU 92 starts step S3508 when starting the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13. By controlling the execution of the effect according to the discontinuous effect table stored in the effect side RAM 94, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform the discontinuous effect corresponding to the effect story of the discontinuous effect table. To execute. The content of the discontinuous effect is arbitrary, but for example, when a battle effect between a ally character and an enemy character is executed on the image display device 63 in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the enemy character makes a normal attack or a special move. It is conceivable that the effect of winning the ally character by attack is executed as a discontinuous effect.

In the effect control process for ART, it is determined whether or not a continuation confirmation command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3509). As described above, the continuation confirmation command is transmitted at the start of the final game of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13 when it is determined that a new execution time of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 will occur.

When the continuation confirmation command is received (step S3509: YES), it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the addition counter 74h set in the continuation confirmation command is 20 or more, which is the reference number (step S3510). .. As described above, the continuous confirmation command is set with the numerical information set in the additional counter 74h of the main RAM 74. As already described, the additional counter 74h is set with numerical information corresponding to the number of additional games added to the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 when the next unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started. NS. That is, when the information on the number of additional games set in the received continuation confirmation command is 20 or more, the number of continuous games is set as the number of continuous games in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 with respect to the initial number of games. This means that the number of games is set by adding the number of additional games of 20 games or more. As described above, the number of additional games is generated in the first unit execution time ST12, but does not occur in the second unit execution time ST13. Therefore, the information on the number of additional games set in the continuation confirmation command is 20. The above situation can occur in the first unit execution time ST12, but does not occur in the second unit execution time ST13.

If a negative determination is made in step S3510, the normal continuous effect setting process is executed (step S3511). In the setting process of the normal continuous effect, the normal continuous effect table is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the normal continuous effect table, in the final game of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform the normal continuous effect. Will be executed. Normally, the content of the continuous effect is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that a new execution time of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 will occur. For example, in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the image display device 63 is on the side. When the battle effect between the character and the enemy character is executed, it is conceivable that the effect that the ally character wins the enemy character by the normal attack is executed as the normal continuous effect.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3510, the special continuation effect setting process is executed (step S3512). In the special continuation effect setting process, the special continuation effect table is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the effect on the effect side MPU 92 according to the special continuation effect table, in the final game of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform the special continuation effect. Will be executed. The content of the special continuous effect is different from the content of the normal continuous effect, and it is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that a new execution time of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 will occur. For example, the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 In the image display device 63, when a battle effect between a ally character and an enemy character is executed, it is conceivable that the effect that the ally character wins the enemy character by a special move attack is executed as a special continuous effect.

In the effect control process for ART, when the advantageous end command is received from the main MPU 72 in the ART state ST6 (step S3513: YES), the end effect setting process is executed (step S3514). In the end effect setting process, a table for executing an effect indicating that the current ART state ST6 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. .. As a result, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the current ART state ST6 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1. This effect is continued until the end preparation state ST7 ends and the normal game state ST1 is entered.

In the effect control process for ART, other processes are executed (step S3515). In other processes, a process for executing an effect other than the above-mentioned various effects is executed. In the other processing, the processing for displaying the information of the remaining number of continuous games in the start period ST11 and the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 on the image display device 63 may be executed. .. As a result, in the start period ST11, the remaining number of continuous games in the start period ST11 is displayed on the image display device 63, and in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the remaining continuous games in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are displayed. The number is displayed on the image display device 63.

Next, a state in which various effects proceed in the first unit execution time ST12 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 70. FIG. 70A shows the period during which one execution of the first unit execution time ST12 is executed, and FIG. 70B shows the addition lottery process (step S3302) in the addition process (FIG. 67) of the next set. 70 (c) shows the timing when the continuous lottery process (step S3017) in the ART process (FIG. 63) at the start of the game is executed, and FIG. 70 (d) shows the common effect. 70 (e) shows the period during which the discontinuous effect is executed, FIG. 70 (f) shows the period during which the normal continuous effect is executed, and FIG. 70 (g) shows the period during which the special continuous effect is executed. Indicates the period to be played.

First, a case where a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 does not occur will be described.

At the timing of t1, the first unit execution time ST12 is started as shown in FIG. 70 (a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 70B at the timing of t1, when a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 occurs after the current execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is completed. In the new execution times, it is determined whether or not to give the number of additional games, and when the number of additional games is given, the additional lottery process (step S3302) for determining the number of additional games is executed. Further, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), the common effect in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is started.

After that, at the timing of t2, the final game of the current execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 is started. In this case, the number of stocks of the first unit execution time ST12 is "0". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), the continuous lottery process (step S3017) for determining whether or not to generate a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is executed at the timing of t2. In this case, the result of the continuous lottery process (step S3017) is not a continuous winning. Therefore, at the timing of t2, the common effect is terminated as shown in FIG. 70 (d), and the discontinuous effect is started as shown in FIG. 70 (e). As a result, the player can grasp that a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 does not occur. After that, at the timing of t3, the first unit execution time ST12 is terminated as shown in FIG. 70 (a), and the discontinuity effect is terminated as shown in FIG. 70 (e).

Next, a case where a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 occurs will be described.

At the timing of t4, the first unit execution time ST12 is started as shown in FIG. 70 (a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 70B at the timing of t4, when a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 occurs after the current execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is completed. In the new execution times, it is determined whether or not to give the number of additional games, and when the number of additional games is given, the additional lottery process (step S3302) for determining the number of additional games is executed. Further, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), the common effect in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is started.

After that, at the timing of t5, the final game of the current execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 is started. In this case, the number of stocks of the first unit execution time ST12 is "0". Therefore, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), the continuous lottery process (step S3017) for determining whether or not to generate a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is executed. In this case, the result of the continuous lottery process (step S3017) is the continuous winning. However, in the additional lottery process (step S3302) executed at the timing of t4, the addition of the number of additional games of 20 or more, which is the reference number, is not selected. That is, it is not a situation in which the number of additional games of 20 games or more is given in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. Therefore, at the timing of t5, the common effect is ended as shown in FIG. 70 (d), and the normal continuous effect is started as shown in FIG. 70 (f). As a result, the player can grasp that a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 will occur. After that, at the timing of t6, the current execution times of the first unit execution time ST12 are completed as shown in FIG. 70 (a), and the normal continuous effect is ended as shown in FIG. 70 (f).

After that, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 70A, a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70B at the timing of t7, when a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 occurs after the current execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is completed. In the new execution times, it is determined whether or not to give the number of additional games, and when the number of additional games is given, the additional lottery process (step S3302) for determining the number of additional games is executed. Further, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), the common effect in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is started.

After that, at the timing of t8, the final game of the current execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 is started. In this case, the number of stocks of the first unit execution time ST12 is "0". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), the continuous lottery process (step S3017) for determining whether or not to generate a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is executed at the timing of t8. In this case, the result of the continuous lottery process (step S3017) is the continuous winning. Further, in the additional lottery process (step S3302) executed at the timing of t7, the addition of 20 or more additional games, which is the reference number, is selected. That is, in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the number of additional games of 20 games or more is given. Therefore, at the timing of t8, the common effect is terminated as shown in FIG. 70 (d), and the special continuous effect is started as shown in FIG. 70 (g). As a result, the player can grasp that a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 will occur, and also grasp that the number of additional games of 20 games or more will be given in the new execution time. It becomes possible to do. After that, at the timing of t9, the current execution times of the first unit execution time ST12 are completed as shown in FIG. 70 (a), and the continuous continuous production is finished as shown in FIG. 70 (g). Then, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 70A, a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a configuration in which the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are set as game states that are disadvantageous to the player, the second CB combination is won and the second CB is won by executing the game in which the number of bets is "2". By executing the game in which the number of bets is "3" after preventing the winning, as a result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in each game, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and each stop Regardless of the stop operation timing of the buttons 42 to 44, it is possible to play the game while not causing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. That is, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed and the second CB combination is won, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed thereafter to obtain the second CB combination. The second CB prize is not established even in the winning state of. Further, in the winning state of the second CB combination, even if the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the first CB combination is excluded from the lottery target in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16), so that the first CB combination Will not be in the winning state. Then, the first CB prize is not established because the first CB combination is not won, and the gaming state does not shift to the first CB state ST2. As a result, it is possible to execute the game in which the number of bets is "3" while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 from occurring. Then, by executing the game in which the number of bets is "3", the transition to the second section SC2 may occur, and the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 may occur.

Here, in the slot machine 10, it is assumed that the entire main RAM 74 clearing process (step S105) is executed for the purpose of obtaining an illegal profit. For example, in a situation where medals are paid out, more medals than originally supposed to be paid out are paid out by preventing the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53 from detecting medals by using a fraudulent jig. It is expected that fraudulent acts will occur. On the other hand, as described above, the slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting the intrusion of the fraudulent jig, and the object detection sensor detects the intrusion of the fraudulent jig. In that case, the intrusion abnormality notification is executed. Therefore, even if the fraudulent jig is inserted so as not to be detected by the object detection sensor, the act of illegally paying out many medals using the fraudulent jig is repeated. The intrusion of the illegal jig may be detected by the object detection sensor and the intrusion abnormality notification may be executed. In this case, it is assumed that the fraudster illegally executes the all clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 to forcibly terminate the intrusion abnormality notification. Then, in the slot machine 10 in which the intrusion abnormality notification is not executed, the game may be played by using the illegally obtained medal.

However, when such an illegal act is performed, the entire main RAM 74 is cleared (step S105), so that the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74. That is, the second CB combination is not in the winning state. Then, when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in a state where the second CB combination is not in the winning state, the player can take the winning state of the first CB combination and the first CB prize is established, which is disadvantageous to the player. It becomes the first CB state ST2 which is a game state. This makes it possible to give a disadvantage to a person who commits the above-mentioned cheating. On the other hand, in the game hall, by executing a game in which the number of bets is "2" before the start of business and setting the winning state of the second CB role, it becomes a normal player who does not perform the above-mentioned cheating. On the other hand, it is possible to play a game in which the number of bets is "3" while preventing the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 from occurring.

Not only the first CB state ST2 but also the second CB state ST3 is in a disadvantageous gaming state for the player. Therefore, when the fraudster performs the process of clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105) and then plays a game in which the number of bets is "2" using the illegally acquired medals, the role of the second CB is used. By winning and establishing the second CB prize, the game shifts to the second CB state ST3, which reduces the number of game media.

When a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, it can be the second section SC2 capable of shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, whereas the number of bets is "2". Even if the game is executed, it does not become the second section SC2. Therefore, the player basically executes the game in a situation where the number of bets is "3". In this case, the second section SC2 can be obtained by executing the game in which the number of bets is "3" regardless of whether or not the second CB combination is in the winning state. As a result, even if the player starts the game in which the number of bets is "3" in the situation where the player has not won the second CB combination, it is possible to be the second section SC2.

Even after the second section SC2, the transition of the gaming state to the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 does not occur unless the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed. Therefore, even in the second section SC2, the player basically executes the game in a situation where the number of bets is "3".

Since the second section SC2 ends based on the number of games executed in the second section SC2 reaching the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games), the second section SC2 continues for an excessively long time. It is possible to prevent it from being stowed. Further, in the second section SC2, the number of games executed in the second section SC2 is measured regardless of whether the game has a bet number of "3" or a game in which the bet number is "2". As a result, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur, and the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 occurs in the second section SC2. If a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the remaining upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is reduced by that amount. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in which the number of bets is "2".

Since the second section SC2 ends based on the fact that the limited total net increase number of game media in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400 sheets), the second section SC2 becomes excessively long. It is possible to prevent it from continuing. Further, in the second section SC2, regardless of whether the game has a bet number of "3" or a game in which the bet number is "2", the limited total net increase number of the game media is subject to measurement. As a result, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur, and the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 occurs in the second section SC2. However, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the limited total net increase number of the game medium may approach the upper limit net increase number. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in which the number of bets is "2".

In the situation where the second CB combination is not won, the non-internal notification image G12 or the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63. As a result, in a situation where the second CB role has not been won, it is possible to encourage the manager of the game hall or the like to win the second CB role.

The non-internal notification image G12 is displayed not only on the second CB combination but also on the image display device 63 in a situation where the first CB combination has not been won. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like confirms that the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed, so that he / she can understand that he / she has not won either the 1st CB combination or the 2nd CB combination. Is possible.

The number of games executed in the situation where the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed is displayed as the non-internal digestion game number image G22 which is a part of the non-internal notification image G12. As a result, in the situation where the manager of the game hall is trying to win the second CB role, the manager of the game hall recognizes how long the situation of not winning the second CB role continues. It becomes possible to make it.

If a game in which the number of bets is "2" is started even though the second CB combination has already been won, the 2-bet correspondence notification is executed. This makes it possible to promote the avoidance of the establishment of the second CB prize.

If the game in which the number of bets is "3" is started in the situation where the second CB combination is not won, the 3-bet correspondence notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to encourage the second CB combination to be won by playing a game in which the number of bets is "2".

In the situation where the first CB combination is won, the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63. This makes it possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to recognize that the first CB role has been won.

In order to execute the set value update process (step S106), the set key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on, and the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on without pressing the reset button 56. When the above is performed, a part of the information of the main RAM 74 is erased by executing the partial clearing process (step S104). In this case, even if the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed, the second CB winning data indicating that the second CB winning combination has been won is not erased from the main RAM 74. As a result, it is possible to maintain the winning state of the second CB combination even after the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed.

When the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed, the first CB winning data indicating that the first CB winning combination has been won is erased from the main RAM 74. As a result, when the situation in which the first CB combination is won is reached, a partial clearing process (step S104) is executed to eliminate the situation in which the first CB combination is won. Is possible.

When the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on while the reset key 56 is pressed while the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57, all clear processing (step S105) is executed. As a result, all the information in the main RAM 74 is erased. When the all clearing process (step S105) is executed, the second CB winning data indicating that the second CB winning combination has been won is erased from the main RAM 74. As a result, when the act of illegally executing the all clearing process (step S105) is performed, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the second CB combination has not been won.

Since the second section SC2 ends based on the number of games executed in the second section SC2 reaching the upper limit number of games, it is possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing for an excessively long time. Become. Further, by shifting to the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST5 based on the number of games executed in the situation of the second section SC2 and the normal game state ST1 reaching the number of ceiling games. , It is possible to give an opportunity to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5. Further, the number of ceiling games initially set when shifting to the second section SC2 is a number of games smaller than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2. As a result, when the second section SC2 is reached, it is possible to surely give an opportunity to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

There are a plurality of types of stay modes in the second section SC2 so that the number of ceiling games at least the first time is different. This makes it possible to diversify the game content in the second section SC2. Further, in any type of stay mode, the number of ceiling games initially set when shifting to the second section SC2 is less than the maximum number of games in the second section SC2. As a result, regardless of which stay mode is selected, it is possible to surely give an opportunity to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 when the second section SC2 is reached.

Regardless of whether the stay mode of the second section SC2 is A mode to C mode, the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is the same. As a result, even if the game content in the second section SC2 is diversified, it is possible to set the advantage of the second section SC2 once within a predetermined advantage range.

When the stay mode of the second section SC2 is the B mode, even if the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs once in the second section SC2, after the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the pseudo-bonus state When the state shifts to the ART state ST6 after the end of ST5, the second section SC2 is continued and the second ceiling in the normal game state ST1 even if the state shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the end of the ART state ST6. When the number of games is exhausted, it shifts to the pseudo bonus state ST5 again. The maximum number of games in the second section SC2 is the number of first ceiling games, the number of second ceiling games, the maximum number of continuous games assumed in the prepared state ST4, and the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. The number of games is set to be larger than the total number of games. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs twice in the second section SC2 once.

The number of the second ceiling games in the B mode is smaller than the number of the first ceiling games. As a result, when the second section SC2 is continued after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is completed, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 again.

The second section SC2 includes an A mode in which the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs only once in one second section SC2 and a B mode in which the pseudo-bonus state ST5 can occur multiple times in one second section SC2. Exists. As a result, it is possible to generate a relatively advantageous second section SC2 and a relatively disadvantageous second section SC2, and it is possible to diversify the game content.

The total number of games of the first ceiling game and the second ceiling game in the B mode is equal to or less than the number of the first ceiling games in the A mode. As a result, the B mode can be set to a mode in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 can occur a plurality of times in one second section SC2, and it is easy to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

By providing the section display unit 67 that is lit in the advantageous gaming state, which is one of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6, it is possible to confirm whether or not the advantageous gaming state is reached. It will be easier to do. In this case, when the second section SC2 ends due to the end of the advantageous gaming state, the section display unit 67 turns off when the second section SC2 ends, whereas the advantageous gaming state is If the second section SC2 continues even if it ends, the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state even after the advantageous gaming state ends. As a result, it is possible to make the player playing the game in the slot machine 10 recognize that the second section SC2 continues even after the end of the advantageous gaming state.

When shifting to the second section SC2, the section display unit 67 may be switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, even if the player other than the player who has continued the game in the slot machine 10 confirms that the section display unit 67 is in the lit state, the second section even after the advantageous game state ends. It is possible to make it impossible to grasp whether the SC2 is continued or the second section SC2 is newly generated.

Even if the second section SC2 is set, the section display unit 67 may be maintained in the off state, and then the section display unit 67 may be switched from the off state to the lit state when the advantageous gaming state is entered. As a result, the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state in the advantageous gaming state, while the section display unit 67 is maintained in the off state in the second section SC2 and not in the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to create a situation. Therefore, there is a possibility that the section display unit 67 is in the second section SC2 even when the section display unit 67 is off, and the player is expected to be in the second section SC2 even when the section display unit 67 is in the off state. It becomes possible.

In the B mode of the second section SC2, even if the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends without shifting to the ART state ST6 or the ART state ST6 ends, the second section SC2 is continued thereafter. Then, when the second section SC2 is continued in this way, the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state. As a result, it is possible to make the player playing the game in the slot machine 10 recognize that the second section SC2 continues even after the end of the advantageous gaming state.

In the first unit execution time ST12 of the ART state ST6, not only the initial number of games but also the number of additional games can be given. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect that a large number of games will be given as the number of continuous games of the first unit execution time ST12. In this case, in the ART state ST6, the number of additional games can be given in the first unit execution times ST12 a plurality of times, and the total number of additional games in one ART state ST6 is the maximum number of games (specifically). Is limited to 170 games) or less. As a result, it is possible to generate a large number of first unit execution times ST12 to which the number of additional games is given, and it is possible to prevent the number of additional games from being given excessively.

When the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the ART state ST6 is terminated even if the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state ST6 is not 0 games. This makes it possible to prevent the ART state ST6 from continuing excessively. In this case, the total number of additional games in one ART state ST6 is limited to the maximum number of games or less. As a result, in a situation where the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is limited, it is possible to prevent the granting of the number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 from being biased to the granting of the number of additional games.

The number of additional games given in one execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 is smaller than the maximum number of additional games. As a result, it is possible to prevent the total number of additional games to be granted from reaching the maximum number of games by granting the number of additional games once. Therefore, it is possible to make it possible that the execution times of the first unit execution time ST12, in which the number of additional games is given, can occur a plurality of times.

By winning in the continuous lottery process (step S3017) executed when the number of continuous games remaining in the first unit execution time ST12 becomes 0, a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is achieved. Is started. In this case, in the configuration in which the maximum number of games is set for the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 by setting the limit on the maximum number of games for the total number of additional games as described above. It is possible to easily generate a situation in which the execution times of the first unit execution time ST12 are repeated.

When the execution times of the first unit execution time ST12 are executed 12 times, the next execution time becomes the second unit execution time ST13. Then, in the continuous lottery process (step S3017) executed when the number of continuous games remaining in the second unit execution time ST13 becomes 0, the continuation rate is 90%. This continuation rate has a higher probability than 80%, which is the highest continuation rate in the continuous lottery process (step S3017) executed in the case of the first unit execution time ST12. As a result, it is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player with the repeated execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. In this case, in the configuration in which the maximum number of games is set for the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 by setting the limit on the maximum number of games for the total number of additional games as described above. It is possible to easily generate a situation in which the execution times of the second unit execution time ST13 are repeated.

The maximum number of games in the total number of additional games is determined from the minimum value of the number of games that can be continued in the ART state ST6 to the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 being executed 13 times. The number of games is set to be smaller than the number of games obtained by subtracting the maximum number of games assumed as the total number of initial games of ST13. As a result, even if the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is set and the number of additional games can be given in the first unit execution time ST12, the number of executions of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 13 times or more. As a result, it becomes possible to create a situation in which the continuous lottery process (step S3017) is executed at a higher continuation rate than before.

In the second unit execution time ST13, the number of additional games is not given. As a result, it is possible to provide many opportunities for the continuous lottery process (step S3017) to be executed at a high continuation rate by repeating the second unit execution time ST13.

Even if one or more additional games are selected in the additional lottery process (step S3302), the remaining number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the ART state ST6 this time is the additional lottery process (step). If the number of additional games is not larger than the number of additional games selected this time in S3302), the number of additional games selected is invalidated without being added. That is, when the remaining number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the ART state ST6 this time is not set as the addition target, but the additional winning is not achieved in the additional lottery process (step S3302). Similarly, the number of additional games is 0. This not only makes it possible to reduce the number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the ART state ST6 to the maximum number of games or less, but also makes it possible to reduce the number of additional games that can occur in the first unit execution time ST12 in the rear execution time. Even so, it is possible to increase the possibility that the number of additional games will be given.

Even in a situation where it has not been decided to start a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12, the number of additional games to be given to the initial number of games of the new execution time is determined, and actually a new one is determined. When the execution times are started, the determined number of additional games is given to the initial number of games of the new execution times. As a result, it is possible to determine in advance the number of additional games to be given when a new execution time is started, and when a new execution time is started, the new execution time is concerned. It is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the number of additional games before the start of.

Since the number of additional games to be given if the next execution time is tentatively started before the final game of the currently executed execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 is started, the current execution time is executed. In the final game of the execution times, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the number of additional games given to the execution times that can be executed next to the execution times.

In the currently executed execution times in the first unit execution time ST12, the number of additional games to be given to the execution times that can be executed next to the execution times is determined. As a result, since the number of additional games is determined only for the number of executions that can be executed next, it is not necessary to cumulatively store the number of additional games.

When the final game of the currently executed execution times in the first unit execution time ST12 is started, it is determined whether or not to start a new execution time after the execution time is completed. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period from the decision to start a new execution time to the start of a new execution time.

When a new execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 is started, in the configuration in which the continuous production is executed in the final game of the execution time currently being executed, the production content of the continuous production is the new execution time. The content of the production corresponds to the number of additional games given to the game. As a result, the player who has confirmed the continuous production can not only grasp that a new execution time is started, but also predict or grasp the number of additional games to be given to the new execution time. Become. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the continuous production.

When the second section SC2 ends based on the end of the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, the end preparation state ST7 occurs after the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends, and the end preparation state ST7 The second section SC2 ends after the predetermined number of games has been executed. As a result, even if the second section SC2 ends due to the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, the period maintained in the second section SC2 after the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6. Can be generated.

The second section SC2 ends when one game is executed in the end preparation state ST7. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period during which the second section SC2 is maintained after the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends as much as possible.

When the second section SC2 ends when the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends, the section display unit when the second section SC2 ends when the predetermined number of games are executed in the end preparation state ST7. 67 goes from the lit state to the extinguished state. As a result, it is possible to maintain the lighting state of the section display unit 67 for a predetermined number of games even after the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 is completed.

Even if the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without the transition to the ART state ST6 being confirmed in the second section SC2 of the A mode, the game ends in the end preparation state ST7 after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. Since the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state in the end preparation state ST7, the section display is performed even at the timing after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have been stopped in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5. The unit 67 is lit. As a result, the section is displayed at the timing when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 in the situation where the effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed is not executed. Even if the unit 67 is confirmed, it cannot be specified that the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur. Therefore, in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the situation where the effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed is not executed, the revival effect is performed at the timing when the stops of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are completed. It is possible to make the player expect that it will be executed, and it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the transition to the ART state ST6 will be confirmed.

If the second section SC2 ends even in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 when the ending condition is satisfied, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends accordingly, the ending condition is concerned. In the game in which is established, the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends and the second section SC2 ends. As a result, when the ending condition is satisfied, the second section SC2 can be terminated immediately.

From "the total number of game media granted by the game executed in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (" 0 "in the situation where the game medium is not granted)" to "the second section SC2 is continued. When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media digested to execute the game in the situation where the game is being executed (“0” in the situation where the game is not being executed) is set as the predetermined difference number, the predetermined difference number is used. When the limited total net increase number of game media, which is the number of sheets increased by the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, exceeds the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400 sheets) with the minimum value of , The second section SC2 ends. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing for an excessively long time. In this case, it is determined whether or not the limited total net increase number of game media measured by the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number "2400" even in the game in which the replay prize is established. Will be done. As a result, in the game before the game in which the replay prize was established, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d has already exceeded the upper limit net increase of "2400", but the second cause is noise or the like. Even if the initialization process of the section SC2 is not executed, it is specified that the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number "2400" in the game in which the subsequent replay winning is established. This makes it possible to execute the initialization process of the second section SC2.

If any of the replay prizes is established, the processes of steps S2008 to S2012, which are the processes for updating the value of the total number of acquisition counters 74d, are not executed. In a game in which a replay prize is established, the game medium owned by the player is used when setting a bet at the start of the game, but the profit from the establishment of the replay prize is the same as the number of bets in the game in which the replay prize is established. It is possible to replay a new game based on the number of bets. That is, the number of game media owned by the player does not change in the game in which the replay prize is established. In this case, by preventing the processing of steps S2008 to S2012 from being executed in the game in which the replay winning is established, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d in the game in which the number of game media owned by the player does not change. It is possible to omit the execution of the process for changing the value, and it is possible to omit the unnecessary execution of the process.

The second section SC2 also ends when the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games). As a result, even if it is determined that the limited total net increase number of game media has reached the upper limit net increase number in the game in which the replay prize is established and the second section SC2 is terminated, the second section SC2 is terminated. It becomes possible to make the player recognize that the end of the second section SC2 is caused by the number of continuous games of the second section SC2 reaching the upper limit number of games, and the second section SC2 ends in the game in which the replay prize is established. Even if it does, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

When the start game of the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is started, the second random number is acquired from the second random number circuit 76 every time the first waiting period and the second waiting period elapse, and the addition lottery is performed. The process (step S3213) is executed. As a result, the addition lottery process (step S3213) can be repeatedly executed while using the second random number circuit 76.

From the acquisition of the second random number once to the acquisition of the second random number, not only the first waiting period is secured as a fixed period, but also the second waiting period is secured as a variable period. NS. The first standby period is set as a period equal to or longer than the period required for the update of the second random number to make one round in the second random number circuit 76. Specifically, the update of the second random number is performed in the second random number circuit 76. It is set to 1.49 milliseconds, which is a longer period than the period required to make one lap. As a result, the random number in the second random number circuit 76 is updated at least once between the time when the second random number is acquired once and the time when the second random number is acquired next, so that the second random number can be updated in a short period of time. Even when the acquisition is repeated, it is possible to acquire any numerical value of the second random number in the numerical range of "0 to 255" as the second random number at each acquisition timing. Further, since the second standby period is secured as the period of fluctuation, it is possible to prevent the acquisition timing of the second random number from being biased within the range of one round of the second random number in the second random number circuit 76. It will be possible.

The second waiting period is changed by using the second random number acquired last time. This makes it possible to change the second waiting period while suppressing the complexity of the configuration.

The variation value is set based on the second random number acquired last time, and "15" is set as the number of repetitions. Then, the magnitude relationship between the variation value and the number of repetitions is determined, and the processing time of the determination process varies depending on whether a positive determination is made or a negative determination is made in the determination. Further, when the magnitude relationship is determined, the value of the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1, and when the number of repetitions is not "0", the magnitude relationship between the number of repetitions after the 1 subtraction and the above variation value is determined again. NS. On the other hand, when the number of repetitions becomes "0", the second random number is acquired from the second random number circuit 76 and the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed. As a result, it is possible to change the second waiting period by using the variation value corresponding to the second random number acquired last time and the number of times the magnitude relationship is determined.

The maximum value of the variation value and the initial value of the number of repetitions match. As a result, it is possible to make the second waiting period different if the variation value is different.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the combination of symbols that establishes the first CB prize is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 71 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination of symbols for which the first CB prize is established and a combination of symbols for which the second CB prize is established in the present embodiment.

As for the combination of the symbols that win the second CB, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is "white 7" on the main line ML, as in the first embodiment. It is a combination in which the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol. In the left reel 32L, five or more symbols pass through the main line ML after the "white 7" symbol passes over the main line ML and then before the "white 7" symbol passes over the main line ML. Further, in the middle reel 32M, five or more symbols pass through the main line ML after the "white 7" symbol passes over the main line ML and then before the "white 7" symbol passes over the main line ML. Become. Further, in the right reel 32R, five or more symbols pass through the main line ML after the "BAR" symbol passes over the main line ML and then before the "BAR" symbol passes over the main line ML. Therefore, depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second CB prize may not be established even in the situation where the second CB combination is won.

On the other hand, the combination of the symbols that win the first CB prize is different from the first embodiment, and the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML. This is a combination in which the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol. In the left reel 32L, the number of symbols passing through the main line ML from the time when the "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML to the time when the "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML is 4 or less. .. Further, in the middle reel 32M, the number of symbols passing through the main line ML from the time when the "replay" symbol passes over the main line ML to the time when the "replay" symbol passes over the main line ML is 4 or less. Is. Further, in the right reel 32R, the number of symbols passing through the main line ML from the time when the "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML to the time when the "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML is 4 or less. Is. Therefore, when the first CB combination is won, the first CB prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

FIG. 71B is a time chart showing the flow of the game when the first CB combination or the second CB combination is won. FIG. 71 (b1) shows the period during which the game with the number of bets "3" is executed, and FIG. 71 (b2) shows the period during which the game with the number of bets "2" is executed. ) Indicates the period during which the first CB combination is in the winning state, FIG. 71 (b4) indicates the period during which the second CB combination is in the winning state, and FIG. 71 (b5) indicates the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state. The period of ST3 is shown.

First, a case where the first CB combination is won will be described.

As shown in FIG. 71 (b1), at the timing of t1, which is a situation in which neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won after the all clear processing (step S105) is executed on the main MPU 72. The game in which the number of bets is "3" is started. In this case, at the timing of t1, the first CB combination is won as shown in FIG. 71 (b3). After that, at the timing of t2, this game ends as shown in FIG. 71 (b1). In this case, the combination of symbols that won the first CB combination and establishes the first CB prize in this game is a combination of symbols that does not cause so-called omission. Therefore, when the first CB winning is established at the timing of t2, the winning state of the first CB combination is released as shown in FIG. 71 (b3), and the first CB state ST2 is started as shown in FIG. 71 (b5). Will be done.

Next, a case where the second CB combination is won will be described.

As shown in FIG. 71 (b2), at the timing of t3, which is a situation in which neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won after the all clear processing (step S105) is executed on the main MPU 72. The game in which the number of bets is "2" is started. In this case, at the timing of t3, the second CB combination is won as shown in FIG. 71 (b4). After that, the game ends, but the combination of symbols that establishes the second CB prize is a combination of symbols that may cause so-called omission, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at the stop operation timing that does not establish the second CB prize. As a result, the second CB prize is not established. After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (b2), a game in which the number of bets is "2" is started at the timing of t4, but the stop buttons 42 to 44 are also pressed at the stop operation timing at which the second CB winning is not established in the game. The second CB prize is not established by being operated.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (b1), the game in which the number of bets is "3" is started at the timing of t5 and the timing of t6, which are the situations where the second CB combination is won. However, in a game in which the number of bets is "3" even in the winning state of the second CB combination, the second CB prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. do not. After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (b2), a game in which the number of bets is "2" is started at the timing of t7, but the stop buttons 42 to 44 are also pressed at the stop operation timing at which the second CB winning is not established in the game. The second CB prize is not established by being operated.

According to the above configuration, the game is performed by a normal game method in which the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed first, the second CB combination is won, and then the game in which the number of bets is "3" is started. Instead, if the game is played by an unusual game method of executing a game in which the number of bets is "3" in a situation where the second CB role is not won, the first CB role is won. The first CB prize is surely established in the game, and the player shifts to the first CB state ST2, which is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, even if an illegal profit is obtained by playing a game in which the number of bets is "3" after illegally executing the all clearing process (step S105), the transition to the first CB state ST2 occurs. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the fraudster to obtain fraudulent profits.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the non-internal notification image G12 displayed on the image display device 63 in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, and the image display device 63 in the situation where the first CB combination has been won. The processing configuration for displaying the first internal explicit image G13 displayed in is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the switching control process of the internal notification executed by the effect side MPU 92. The internal notification switching control process is repeatedly executed by the effector MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, a 4 millisecond cycle).

First, it is determined whether or not the internal notification permission operation has occurred (step S3601). In the present embodiment, the effect control device 90 mounted on the back surface of the front door 12 is provided with a notification permission switch, and the front door 12 is unlocked with respect to the housing 11 so that the front door 12 is placed in front of the slot machine 10. The notification permission switch can be operated by opening the door. Then, when the notification permission switch is operated to the ON position, an affirmative determination is made in step S3601. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3601, "1" is set in the internal notification permission flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3602). When "1" is set in the permission flag for internal notification, the non-internal notification image G12 and the first internal explicit image G13 can be displayed on the image display device 63.

In the internal notification switching control process, it is determined whether or not the internal notification prohibition operation has occurred (step S3603). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the notification permission switch provided in the effect control device 90 is operated at the OFF position. Then, when the notification permission switch is operated to the OFF position, an affirmative determination is made in step S3603. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3603, the permission flag for internal notification of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3604). When the value of the permission flag for internal notification is "0", the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63 even in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. The first internal explicit image G13 is not displayed on the image display device 63 even in the winning state of the first CB combination.

According to the above configuration, the non-internal notification image G12 or the first internal explicit image G13 can be displayed on the image display device 63 according to the winning state of each CB combination, and the non-internal regardless of the winning state of each CB combination. The manager of the game hall can switch between the situation where the broadcast image G12 and the first internal explicit image G13 are not displayed on the image display device 63. As a result, the manager of the game hall can grasp the winning state of each CB role by displaying the non-internal notification image G12 or the first internal explicit image G13, and at the same time, the cheating person and the player can take each CB role. It is possible to prevent the non-internal notification image G12 and the first internal explicit image G13 from being displayed regardless of the winning state.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when the state is changed to the end preparation state ST7, the game state is changed to the normal game state ST1 after the end preparation state ST7 is completed, regardless of the game content in the game executed in the end preparation state ST7. However, in the present embodiment, in the end preparation state ST7 that has shifted from the ART state ST6, the ART state ST6 may be revived according to the game content in the game executed in the end preparation state ST7. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the end preparation state process executed by the main MPU 72. The end preparation state process is executed in the end preparation state ST7 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 26).

When any of the index values IV = 5 to 10 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game (step S3701: YES), the ART revival lottery process is executed (step S3702). In the ART revival lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to revive from the end preparation state ST7 to the ART state ST6. In this case, the person who wins the index value IV, which has a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game, has a higher probability of winning the ART revival in the ART revival lottery process.

When the result of the ART revival lottery process is the ART revival winning (step S3703: YES), the continuation setting process of the ART state ST6 is executed (step S3704). In the continuation setting process, if the game state before shifting to the end preparation state ST7 is the first unit execution time ST12 of the ART state ST6, a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is generated. If the game state before shifting to the end preparation state ST7 is the second unit execution time ST13 of the ART state ST6, a new execution time of the second unit execution time ST13 is generated. Executes the processing of. The configuration is not limited to this, and may be configured to shift to the start period ST11 when returning to the ART state ST6 regardless of the gaming state before shifting to the end preparation state ST7.

After that, the ART revival command is transmitted to the directing MPU 92 (step S3705). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 uses the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the effect corresponding to the game state of the transition destination is executed after the effect indicating that the effect is restored to the ART state ST6 is executed. Control.

According to the above configuration, even if the ART state ST6 ends and shifts to the end preparation state ST7 without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, it is based on the game content of the game executed in the end preparation state ST7. It may be restored to the ART state ST6. As a result, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation even in the end preparation state ST7.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution content of the loop lottery process is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. In the timer interrupt process, the loop lottery process is executed in step S3806. That is, in the present embodiment, the loop lottery process is executed by the timer interrupt process that is started periodically (specifically, the cycle of 1.49 milliseconds). The processing contents of steps S3801 to S3805 and steps S3807 to S3815 are the same as the processing contents of steps S201 to S214 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a loop lottery process executed in step S3806 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the completion flag of the loop lottery provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3901). Similar to the first embodiment, the loop lottery process is a process for determining the initial number of games at the start of a game in which new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in the ART state ST6 are started. In the first embodiment, the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is set to 29 games to 32 games, and the number of times the additional lottery process (step S3213) is executed in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is It was a maximum of 3 times. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is set to 29 games to 1029 games, a new execution time of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is started as an opportunity. The number of times of the additional lottery process (step S3911) executed is 1000 times at the maximum. The loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is executed once each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is started, and the additional lottery process (step S3911) is performed with respect to the execution of one loop lottery process (FIG. 75). Is executed once.

The completion flag of the loop lottery specifies whether or not the execution of the additional lottery process (step S3911) triggered by the start of new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is completed by the main MPU 72. It is a flag to do. At the timing when the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started, the value of the completion flag of the loop lottery is "0", and the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started. When the execution of the addition lottery process (step S3911) triggered by the above is completed, that is, when the addition lottery process (step S3911) does not result in the addition winning, or the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) ends. When the reference number is reached, "1" is set in the completion flag of the loop lottery. When "1" is set in the loop lottery completion flag (step S3901: YES), the additional lottery process (step S3911) does not need to be executed, so the loop lottery process ends as it is.

When "1" is not set in the loop lottery completion flag (step S3901: NO), it is determined whether or not this time is the start game of the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 (step S3902). .. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3902, a second waiting period is generated in steps S3903 to S3908 before the process of acquiring the second random number used when executing the additional lottery process (step S3910) (step S3909). Execute the process to make it.

In the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) in the first embodiment, when the second random number is repeatedly acquired, it is forcibly obtained from the acquisition of the second random number once to the next acquisition of the second random number. A first waiting period and a second waiting period were set as the waiting period. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is executed once each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is started, and the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is executed once. On the other hand, the additional lottery process (step S3911) is executed once. Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is started in a cycle of 1.49 milliseconds, at least the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is performed between the acquisition of the second random number once and the acquisition of the second random number. A waiting period for the startup cycle occurs. This period corresponds to the first waiting period in the first embodiment. That is, since the first waiting period is secured by the activation cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74), it is not necessary to execute the process for securing the first waiting period in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75). The activation cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74), 1.49 milliseconds, is a period longer than the period required for the update of the second random number in the second random number circuit 76 to make one round.

The process for generating the second waiting period in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) (step S3903 to step S3908) is for generating the second waiting period of the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) in the first embodiment. It is the same as the process of (step S3205-step S3210). Specifically, "15", which is the number of repetitions, is set in the repetition counter 74g (see FIG. 9) of the main RAM 74 (step S3903). In the loop lottery process (FIG. 75), the acquisition of the second random number from the second random number circuit 76 can be repeated as described above. Then, when the second random number is repeatedly acquired, the first waiting period (timer interrupt processing (Timer interrupt processing (FIG. 74)) is set as a fixed period from the acquisition of the second random number once to the acquisition of the second random number. ) Is not only secured, but also a second waiting period is secured as a period of fluctuation. Even if the maximum value of the second waiting period is reached, it is less than or equal to the first waiting period, and more specifically, it is shorter than the first waiting period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second waiting period may be the same as the first waiting period, or the second waiting period may be longer than the first waiting period. The waiting period may be configured to always be a period equal to or longer than the first waiting period.

After that, the second random number acquired in the previous step S3910 is read from the second random number acquisition area of the main RAM 74 (step S3904). After the partial clearing process (step S104) or the entire clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, a second random number having a decimal value of "0" is generated in the second random number acquisition area. It will be stored. After that, the lower 4 bits of the 8-bit second random number read in step S3904 are stored in the register of the main MPU 72 as a variation value (step S3905). In this case, since the variation value is 4-bit numerical information, the minimum value is "0" and the maximum value is "15".

After that, it is determined whether or not the variation value stored in the register of the main MPU 72 is smaller than the value of the repetition counter 74g of the main RAM 74 (step S3906). When the variation value is smaller than the value of the repetition counter 74g (step S3906: YES), the process proceeds to step S3907 by the JUMP instruction, and when the variation value is equal to or more than the value of the repetition counter 74g (step S3906). : NO), the process proceeds to step S3907 by the NOP instruction. In step S3907, the value of the repetition counter 74g is subtracted by 1. Then, if the value of the repetition counter 74g after 1 subtraction is 1 or more (step S3908: NO), the process returns to step S3906, and if the value of the repetition counter 74g after 1 subtraction is "0" ( Step S3908: YES), the process proceeds to step S3909.

As described above, the process proceeds to step S3907 regardless of whether the affirmative judgment is made in step S3906 or the negative judgment is made in step S3906, but the JUMP instruction is more than the case where the NOP instruction is executed. Is executed, the processing time required to proceed to the processing of step S3907 is longer by about 10 microseconds. Then, as described above, the JUMP instruction is executed and the NOP instruction is executed depending on whether or not the variation value determined as the lower 4 bits of the second random number acquired last time is smaller than the value of the repetition counter 74g. There are cases where it is executed. Further, each time the process of step S3907 is executed, the value of the repetition counter 74g is subtracted by 1, and the processes of steps S3906 and S3907 are repeated until the value of the repetition counter 74g after 1 subtraction becomes "0". .. As a result, the value of the lower 4 bits of the second random number obtained last time is the ratio of the number of times the JUMP instruction is executed in step S3906 to the number of times the NOP instruction is executed in step S3906 out of the 15 repetition times. As a result, the second waiting period can be changed.

In step S3909, the value of the lottery execution counter provided in the main RAM 74 is added by 1. The lottery execution counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the additional lottery process (step S3911) has been executed in the current start game in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

After that, the second random number at that time is acquired from the second random number circuit 76 and stored in the second random number acquisition area of the main RAM 74 (step S3910). After that, the addition lottery process is executed (step S3911). In the addition lottery process, the addition lottery table stored in advance in the main ROM 73 is read out, and the second random number is collated with the read-out addition lottery table, so that the second random number is set in the addition lottery table. Judge whether or not it matches the numerical information. Only one additional lottery table is provided, and the above-mentioned winning numerical information is set so that the probability of winning the additional winning in the additional lottery process is 60%. Here, the result of the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game does not affect the addition lottery process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the addition lottery table is used for the combination lottery process (FIG. 16). ) May be set according to the type of index value IV that can be won, so that the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in this game affects the additional lottery process.

If no additional winning is achieved in the additional lottery process (step S3911) (step S3912: NO), after setting "1" in the loop lottery completion flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3915), the main loop lottery process is performed. finish. As a result, the loop lottery process for the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is completed. The completion flag of the loop lottery is cleared to "0" when the final game of the execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, which is the target of starting this time, ends.

When the addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3911) (step S3912: YES), the value of the initial addition counter of the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S3913). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the lottery execution counter of the main RAM 74 is the end reference number "1000" (step S3914). As described above, since the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in the present embodiment is 29 games to 1029 games, the maximum number of games that can be added as the initial number of games in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is 1000. In addition to being a game, the maximum number of times the additional lottery process (step S3911) is executed is 1000 times. When the value of the lottery execution counter is "1000" (step S3914: YES), the number of additional lottery processes (step S3911) executed in the current start game in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is Since it means that the maximum value of 1000 times has been reached, the loop lottery process is terminated after the loop lottery completion flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3915).

When the value of the lottery execution counter has not reached "1000" (step S3914: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the lottery execution counter has reached the intermediate start reference number "500" (step S3916). .. When the value of the lottery execution counter reaches the intermediate start reference number "500" (step S3916: YES), "1" is set in the loop lottery continuation flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3917). ..

In the present embodiment, as described above, the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is executed once each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is started, and the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is executed once. The additional lottery process (step S3911) is executed once. Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is started in a cycle of 1.49 milliseconds, at least the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is performed between the acquisition of the second random number once and the acquisition of the second random number. A waiting period for the startup cycle occurs. Then, it takes at least 1.49 seconds for the number of executions of the additional lottery process (step S3911) to reach the end reference number of 1000 times. In this case, in the start game in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated until the number of executions of the additional lottery process (step S3911) reaches 1000 times, which is the end reference number. If the configuration is such that the start of the game is waited for, the time required for the start game to end will be longer.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the number of executions of the additional lottery process (step S3911) reaches 500 times, which is the intermediate start reference number, "1" is set in the continuation flag of the loop lottery of the main RAM 74. By making it possible to proceed to the process of starting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the additional lottery process (step S3911) in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is not completed. However, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. This makes it possible to prevent the time waiting for the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R from becoming excessively long.

Even after starting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as described above, the result of the addition lottery process (step S3911) is out of order, or the value of the lottery execution counter is the end reference number "1000". The timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is activated and the additional lottery process (step S3911) is executed every time the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is executed. Then, after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started, the number of games given by the addition winning in the addition lottery process (step S3911) is included, and the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are included. The initial number of games is set. As a result, it is possible to give a large number of games as the initial number of games while preventing the time waiting for the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R from becoming excessively long.

The difference between the intermediate start reference number "500" and the end reference number "1000" is "500". The maximum time assumed as the time required for the additional lottery process (step S3911) to be executed 500 times is about 1.8 seconds in consideration of the start cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) and the second standby period. It becomes. On the other hand, the shortest time assumed as the time required from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to the completion of stopping of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is 2 seconds. Therefore, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be started to rotate in a situation where the additional lottery process (step S3911) in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is not completed, the unit execution times ST12 , Start of new execution times of ST13 By the end of the game, the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is surely completed.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a process for starting the current set in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. In the first embodiment, the start process of this set (FIG. 68) is executed in the start game of a new execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13. However, in the present embodiment, the process for starting the current set (FIG. 76) is executed in the start game of the new execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13 and the next game. NS.

When this time is the start game of a new execution time in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 (step S4001: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the continuation flag of the loop lottery of the main RAM 74 (step S4001: YES). Step S4002). When "1" is not set in the loop lottery continuation flag (step S4002: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the loop lottery completion flag of the main RAM 74 (step S4003). When a negative determination is made in both step S4002 and step S4003, the result of the additional lottery process (step S3911) for the current execution times is not yet out of order, and the additional lottery process (step S3911) is executed. This means that the number of times has not yet reached the starting standard number. In this case, the processes of step S4002 and step S4003 are repeated.

If the result of the additional lottery process (step S3911) for the current execution times is out of order, "1" is set in the loop lottery completion flag of the main RAM 74, so that an affirmative judgment is made in step S4003. Then, the process proceeds to step S4004. In step S4004, the minimum value of the initial number of games, "29", is set in the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74.

After that, the value of the initial addition counter of the main RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S4005). In the initial addition counter, the number of games to be added to the number of initial games selected in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) executed when the current game is started is set. After executing the process of step S4005, the value of the initial addition counter is cleared to "0".

After that, by determining whether or not the value of the completion counter of the main RAM 74 is 11 or less, it is determined whether or not the current state is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S4006). When the current state is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S4006: YES), the value of the addition counter 74h of the main RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S4007). After that, the value of the additional counter 74h is cleared to "0" (step S4008).

In the addition counter 74h, the number of addition games selected in the addition process (FIG. 67) of the next set executed in the game in which the previous execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 is started is set. Therefore, when the first unit execution time ST12 is continued and a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started, 1 is performed at the start of the first unit execution time ST12 in the newly started execution time. On condition that the above number of additional games is selected, the selected number of additional games of 1 or more is added to the initial number of games of the newly started first unit execution time ST12.

When a negative determination is made in step S4006, or when the process of step S4008 is executed, the start commands of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4008). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the start of the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. In this case, the number of continuous games (that is, the value set in the ART continuation counter) in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is displayed on the image display device 63. In this display, after the initial number of games is first notified, if there is an additional game number, the additional game number is notified.

On the other hand, when the number of executions of the additional lottery process (step S3911) reaches 500 times, which is the intermediate start reference number, "1" is set in the loop lottery continuation flag of the main RAM 74, so that step S4002 is performed. The affirmative determination is made and the process proceeds to step S4010. In step S4010, the minimum value of the initial number of games, "29", is set in the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74.

After that, by determining whether or not the value of the completion counter of the main RAM 74 is 11 or less, it is determined whether or not the current state is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S4011). When the current state is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S4011: YES), the value of the addition counter 74h of the main RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S4012). After that, the value of the additional counter 74h is cleared to "0" (step S4013).

When a negative determination is made in step S4011, or when the process of step S4013 is executed, the start commands of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4014). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the start of the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. In this case, the temporary number of continuous games (that is, the value set in the ART continuation counter) in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is displayed on the image display device 63.

As described above, when the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) reaches 500 times, which is the intermediate start reference number, even if the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the current execution time is not completed. When the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, the value of the initial addition counter is not added to the initial number of games. The addition of the value of the initial addition counter is executed in the next game with respect to the start game in the current execution time.

Specifically, in the case of the second game in this execution time (step S4015: YES), on condition that "1" is set in the continuation flag of the loop lottery of the main RAM 74 (step S4016: YES). ), The value of the initial addition counter of the main RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S4017). In the initial addition counter, the number of games to be added to the number of initial games selected in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) executed in the start game in the current execution time is set. After executing the process of step S4017, the value of the initial addition counter is cleared to "0".

After that, an addition command in which information on the number of games to be added to the initial number of games is set is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S4018). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the effect indicating that the number of continuous games of the current execution times is increased by the above-mentioned addition amount. Then, the number of continuous games after the increase is displayed on the image display device 63.

As described above, when the number of executions of the additional lottery process (step S3911) reaches 500 times, which is the intermediate start reference number, even if the additional lottery process (step S3911) in the current execution time is not completed. When the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the start game of the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is started, the above addition lottery process (step S3911) is performed in the next game for the start game. It is notified that the number of games added due to the execution of) is given as the number of continuous games of the current execution times. As a result, it is possible to diversify the situation in which the number of continuous games is notified in the situation where the number of games to be added is given, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In particular, when the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) reaches 500 times, which is the intermediate start reference number, the number of games for the above addition is given to the start game of the new execution time in the next game. It is notified that it will be done. As a result, when the number of games for the above addition is given to the start game of the new execution times in the next game, the grant of a large number of games of 500 games or more is notified, and the new execution is performed. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the notification that the number of games to be added is given in the next game is executed for the starting game of the times.

In the above embodiment, when the number of executions of the additional lottery process reaches the intermediate start reference number in a situation where the periodic execution of the additional lottery process (step S3911) in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is not completed. Is configured to notify the start game of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 that the initial number of games is 29, and then notify the number of games to be added to the initial number of games in the next game. Not limited to this, when the number of executions of the addition lottery process reaches the intermediate start reference number, the initial number of games including the number of games added at that time is notified in the start game, and the next The configuration may be such that the number of games for the remaining addition is notified in the game.

Further, the termination reference number is not limited to "1000" and may be a value smaller than "1000" or a value larger than "1000". When the value is larger than "1000", the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are newly executed times in a situation where the periodic execution of the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is not completed. The starting game may end. In this case, a plurality of games may be executed in a situation where the periodic execution of the addition lottery process in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is not completed. In this configuration, the notification of the increase in the number of initial games due to the additional lottery process may be performed in the game started after the periodic execution of the additional lottery process is completed as in the above embodiment. .. Further, at the start of each game started in a situation where the periodic execution of the addition lottery process is not completed, the increase in the number of initial games determined in the game immediately before the game is notified. good.

Further, in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75), the processes of steps S3903 to S3908 may not be executed. In this case, the measurement of the second waiting period is not performed. Therefore, the addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed in the interrupt cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74).

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configurations of other embodiments may be applied individually to the configurations of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied in combination. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, or the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. good.

(1) The first predetermined number is "3" and the second predetermined number is "2", but the specific values of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number are arbitrary. Further, the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the first predetermined number is a number larger than the second predetermined number, and the first predetermined number may be a number smaller than the second predetermined number.

(2) The first CB state ST2 is configured to be a gaming state in which the gaming medium owned by the player is reduced, but it may be configured to be a gaming state in which the gaming medium owned by the player is not increased or decreased, and is owned by the player. It is possible to increase the number of game media to be played, but the game state may be such that the number of cards to be increased is very small, such as one or two cards.

Further, in the game executed in the first CB state ST2, the number of game media given in the game is larger than the number of bets set for starting the game (specifically, "3"). Although it may be a number, the winning probability of the winning combination that enables the granting of the game medium is low, so that the game medium owned by the player is not increased or decreased as a whole in the first CB state ST2, or the game medium owned by the player is used. It may be configured to be reduced.

(3) The second CB state ST3 is configured to be a gaming state in which the gaming medium owned by the player is reduced, but may be configured to be a gaming state in which the gaming medium owned by the player is not increased or decreased, and is owned by the player. It is possible to increase the number of game media to be played, but the number of games to be increased may be very small, such as one or two, and the number of game media owned by the player can be increased to some extent. It may be configured to be.

Further, in the game executed in the second CB state ST3, the number of game media given in the game is larger than the number of bets set for starting the game (specifically, "2"). Although it may be a number, the winning probability of the winning combination that enables the granting of the game medium is low, so that the game medium owned by the player is not increased or decreased as a whole in the second CB state ST3, or the game medium owned by the player is used. It may be configured to be reduced.

(4) If the CB state ST2 and ST3 are reached in the middle of the ART state ST6, the ART state ST6 is temporarily interrupted, and the number of games executed in the CB state ST2 and ST3 is calculated from the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6. Although the configuration is not subtracted, the configuration is not limited to this, and when the CB state ST2 and ST3 are reached in the middle of the ART state ST6, the number of games executed in the CB state ST2 and ST3 is the ART state ST6. It may be configured to be subtracted from the remaining number of continuous games. This makes it possible to increase the disadvantage of shifting to the CB states ST2 and ST3 in the middle of the ART state ST6. Further, the configuration may be applied to the case where the CB states ST2 and ST3 are reached in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST5.

(5) In the third embodiment, when the front door 12 is opened, "1" is set in the permission flag for internal notification in the effect side RAM 94, and when the front door 12 is closed, the effect side RAM 94 The permission flag of the internal notification in the above may be cleared to "0". In this case, the non-internal notification image G12 and the first internal explicit image G13 can be displayed in the image display device 63 simply by opening the front door 12.

(6) When the predetermined effect button provided on the front surface of the front door 12 is continuously pressed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) in the third embodiment, the internal notification in the effect side RAM 94 is transmitted. The permission flag may be set to "1", and the permission flag for internal notification in the effect side RAM 94 may be cleared to "0" by operating an operation unit other than the predetermined effect button. In this case, the non-internal notification image G12 and the first internal explicit image G13 are displayed in the image display device 63 simply by continuously pressing the predetermined effect button without requiring the opening operation of the front door 12. It is possible to switch between the states in which the images G12 and G13 are not displayed.

(7) In a situation where the set value update process (step S106) is being executed, the notification regarding the winning state of at least one of the first CB combination and the second CB combination may be executed. For example, if the set value update process (step S106) is executed in a situation where the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74, the image display device 63 notifies that the second CB winning combination has not been won. It may be a configuration to be executed. By configuring the notification to end when the set value update process (step S106) is completed, the period during which the notification is executed is limited to the period during which the set value update process (step S106) is executed. It becomes possible to do. Further, for example, when the set value update process (step S106) is executed in the situation where the first CB combination winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, it indicates that the image display device 63 has won the first CB combination. The notification may be executed. By configuring the notification to end when the set value update process (step S106) is completed, the period during which the notification is executed is limited to the period during which the set value update process (step S106) is executed. It becomes possible to do.

(8) In a situation where the second CB combination has not been won, the procedure for setting the second CB combination to the winning state may be displayed on the image display device 63. In this case, if neither the 1st CB combination nor the 2nd CB combination is won, the 2nd CB combination is won by executing the game in which the number of bets is "2", and the 2nd CB is won in the winning game. It is notified that the game in which the number of bets is "3" should be executed after that without winning the prize. In addition, when the first CB combination is won, the first CB prize is established by executing the game in which the number of bets is "3", the first CB state ST2 is transferred, and the first CB state ST2 is digested. You will be informed of what to do. Then, when the first CB state ST2 is exhausted, the second CB combination is won by executing the game in which the number of bets is "2", and the second CB prize is not established in the winning game. After that, it is notified that the game in which the number of bets is "3" should be executed. This makes it possible to encourage the player to win the second CB role. In addition, by applying the configuration to the configuration of the third embodiment or the configurations (5) to (7) above, the management of the game hall is to encourage the target to be in the situation of winning the second CB combination. It is possible to limit to the person.

(9) In a situation where the 2nd CB combination has not been won, if the 2nd CB combination is won and the 2nd CB winning is not established, a notification indicating that the 2nd CB combination has been won is executed. May be. As the notification, for example, a notification sound such as "Complete" may be output from the speaker 62.

(10) When a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the situation where the second CB combination is won, the corresponding notification may be executed by the image display device 63. For example, the display image of the image display device 63 may be displayed darker than before as the notification. Further, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the situation where the first CB combination is won, the corresponding notification may be executed by the image display device 63. For example, the display image of the image display device 63 may be displayed darker than before as the notification.

(11) If the number of bets becomes "2" in the situation where the second CB combination is won, the operation of the start lever 41 may be invalidated after that. The invalid period is arbitrary, but may be, for example, 10 seconds. In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed even though the second CB combination has already been won. Further, the notification indicating that the second CB combination has already been won in this invalid period may be executed by the speaker 62 or the image display device 63, and the start lever 41 is operated during the invalid period. It may be configured to be executed with the fact as an opportunity.

(12) When the game is started in the first section SC1, it is decided to shift to the second section SC2 at the start of the game, and the shift to the second section SC2 occurs at the start of the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be determined that the transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the start of the game, while the transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the end of the game. Further, it may be configured that the transition to the second section SC2 is determined at the end of the game and the transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the end of the game. In this case, it is possible to increase the number of games digested in the first section SC1.

(13) If any of the winning combinations is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the game executed in the first section SC1, the transition to the second section SC2 is surely generated. It is not limited to this, and if a winning combination having a difference in winning probability depending on the set values of "1" to "6" is won, the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur and "1" to "1" to When a winning combination with no difference in winning probability depending on the set value of "6" is won, the transition to the second section SC2 may occur. This makes it possible to prevent the frequency of transition to the second section SC2 from having advantages or disadvantages due to the set value. In addition, when a winning combination with no difference in winning probability depending on the set values of "1" to "6" is won, the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur and the set values of "1" to "6" are used. When a winning combination with a difference in winning probability is won, the transition to the second section SC2 may occur. As a result, it becomes possible to easily cause an advantage or a disadvantage depending on the set value in the transition frequency to the second section SC2.

(14) When the game is executed in the first section SC1, the transition to the second section SC2 may occur regardless of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). This makes it possible to generate the transition to the second section SC2 at an early stage.

(15) When the game is executed in the first section SC1, the transition lottery process to the second section SC2 is executed, and the transition is won in the transition lottery process, so that the transition to the second section SC2 occurs. It may be configured. This makes it possible to adjust the ease of transition to the second section SC2 according to the probability of winning the transition. Further, the probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process may or may not change depending on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination. In the case of a configuration that fluctuates according to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the case where the index value IV with a low winning probability is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) shifts to the second section SC2. By increasing the probability of winning, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning the index value IV, which has a low probability of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). Further, if none of the index values IV is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), the transition lottery process may not be executed.

(16) When the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the transition to the second section SC2 may occur, while when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the second section is executed. The configuration is such that the transition to the section SC2 does not occur, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the transition to the second section SC2 occurs even when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed. It may be the configuration to obtain. In this case, the probability of transition to the second section SC2 is the same or substantially the same depending on whether the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed and the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed. It may be configured to be. Further, when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the probability of transition to the second section SC2 is higher than in the case where the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed. It may be configured. Further, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the probability of transition to the second section SC2 is higher than in the case where the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed. It may be configured.

(17) When a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, a transition to an advantageous gaming state (preparation state ST4, pseudo bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6) may occur, while the number of bets is "2". When the game of "" is executed, the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur, but the configuration is not limited to this, and it is the case where the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed. However, the configuration may be such that a transition to an advantageous gaming state can occur. In this case, the probability of transition to the advantageous gaming state is the same or substantially the same depending on whether the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed and the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed. It may have a certain configuration. Further, when the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed, the probability of transition to the advantageous gaming state is higher than in the case where the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed. May be. Further, when the game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the probability of transition to the advantageous gaming state is higher than in the case where the game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed. May be.

(18) The setting confirmation process may be executed based on the setting confirmation operation performed by the game hall administrator, so that the currently set setting value can be confirmed. .. For example, in a situation where operating power is being supplied to the main MPU 72, the setting confirmation process is executed and the setting confirmation process is executed by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and operating the ON operation. The setting value currently set in the above may be displayed on the combined display unit 66. In the configuration, when the setting confirmation process is executed, a partial clear process (step S104) may be executed. When the partial clearing process is executed, the first CB winning data is deleted, but the information of the second CB winning data and the set value is not deleted. As a result, it is possible to confirm the currently set value while preventing the second CB winning data from being deleted.

(19) In the partial clearing process (step S104), the information is not limited to the second CB winning data to be excluded from the deletion target, and the intrusion abnormality flag of the main RAM 74 may also be excluded. .. As a result, even if the power is temporarily turned off after the intrusion abnormality notification is started and a partial clearing process (step S104) is executed when the power is turned on thereafter, the intrusion abnormality notification is restarted. Become. In this case, it is necessary to execute the all clear process (step S105) in order to prevent the intrusion abnormality notification from being restarted, and when the all clear process (step S105) is executed, the second CB is won. The data will be erased.

(20) When "1" is set in the intrusion abnormality flag of the main RAM 74, the subsequent progress of the game may be blocked. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued even though an intrusion abnormality has occurred.

(21) When the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed, a configuration in which other information is erased while leaving predetermined information may be applied to a slot machine having a plurality of RT states. For example, if a specific number of games are executed without shifting to a state that is advantageous to the player, the probability of replay winning and replay winning is higher than before, and the ceiling RT state is shifted to, and the role lottery process (Fig. When the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed in the configuration of shifting to the predetermined RT state in which the probability of winning the replay and winning the replay is higher than before when the predetermined combination is won in 16). The flag indicating that the ceiling is in the RT state may not be cleared by "0", but the flag indicating that the predetermined RT state may be cleared by "0". In this case, by executing the set value update process (step S106), the ceiling RT state can be continued as it is even when the partial clear process (step S104) is executed. Further, even in the case of the configuration, when the all clearing process (step S105) is executed, both the flag indicating the ceiling RT state and the flag indicating the predetermined RT state are cleared to "0". It may be configured as such.

(22) The configuration may be such that the transition to the second section SC2 may occur on the condition that the second CB combination is won, and the pseudo is on the condition that the second CB combination is won. The configuration may be such that the transition to the bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 can occur. In this case, it is possible to increase the importance of winning the second CB combination.

Further, in the situation where the first CB combination is won, the transition to the second section SC2 may not occur, and in the situation where the first CB combination is won, even the second section SC2 is in a pseudo-bonus state. The configuration may be such that the transition to ST5 and the ART state ST6 does not occur. In this case, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of making the first CB winning state a winning state.

(23) As the lottery mode, the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode are set so that the probability of winning the replay is different, but the lottery mode may not be set. In this case, the AT state may exist instead of the ART state ST6 as a gaming state advantageous to the player. In this configuration, it is not necessary to shift to the preparation state ST4 before the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 occurs, so that the normal game state ST1 is directly shifted to the pseudo bonus state ST5. Further, when shifting from the normal game state ST1 to the AT state, the normal game state ST1 may be directly shifted to the AT state, and there is no need to intervene in the preparation state ST4. Since the preparation state ST4 does not exist in this configuration, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the AT state in the A mode of the second section SC2 is 761 games, and in the B mode of the second section SC2, the AT When the state occurs only once, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the AT state is 842 games, and in the C mode of the second section SC2, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the AT state is. It will be 956 games. In this case, in the AT state, the start period ST11, the first unit execution time ST12, and the second unit execution time ST13 are executed as in the ART state ST6, and the first unit execution in one AT state is executed. Since 170 games are set as the maximum number of games, which is the total number of additional games generated in the second unit execution time ST12, it is possible to leave room for the second unit execution time ST13 to occur.

(24) In the non-winning state of the 1st CB combination and the 2nd CB combination, the lottery mode becomes the non-internal medium mode, and in the winning state of the 1st CB combination or the winning state of the 2nd CB combination, the lottery mode becomes the internal medium mode. May be good. In this case, the internal medium mode is configured to have a higher probability of winning the replay combination and a higher probability of winning the replay than the non-internal medium mode. In addition, when the transition condition is satisfied based on the result of the lottery process of the winning combination in the internal medium mode, the game shifts from the non-AT state to the AT state, and the number of games digested in the AT state reaches a predetermined number or AT. The configuration is such that when a predetermined end-corresponding prize is established in the state, the state shifts to the non-AT state.

Further, in the winning state of the first CB combination or the winning state of the second CB combination, the lottery mode may be configured to be either the first internal middle RT mode or the second internal middle RT mode. In this case, the second internal middle RT mode is configured to have a higher probability of winning the replay combination and a higher probability of winning the replay than the first internal middle RT mode. Further, when the transition condition is satisfied based on the result of the lottery process of the winning combination in the first internal medium RT mode, the game shifts to the second internal medium RT mode, and the number of games consumed in the second internal medium RT mode is a predetermined game. When the number is reached, the system shifts to the first internal middle RT mode. Further, the AT state is not set in the first internal middle RT mode, while the AT state is set in the second internal middle RT mode.

(25) There are three types of stay modes, A mode, B mode, and C mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be two types of stay modes. The configuration may be more than one type.

(26) In the B mode of the stay mode, the number of the first ceiling games and the number of the second ceiling games are set, but the number of the third ceiling games may be further set. The number of fourth ceiling games may be further set. Further, regardless of the type of stay mode, the number of ceiling games after the second time may be set.

(27) In the B mode, the number of the second ceiling games is surely set when the first advantageous game state (pseudo-bonus state ST5 or ART state ST6) is completed. There is no limitation, and when the first advantageous game state ends, the set lottery process is executed and the set winning (for example, 50% probability) is set in the set lottery process, so that the number of the second ceiling games is set. It may be configured to be.

(28) Even in the second section SC2, a period in which the section display unit 67 is in the off state can occur, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of the second section SC2, it is surely made. The section display unit 67 may be lit.

(29) An advantageous display unit is provided separately from the section display unit 67, and the section display unit 67 is always lit in the case of the second section SC2 and always in the section display unit 67 in the case of the first section SC1. Is turned off, and the advantageous display unit is always lit when the game is in the advantageous game state (preparation state ST4, pseudo bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6), and the advantageous display unit is always in the advantageous game state when the game is not in the advantageous game state. It may be configured to be turned off.

(30) In the B mode, when the first advantageous gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is entered, the section display unit 67 is temporarily turned off, and when the subsequent advantageous gaming state is subsequently entered, the section display unit 67 is turned off. It may be configured to be lit again.

(31) Although the maximum number of games is set for the total number of additional games that can occur in the first unit execution time ST12, a plurality of groups are set as the number of executions of the first unit execution time ST12. , The maximum number of games may be set for each of these groups. For example, the 1st to 4th times of the 1st unit execution time ST12 are set as the 1st group, the 5th to 8th times of the 1st unit execution time ST12 are set as the 2nd group, and the 9th to 12th times of the 1st unit execution time ST12. Is the third group, and the maximum number of games in each of the first group, the second group, and the third group is set to 60 games. As a result, it is possible to easily add the number of additional games even in the execution times on the rear side of the first unit execution time ST12. Further, in the configuration, if the total number of additional games in the first group does not reach the maximum number of games, the remaining maximum number of games may be added to the maximum number of games in the second group. If the total number of additional games in the second group does not reach the maximum number of games, the remaining maximum number of games may be added to the maximum number of games in the third group.

(32) The timing at which the number of additional games to be added to the initial number of games is determined in the first unit execution time ST12 is not limited to the start time of the start game of the immediately preceding execution time, and is at the end of the start game. It may be a game after the start game of the immediately preceding execution times. However, by determining the number of additional games that can occur after the execution time at a timing earlier than the final game of the previous execution time, the next execution time in the final game of the current execution time is determined. It is possible to execute continuous production depending on the production content corresponding to the number of additional games.

Further, when a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the number of additional games that can be executed after the execution time is determined, and the first unit is not limited to the configuration. When a new execution time of the execution time ST12 is started, the initial number of execution times that can be executed after the execution time may be determined.

(33) Regardless of whether or not a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 occurs, the number of additional games to be given when the new execution time occurs is before the new execution time. In the configuration determined by the execution times of the above, in a situation where it is not determined whether or not a new execution time will occur, the effect corresponding to the number of additional games may be performed in the previous execution times. The effect may be an effect that clearly indicates the number of additional games, or an effect that suggests the number of additional games. In this case, it is possible to clearly or suggest the number of additional games to be given when a new execution time is tentatively generated in the execution time currently being executed. Further, the timing at which this effect is executed is arbitrary, and for example, it may be configured to be executed in the start game of the execution times currently being executed, or it may be configured to be executed in an intermediate game.

(34) The number of additional games given in each execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is determined before the first execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started, such as when the start period ST11 ends. It may be configured to be. In this case, each time a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started, a predetermined number of additional games is given.

(35) Unit execution times The continuous lottery process for determining whether or not to generate a new execution time in the final game in each execution time of ST12 and ST13 is executed, but the game before the final game is executed. In this case, the continuous lottery process may be executed. Further, if the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in each game in each of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is a predetermined result, the continuous lottery process may be executed.

(36) When a revival effect indicating a transition to the ART state ST6 occurs in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the revival effect starts after the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5. However, even if the revival effect is started when the bet of the game medium is set in order to start the first game of the ART state ST6 after the final game of the pseudo bonus state ST5 is completed. good. Even in this case, if the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends without shifting to the ART state ST6, the end preparation state ST7 is executed for one game after the end of the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the end preparation state ST7 Since the section display unit 67 is maintained in the lit state until the end of, even if it is confirmed whether or not the section display unit 67 is in the lit state after the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is completed, the above-mentioned revival effect is produced. It is not possible to specify whether or not it will occur.

(37) The number of games in which the end preparation state ST7 continues is not limited to one game, and may be two games, three games, or four or more games. Further, there are a plurality of types of continuous games in the end preparation state ST7, and the end preparation state ST7 may be maintained over the number of continuous games selected by lottery from the number of continuous games of the plurality of types.

(38) In the second control process (FIG. 47) of the game section, the update process (step S2008 to step S2012) of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 is not executed when the replay winning is established. , The update process may be executed. In this case, if the replay winning is established, the number of bets of the current game is subtracted from the total number of acquisition counters 74d in step S2008, and the number of bets of the current game is added to the total number of acquisitions counter 74d in step S2010. Will be done. Therefore, even if the above update process is executed, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is constant.

(39) In the loop lottery process, the variation value is configured to be the lower 4 bits of the previous second random number, but the variation value is not limited to this, and the variation value is the upper 4 bits of the previous second random number. The configuration may be a medium 4-bit configuration.

(40) In the loop lottery process, the variation value is determined based on the second random number of the previous time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation value may be determined based on the second random number of the previous time. Often, the configuration may be determined based on the previous second random number and the second random number two times before.

(41) In the loop lottery process, the numerical lottery process may be executed to determine the variation numerical value. Even in this case, the variation value can be changed.

(42) In the loop lottery process, when the process for generating the second waiting period is executed, first, "15" is set in the repeat count counter 74 g of the main RAM 74, and then the variation value and the repeat count counter 74 g The magnitude relationship with the value is determined, and each time the determination is made, the value of the repetition counter 74g is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the repetition counter 74g becomes "0", it is determined that the second waiting period has elapsed. However, the configuration is not limited to this. First, "0" is set in the repetition counter 74g, and then the value of the repetition counter 74g is added by 1 each time the magnitude relationship is determined, and the repetition is performed. When the value of the number-of-times counter 74g becomes "15", it may be determined that the second waiting period has elapsed.

(43) When shifting to the second section SC2, the configuration is such that the second section SC2 does not end without the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, but this is not limited to this. However, even if the transition to the second section SC2 is performed, the second section SC2 may be terminated without the transition to the pseudo bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6.

(44) In the second section SC2, the section display unit 67 is in the lit state (that is, the display state), and when a predetermined abnormal state has occurred in the slot machine 10, the section display unit 67 is in the lit state (that is, the display state). That is, it may be configured to be in a hidden state). Further, in this case, the combined display unit 66 may be configured to display the type of the abnormal state. In the configuration in which the combined display unit 66 and the section display unit 67 are integrated in the common display area 68 in this way, the section display unit 67 is turned off when a predetermined abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10. By displaying the status corresponding to the type of abnormal status on the dual-purpose display unit 66, even if the same abnormal status occurs, the common display is performed depending on whether or not it is the second section SC2. Since the event that the display mode of the area 68 changes does not occur, it becomes easy to identify the type of abnormal state.

(45) When it is determined that a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 will occur, it is definitely special when the number of additional games given in the new execution time is equal to or more than the predetermined number of games. The configuration is such that continuous production is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined that a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 will occur, the lottery process of the continuous effect is executed, and the lottery process of the continuous effect is given in the new execution time. The larger the number of additional games, the higher the probability that the special continuous effect will be selected, and the smaller the number of additional games given in the new execution times, the higher the probability that the normal continuous effect will be selected. It may be.

(46) As a condition for starting the ending effect of the second section SC2, in addition to the condition in the first embodiment, the number of games continuously digested in the second section SC2 is equal to or more than the number of ending start reference games. The configuration may be such that the condition that it has become is set.

(47) A configuration in which the total number of digested games and the total number of advantageous games digested in the second section SC2 are stored as history information, and the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the lottery process of the winning combination, the number of winnings of the predetermined winning combination and the total number of games to be drawn are stored as history information, and the winning probability of the predetermined winning combination is calculated. May be. In this case, there are a first predetermined combination and a second predetermined combination as the target predetermined combination, and the number of winnings is individually stored as history information for each of the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination, and the first The winning probability may be calculated for each of the predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. In addition, the number of winnings may be individually stored as history information for each of the winning combinations, and the winning probability may be calculated for each of the winning combinations. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the winning probability of the role to be managed.

Further, the total number of game media granted and the total number of games may be stored as history information, and the number of game media granted per unit game may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the number of game media granted per unit game number. In addition, the combination of the total number of game media granted and the total number of games is individually stored as history information for each game state and the second section SC2, and the number of game media granted per unit game is stored. The game state and the second section SC2 may be calculated individually.

(48) In the advantageous gaming state, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, so that the configuration is not limited to a configuration that is more advantageous than the gaming state that is not the advantageous gaming state. In this case, the advantageous gaming state may be advantageous by increasing the number of game media provided.

(49) The notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration performed by the combined display unit 66 and the section display unit 67, and may be performed by using, for example, the credit display unit 65. , The credit display unit 65 and the combined display unit 66 may be used. Further, when there are a plurality of types of calculation results of the notification target, the events of each type of notification target may be sequentially switched and displayed. When the display is sequentially switched in this way, for example, the type of the event to be notified is displayed on the credit display unit 65, and the calculation result or the content of the calculation result for the event to be notified is displayed on the combined display unit 66. The configuration may be such that the corresponding information is displayed. As a result, even when a plurality of types of events to be notified exist, it is possible to notify the events of the plurality of types of notification targets by using a small number of display units.

(50) The first section SC1 may also have a configuration in which an upper limit number of continuous games is set. In this case, when the number of games continuously executed in the first section SC1 reaches the upper limit number of games, it is set in the second section SC2. As a result, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the first section SC1 continues until the maximum number of games is reached. Further, by setting the upper limit number of games in the first section SC1 to be the same between the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6", the advantage or disadvantage due to the set value does not occur with respect to the upper limit number of games. It becomes possible.

(51) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the number of effective lines is only one of the main line ML, and the configuration may be such that the number of effective lines is two, three, or four or more. In this case, the number of effective lines may increase as the number of bet game media increases, or the maximum number of effective lines may be set regardless of the number of bet game media.

(52) The type of information transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the directing MPU 92 is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments. Information on the number of game media to be played may be transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92. In this case, the information on the number of game media given by winning the prize can be notified by the image display device 63 or the like. Further, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, when the rotation of some reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped or stopped, the corresponding information is provided on the main side. It may be configured to be transmitted from the MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92. In this case, the image display device 63 or the like can perform an effect corresponding to the rotation status of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

(53) In each of the above embodiments, the privilege of paying out medals when a small winning combination is established is given, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and some privilege is given to the player. It should be. For example, a prize other than a medal may be paid out when a small winning combination is established. Further, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages medals owned by a player by credit, an increase in credited medals corresponds to granting a privilege.

(54) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B type slot machine, and a C type, an A type and a C type composite type, a B type and a C type composite type, and an RT game, a CT game, or an AT. The invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type with a game. In addition, there may be a configuration in which a bonus state that is advantageous to the player exists.

(55) The design of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not limited to a picture, a number, a character, etc., but may be a geometric line, a figure, or the like. Further, the design can be composed of light, color, or the like, the design can be composed of a three-dimensional shape or the like, and the design can be composed even if these are combined. That is, the design may have a function as information having distinctiveness.

(56) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 is shown, but it may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a game is played by using a game ball as a game medium, and the slot machine and the pachinko machine may be applied. It may be applied to a gaming machine in a form fused with the machine.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operating means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of a pattern in the pattern display means, and
A game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets the game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are bet set. ,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the game is executed.
The stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44).
A symbol display that controls the symbol display means so that the variable display of the symbol is started when the game is executed and the variable display of the symbol is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Winning correspondence control means (a function of executing the processing of step S310 and step S311 in the main MPU 72) for executing correspondence control, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
When the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number (“3”) of the game medium is set as a bet, the predetermined profit (shift to the pseudo bonus state ST5, shift to the ART state ST6) ) Can be granted, but the predetermined profit is not granted when the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number (“2”) of game media is set as a bet. And, when the game is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set, the game is executed in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media are bet set. It is one of the configurations in which a predetermined profit is easily given.
The winning control means
The first predetermined gaming state (first CB state ST2) based on the establishment of the first predetermined prize (first CB prize) in the situation where the first predetermined combination (first CB combination) is won in the lottery process of the combination. 1st transition means (function to execute the process of step S1003 in the main MPU 72) and
The second predetermined gaming state (second CB state ST3) is based on the fact that the second predetermined prize (second CB prize) is established in the situation where the second predetermined combination (second CB combination) is won in the lottery process of the combination. A second transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1007 in the main MPU 72) and
With
The first predetermined winning combination may be won in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set, while the winning combination is not won in the situation where the second predetermined number of gaming media are bet set. ,
The first predetermined prize is established when the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set in the situation where the first predetermined combination is won, while the first predetermined prize is established. Even if the winning combination is won, it will not be established if the game is executed in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set as bets.
The second predetermined combination can be won in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are bet set, while the second predetermined combination is a combination that is not won in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set. ,
The second predetermined prize is established when the game is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are bet set in the situation where the second predetermined combination is won, while the second predetermined prize is established. Even if the winning combination is won, it will not be established if the game is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set as bets.
Even if the second predetermined winning is not established in the game in which the second predetermined winning combination is won, the situation in which the second predetermined winning combination is won is maintained in the next game.
When the second predetermined combination is won, even if the lottery process of the combination is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the first predetermined combination is not won. can be,
The first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that does not contribute to an increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player.

According to the feature A1, the player is provided with a predetermined profit or is likely to be given a predetermined profit by executing the game in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set as bets. Basically, the game is executed in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media are set as bets.

In this configuration, as the winning combination of the combination lottery process, a first predetermined combination that can be won in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media are set as bets and a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets. A second predetermined combination that can be won in the situation is set. The first predetermined prize can be established by executing the game in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set in the situation where the first predetermined combination is won. Then, when the first predetermined winning is established, the game shifts to the first predetermined gaming state. In addition, the second predetermined prize can be established by executing the game in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set as bets in the situation where the second predetermined combination is won. Then, when the second predetermined winning is established, the game shifts to the second predetermined gaming state. In this case, if the second predetermined combination is won, even if the lottery process of the combination is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the first predetermined combination is not won. At the same time, the first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that does not contribute to the increase in the gaming medium owned by the player.

Therefore, in the game hall, by playing a game in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets before the start of business and winning the second predetermined combination, the first predetermined number of games are played after the start of business. It is possible to prevent the transition to the first predetermined gaming state from occurring for the player who repeatedly plays the game in the situation where the medium is set as a bet. On the other hand, for example, a game in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media are bet set by illegally acquiring a game medium and then illegally initializing information and then using the illegally acquired game medium. If a fraudulent act of repeating the above steps is performed, the game is repeated in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set in a situation where the second predetermined combination has not been won. In this case, the first predetermined gaming state, which is a gaming state that does not contribute to the increase in the gaming medium owned by the player, is likely to occur. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the fraudster to further increase the number of game media. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an act of trying to obtain an improper profit by improperly initializing the information.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the second predetermined number is smaller than the first predetermined number.

According to the feature A2, since the second predetermined number is smaller than the first predetermined number, it is possible to keep the number of game media required for winning the second predetermined combination to be small. Become.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the gaming medium owned by the player is reduced.

According to the feature A3, when the first predetermined gaming state occurs, a disadvantage occurs. Therefore, when the cheating as described above is performed, the gaming medium possessed by the cheating person is reduced. It becomes possible to make it.

Feature A4. The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that does not contribute to an increase in the gaming medium owned by the player, or a gaming state that reduces the gaming medium owned by the player. The gaming machine according to any one of A3.

According to the feature A4, a situation in which a second predetermined number of game media are bet-set using the illegally acquired game medium after the fraudster has illegally initialized the information as described above. When the game is played in, the player wins the second predetermined combination and the second predetermined prize is established, so that the game shifts to the second predetermined game state in which the game medium is not increased or the game medium owned is reduced. It is possible to make it do.

Feature A5. When the first predetermined winning combination is won in a game in which the first predetermined number of gaming media are set as bets, the first predetermined winning is established in the game regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that (the configuration of the second embodiment).

According to the feature A5, if the first predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined prize is surely established in the game, which contributes to the increase in the game medium when the cheating as described above is performed. It is possible to facilitate the transition to the first predetermined gaming state.

Feature A6. Even if the first predetermined winning is not established in the game in which the first predetermined winning combination is won, the situation in which the first predetermined winning combination is won is maintained in the next game.
When the first predetermined combination is won, even if the lottery process of the combination is executed in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the second predetermined combination is not won. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature A6, even if the game is executed in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set in the situation where the first predetermined combination is won, the situation is such that the second predetermined combination is won. Can not. As a result, after the fraudster has initialized the information as described above, the game is first played in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set as bets, and the first predetermined role is won. After that, even if the game is played in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the second predetermined combination cannot be won.

Feature A7. Advantageous transition means (main side MPU72) that shifts the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (preparation state ST4, pseudo bonus state ST5, ART state ST6) that is advantageous to the player in the case of the advantageous transition possible situation (second section SC2). (Functions for executing the processes of steps S2403 to S2405, step S2413, and step S2414) in
The predetermined profit is to shift to the advantageous gaming state,
By executing the game in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set, the advantageous transition possible situation can be obtained, whereas the situation where the second predetermined number of game media are bet set. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that the advantageous shiftable situation does not occur even if the game is executed in.

According to the feature A7, when the game is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set, it is possible to be in the advantageous transition possible state in which the transition to the advantageous game state is possible. Even if the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the advantageous transition is not possible. Therefore, the player basically executes the game in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media are set as bets.

Feature A8. The gaming machine according to feature A7, characterized in that the advantageous transition possible situation can be achieved regardless of whether or not the second predetermined combination has been won.

According to the feature A8, the advantageous transition is possible by executing the game in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set regardless of whether or not the second predetermined combination is won. Can be. As a result, even if the player starts the game in which the first predetermined number of game media are bet set in the situation where the player has not won the second predetermined combination, the advantageous transition possible situation can be achieved. Is possible.

Feature A9. The advantageous transition means shifts the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media are set in the advantageous transition possible situation. On the other hand, even if the game is executed in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set in the case of the advantageous shiftable situation, the game state is not shifted to the advantageous game state. The gaming machine according to the feature A7 or A8.

According to the feature A9, the transition of the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state does not occur unless the game is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media are bet set even after the advantageous transition is possible. .. Therefore, even in the advantageous transition possible situation, the player basically executes the game in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set as bets.

Feature A10. Based on the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable situation reaching the upper limit number of games, the end means corresponding to the number of games for ending the advantageous shiftable situation (affirmative determination is made in step S2006 in the main MPU 72). The function of executing the process of step S2014) is provided.
The ending means corresponding to the number of games is a game executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set in the advantageous shiftable situation and the second predetermined number of game media in the advantageous shiftable situation. The gaming machine according to feature A9, wherein the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable situation is to be measured regardless of the game executed in the situation where the bet is set.

According to the feature A10, since the advantageous shiftable situation ends based on the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable situation reaching the upper limit number of games, the advantageous shiftable situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to do so. Further, it is either a game executed in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media are bet set or a game executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are bet set in an advantageous transition possible situation. However, it is a target for measuring the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation. As a result, when the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the game state is not transferred to the advantageous game state even if the advantageous transition is possible. If the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the remaining upper limit number of games in the advantageous transition possible situation is reduced accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets.

Feature A11. From the total number of game media granted by the game executed when the advantageous transferable situation continues, the game medium digested to execute the game when the advantageous transferable situation continues. When the value obtained by subtracting the total number is used as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as the predetermined reference value, and the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value reaches the upper limit difference number. (A function of making an affirmative determination in step S2013 of the main MPU 72 and executing the process of step S2014) for ending the advantageous shiftable situation based on the above.
The ending means corresponding to the difference number is a game executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set in the advantageous transferable situation and the second predetermined number of game media in the advantageous transferable situation. The gaming machine according to feature A9 or A10, characterized in that the predetermined difference is measured in any of the games executed in the situation where the bet is set.

According to the feature A11, since the advantageous shiftable situation ends based on the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous shiftable situation reaches the upper limit difference number, the advantageous shiftable situation becomes excessive. It is possible to prevent it from continuing for a long time. Further, it is either a game executed in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media are bet set or a game executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are bet set in an advantageous transition possible situation. However, it is a measurement target of a predetermined difference number. As a result, when the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the game state is not transferred to the advantageous game state even if the advantageous transition is possible. If the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value may approach the upper limit difference. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets.

Feature A12. The first predetermined notification means (step S1117, step S1202, step S1205 and step S1205 in the effect side MPU 92) so that the first predetermined notification (non-internal notification image G12) is executed in the situation where the second predetermined combination is not won. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, which comprises a function of executing the process of S1211).

According to the feature A12, since the first predetermined notification is executed in the situation where the second predetermined combination is not won, the manager of the game hall or the like is given the second predetermined in the situation where the second predetermined combination is not won. It is possible to encourage the role to be elected.

Feature A13. The gaming machine according to feature A12, wherein the first predetermined notification means notifies the number of games executed in a situation where the first predetermined notification is executed.

According to the feature A13, the number of games executed in the situation where the first predetermined notification is executed by not winning the second predetermined combination is notified, so that the second predetermined combination is not won. It is possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize how long the game continues.

Feature A14. Even if the first predetermined winning is not established in the game in which the first predetermined winning combination is won, the situation in which the first predetermined winning combination is won is maintained in the next game.
When the first predetermined combination is won, even if the lottery process of the combination is executed in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the second predetermined combination is not won. can be,
The first predetermined notification means is characterized in that the first predetermined notification is executed in a situation where the first predetermined combination has not been won and the second predetermined combination has not been won. The gaming machine according to the feature A12 or A13.

According to the feature A14, the manager of the game hall or the like confirms that the first predetermined notification is executed, so that neither the first predetermined combination nor the second predetermined combination is won. It becomes possible to grasp.

Feature A15. The first predetermined notification means is such that the first predetermined notification is executed when the notification enable condition is satisfied based on the fact that the specific operation is performed in the situation where the second predetermined combination is not won. A means for preventing the first predetermined notification from being executed when the notification enable condition is not satisfied even in a situation where the second predetermined combination has not been won (the directing side MPU 92 in the third embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A14, which comprises a function of executing a switching control process for internal notification of the above.

According to the feature A15, even if the second predetermined combination is not won, the first predetermined notification is not executed if the notification enable condition is not satisfied based on the specific operation being performed. This makes it possible for only the manager of the game hall to confirm whether or not the situation is such that the second predetermined combination has not been won through the execution of the first predetermined notification.

Feature A16. The second predetermined notification (two-bet correspondence notification) is executed when the game is started in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media are bet set in the situation where the second predetermined combination is won. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, which comprises a second predetermined notification means (a function of executing the process of step S1503 in the effect side MPU 92).

According to the feature A16, when the game is started in the situation where the bet is set for the second predetermined number of game media even though the second predetermined combination has already been won, the second predetermined notification is given. Is executed, it is possible to promote the avoidance of the establishment of the second predetermined prize.

Feature A17. The third predetermined notification (three-bet correspondence notification) is executed when the game is started in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set in the situation where the second predetermined combination is not won. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, which comprises a third predetermined notification means (a function of executing the process of step S1305 in the effect side MPU 92).

According to the feature A17, when the game is started in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set in the situation where the second predetermined combination is not won, the third predetermined notification is executed. By playing the game in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets, it is possible to encourage the player to win the second predetermined combination.

Feature A18. Even if the first predetermined winning is not established in the game in which the first predetermined winning combination is won, the situation in which the first predetermined winning combination is won is maintained in the next game.
When the first predetermined combination is won, even if the lottery process of the combination is executed in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the second predetermined combination is not won. can be,
In this gaming machine, the fourth predetermined notification means (process of step S1107 in the effect side MPU 92) so that the fourth predetermined notification (first internal explicit image G13) is executed in the situation where the first predetermined combination is won. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, which comprises a function of executing the above.

According to the feature A18, since the fourth predetermined notification is executed in the situation where the first predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined is given to the manager of the game hall or the like in the situation where the first predetermined combination is won. It becomes possible to recognize that the role has been won.

Feature A19. When the first predetermined winning combination is won in the lottery process of the winning combination, the first predetermined winning information (first CB winning data) is stored, and when the second predetermined winning combination is won in the lottery process of the winning combination, the first predetermined winning combination is stored. 2 Information storage means (main side RAM 74) for storing predetermined winning information (second CB winning data), and
With a predetermined erasing means (a function of executing a partial clearing process in the main MPU 72) for executing a predetermined erasing process for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the establishment of the predetermined erasing condition. ,
With
The predetermined erasing means is any one of features A1 to A18, which comprises excluding the second predetermined winning information from the erasure target when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the predetermined erasing process. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature A19, even when the information stored in the information storage means is erased based on the establishment of the predetermined erasure condition, the second predetermined winning information indicating that the second predetermined winning combination has been won is provided. Excluded from erasure. As a result, it is possible to maintain the winning state of the second predetermined combination even after the predetermined erasure condition is satisfied and the predetermined erasure process is executed.

Feature A20. The combination lottery means executes the combination lottery process in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the target of use from the set values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage.
The gaming machine is provided with a setting-related execution means (a function of executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for executing a predetermined setting-related process related to the set value.
The gaming machine according to feature A19, wherein the predetermined erasing condition is satisfied when the setting-related processing is executed.

According to the feature A20, since the setting value to be used is selected from the setting values of a plurality of stages, it is possible to change the advantage of the gaming machine by selecting the setting value to be used. Become. Further, since the predetermined erasure condition is satisfied and the predetermined erasure process is executed when the predetermined setting-related process is executed, the information of the information storage means is deleted when the predetermined setting-related process is executed. It becomes possible to do so. In this case, even if the predetermined erasure process is executed, the second predetermined winning information is excluded from the erasure target. As a result, even if the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, it is possible to maintain the state in which the second predetermined combination is won.

Feature A21. The feature A19 or A20, wherein the predetermined erasing means deletes the first predetermined winning information when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the predetermined erasing process. Game machine.

According to the feature A21, when the predetermined erasing process is executed, the second predetermined winning information is not deleted, but the first predetermined winning information can be deleted. As a result, when the situation is such that the first predetermined combination is won, it is possible to set the situation where the first predetermined combination is not won by satisfying the predetermined deletion condition.

Feature A22. The predetermined erasing condition is satisfied based on the fact that a predetermined operation (ON operation of the setting key for the setting key insertion hole 57) is performed when the supply of the operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of A21.

According to the feature A22, it is possible to execute the predetermined erasing process when the supply of the operating power is started.

Feature A23. When the first predetermined winning combination is won in the lottery process of the winning combination, the first predetermined winning information (first CB winning data) is stored, and when the second predetermined winning combination is won in the lottery process of the winning combination, the first predetermined winning combination is stored. 2 Information storage means (main side RAM 74) for storing predetermined winning information (second CB winning data), and
Based on the fact that the specific erasure condition is satisfied, the specific erasure means for executing the specific erasure process for erasing the information stored in the information storage means (the function of executing the all clear process in the main MPU 72) and
With
Any of the features A1 to A22, wherein the specific erasing means erases the second predetermined winning information when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the specific erasing process. The gaming machine described in 1 or 1.

According to the feature A23, when the specific erasure condition is satisfied, the specific erasure process is executed to erase the information stored in the information storage means including the second predetermined winning information. In this case, if the specific erasure process is executed by illegally satisfying the specific erasure condition, it is possible to set the situation in which the second predetermined combination has not been won.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A23, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D5, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to the feature of the feature A group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration in which an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit are provided as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is assumed that an act of illegally initializing information is performed to obtain an illegal profit, and it is necessary to suppress the occurrence of such an illegal act. ..

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operating means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of a pattern in the pattern display means, and
A game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets the game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are bet set. ,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the game is executed.
The stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44).
A symbol display that controls the symbol display means so that the variable display of the symbol is started when the game is executed and the variable display of the symbol is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Winning correspondence control means (a function of executing the processing of step S310 and step S311 in the main MPU 72) for executing correspondence control, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
While the advantageous transition possible situation (second section SC2) can be set based on the fact that the game is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number (“3”) of the game media among the predetermined numbers is set as a bet, Even if the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number (“2”) of the game media is set as a bet, the situation setting means (step S1805 in the main MPU 72) that does not set the advantageous shiftable situation is set. (Function to execute the processing of) and
In the case of the advantageous transition possible situation, the advantageous transition means (step S2403 to step in the main MPU 72) for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (preparation state ST4, pseudo bonus state ST5, ART state ST6) advantageous to the player. (Function to execute the processes of S2405, step S2413 and step S2414) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, when the game is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set, it is possible to be in the advantageous transition possible state in which the transition to the advantageous game state is possible. Even if the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the advantageous transition is not possible. Therefore, the player basically executes the game in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media are set as bets. Therefore, it is possible to play the game in a suitable manner.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the first predetermined number is a number larger than the second predetermined number.

According to the feature B2, since the first predetermined number is larger than the second predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the number of game media required to make the advantageous transition possible situation from becoming excessively small. It will be possible.

Feature B3. The advantageous transition means shifts the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media are set in the advantageous transition possible situation. On the other hand, even if the game is executed in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set in the case of the advantageous shiftable situation, the game state is not shifted to the advantageous game state. The gaming machine according to the feature B1 or B2.

According to the feature B3, the transition of the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state does not occur unless the game is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of gaming media are bet set even after the advantageous transition is possible. .. Therefore, even in the advantageous transition possible situation, the player basically executes the game in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set as bets.

Feature B4. Based on the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable situation reaching the upper limit number of games, the end means corresponding to the number of games for ending the advantageous shiftable situation (affirmative determination is made in step S2006 in the main MPU 72). The function of executing the process of step S2014) is provided.
The ending means corresponding to the number of games is a game executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set in the advantageous shiftable situation and the second predetermined number of game media in the advantageous shiftable situation. The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable situation is to be measured regardless of the game executed in the situation where the bet is set.

According to the feature B4, since the advantageous shiftable situation ends based on the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable situation reaching the upper limit number of games, the advantageous shiftable situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to do so. Further, it is either a game executed in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media are bet set or a game executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are bet set in an advantageous transition possible situation. However, it is a target for measuring the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation. As a result, when the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the game state is not transferred to the advantageous game state even if the advantageous transition is possible. If the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the remaining upper limit number of games in the advantageous transition possible situation is reduced accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets.

Feature B5. The winning correspondence control means is a second predetermined game based on the fact that the second predetermined winning (second CB winning) is established in the situation where the second predetermined winning combination (second CB winning combination) is won in the lottery process of the winning combination. It is provided with a second transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1007 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the gaming state to the state (second CB state ST3).
The second predetermined combination can be won in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are bet set, while the second predetermined combination is a combination that is not won in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set. ,
The second predetermined prize is established when the game is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are bet set in the situation where the second predetermined combination is won, while the second predetermined prize is established. Even if the winning combination is won, it will not be established if the game is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set as bets.
The second predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that does not contribute to an increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player.
The ending means corresponding to the number of games is described in feature B4, which measures the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable situation even if the game is executed in the second predetermined gaming state. Game machine.

According to the feature B5, the second predetermined game state is obtained by winning the second predetermined combination and establishing the second predetermined prize by executing the game in the situation where the bet is set for the second predetermined number of game media. Move to. Then, the second predetermined game state is a game state that does not contribute to the increase in the game medium owned by the player, and even the game executed in the second predetermined game state is executed in an advantageous transition possible situation. It is the target of measuring the number of games. As a result, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the advantageous transition possible situation can be achieved regardless of whether or not the second predetermined combination has been won.

According to the feature B6, the advantageous transition is possible by executing the game in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set regardless of whether or not the second predetermined combination is won. Can be. As a result, even if the player starts the game in which the first predetermined number of game media are bet set in the situation where the player has not won the second predetermined combination, the advantageous transition possible situation can be achieved. Is possible.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein the second predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which the gaming medium owned by the player is reduced.

According to the feature B7, when the second predetermined game state occurs, a disadvantage occurs, and even if the game is executed in the second predetermined game state, the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation is measured. It becomes. As a result, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets.

Feature B8. From the total number of game media granted by the game executed when the advantageous transferable situation continues, the game medium digested to execute the game when the advantageous transferable situation continues. When the value obtained by subtracting the total number is used as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as the predetermined reference value, and the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value reaches the upper limit difference number. (A function of making an affirmative determination in step S2013 of the main MPU 72 and executing the process of step S2014) for ending the advantageous shiftable situation based on the above.
The ending means corresponding to the difference number is a game executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set in the advantageous transferable situation and the second predetermined number of game media in the advantageous transferable situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B7, characterized in that the predetermined difference is measured in any of the games executed in the situation where the bet is set.

According to the feature B8, the advantageous shiftable situation ends when the increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous shiftable situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so that the advantageous shiftable situation becomes excessive. It is possible to prevent it from continuing for a long time. Further, it is either a game executed in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media are bet set or a game executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are bet set in an advantageous transition possible situation. However, it is a measurement target of a predetermined difference number. As a result, when the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the game state is not transferred to the advantageous game state even if the advantageous transition is possible. If the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the increase in the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value may approach the upper limit difference. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B8, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D5, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operating means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of a pattern in the pattern display means, and
A game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets the game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are bet set. ,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the game is executed.
The stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44).
A symbol display that controls the symbol display means so that the variable display of the symbol is started when the game is executed and the variable display of the symbol is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Winning correspondence control means (a function of executing the processing of step S310 and step S311 in the main MPU 72) for executing correspondence control, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The winning response control means is in a predetermined gaming state (second CB state ST3) based on the fact that a predetermined winning combination (second CB winning) is established in a situation where a predetermined winning combination (second CB winning combination) is won in the lottery process of the winning combination. ) Is provided with a predetermined transfer means (a function of executing the process of step S1007 in the main MPU 72) to transfer the game state.
Even if the predetermined prize is not established in the game in which the predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game.
In the situation where the predetermined combination is won, the case where the game in which the first predetermined number (“3”) of the game medium is set as a bet is executed is the case where the predetermined number is won. It is more advantageous for the player than the case where the game in which the first predetermined number of game media is bet is executed in the situation where the game is not set.
In this gaming machine, the first predetermined notification means (step S1117, step S1202, step S1202 in the effect side MPU 92) so that the first predetermined notification (non-internal notification image G12) is executed in the situation where the predetermined combination is not won. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing the processes of S1205 and step S1211).

According to the feature C1, in the configuration in which it is more advantageous to execute the game in the situation where the predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined notification is executed in the situation where the predetermined combination is not won. As a result, it is possible to encourage the predetermined combination to be elected in the situation where the predetermined combination has not been elected. Therefore, it is possible to play the game in a suitable manner.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the first predetermined notification means notifies the number of games executed in a situation where the first predetermined notification is executed.

According to the feature C2, the number of games executed in the situation where the first predetermined notification is executed by not winning the predetermined combination is notified, so that the situation where the predetermined combination is not won continues to some extent. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not it is done.

Feature C3. The first predetermined notification means is such that the first predetermined notification is executed when the notification enable condition is satisfied based on the fact that the specific operation is performed in the situation where the predetermined combination is not won. Means for preventing the first predetermined notification from being executed when the notification enable condition is not satisfied even in a situation where the predetermined combination has not been won (internal notification of the effect side MPU 92 in the third embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, which comprises a function of executing switching control processing).

According to the feature C3, even if the predetermined combination is not won, the first predetermined notification is not executed if the notification enable condition is not satisfied based on the specific operation being performed. This makes it possible for only the manager of the game hall to confirm whether or not the predetermined combination has not been won through the execution of the first predetermined notification.

Feature C4. The predetermined combination can be won in a situation where a second predetermined number (“2”) of the predetermined number of game media is bet-set, while the first predetermined number of game media is bet-set. It is a role that does not win in
The predetermined winning combination is established when the game is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are bet set in the situation where the predetermined winning combination is won, while the predetermined winning combination is won. Even in the situation, it is not established when the game is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set as bets.
In the game machine, the second predetermined notification (2-bet correspondence notification) is executed when the game is started in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media are bet set in the situation where the predetermined combination is won. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that it includes a second predetermined notification means (a function of executing the process of step S1503 in the effect side MPU 92).

According to the feature C4, when the game is started in the situation where the bet is set for the second predetermined number of game media even though the predetermined combination has already been won, the second predetermined notification is executed. Therefore, it is possible to promote the avoidance of the establishment of the second predetermined prize.

Feature C5. The predetermined combination can be won in a situation where a second predetermined number (“2”) of the predetermined number of game media is bet-set, while the first predetermined number of game media is bet-set. It is a role that does not win in
This gaming machine executes a third predetermined notification (3-bet correspondence notification) when a game is started in a situation where a bet is set for the first predetermined number of game media in a situation where the predetermined combination has not been won. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, which comprises a third predetermined notification means (a function of executing the process of step S1305 in the effect side MPU 92).

According to the feature C5, when the game is started in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set in the situation where the predetermined combination is not won, the third predetermined notification is executed, so that the second predetermined notification is executed. By playing a game in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set as bets, it is possible to encourage the player to win a predetermined combination.

Feature C6. When the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number (“3”) of game media is set as a bet, a predetermined profit (transition to pseudo-bonus state ST5, transition to ART state ST6) is given. On the other hand, when the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number (“2”) of game media is set as a bet, the predetermined profit is not given, and the first When the game is executed in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are bet set, a predetermined profit is given as compared with the case where the game is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are bet set. It is one of the easy-to-use configurations,
The winning response control means is a first predetermined game based on the fact that the first predetermined winning (first CB winning) is established in the situation where the first predetermined winning combination (first CB winning combination) is won in the lottery process of the winning combination. It is provided with a first transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1003 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the gaming state to the state (first CB state ST2).
The first predetermined winning combination may be won in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set, while the winning combination is not won in the situation where the second predetermined number of gaming media are bet set. ,
The first predetermined prize is established when the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set in the situation where the first predetermined combination is won, while the first predetermined prize is established. Even if the winning combination is won, it will not be established if the game is executed in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set as bets.
The predetermined combination can be won in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are bet set, while the predetermined combination is a combination that is not won in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set.
The predetermined winning combination is established when the game is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are bet set in the situation where the predetermined winning combination is won, while the predetermined winning combination is won. Even in the situation, it is not established when the game is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set as bets.
When the predetermined combination is won, even if the lottery process of the combination is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the first predetermined combination is not won.
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that does not contribute to an increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player.

According to the feature C6, the player is provided with a predetermined profit or is likely to be given a predetermined profit by executing the game in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set as bets. Basically, the game is executed in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media are set as bets.

In this configuration, as the winning combination of the combination lottery process, a first predetermined combination that can be won in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media are set as bets and a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets. Predetermined roles that can be won in the situation are set. The first predetermined prize can be established by executing the game in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set in the situation where the first predetermined combination is won. Then, when the first predetermined winning is established, the game shifts to the first predetermined gaming state. In addition, a predetermined prize may be established in which the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are bet set in a situation where a predetermined combination is won. Then, when the predetermined prize is established, the game shifts to the predetermined game state. In this case, if the predetermined combination is won, even if the lottery process of the combination is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the first predetermined combination is not won. , The first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that does not contribute to the increase in the gaming medium owned by the player.

Therefore, in the game hall, by playing a game in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets before the start of business and winning a predetermined combination, the first predetermined number of game media can be obtained after the start of business. It is possible to prevent the transition to the first predetermined gaming state from occurring for the player who repeatedly plays the game in the situation where the bet is set. On the other hand, for example, a game in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media are bet set by illegally acquiring a game medium and then illegally initializing information and then using the illegally acquired game medium. If a fraudulent act of repeating the above steps is performed, the game is repeated in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set in a situation where the predetermined combination has not been won. In this case, the first predetermined gaming state, which is a gaming state that does not contribute to the increase in the gaming medium owned by the player, is likely to occur. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the fraudster to further increase the number of game media. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an act of trying to obtain an improper profit by improperly initializing the information.

Feature C7. Even if the first predetermined winning is not established in the game in which the first predetermined winning combination is won, the situation in which the first predetermined winning combination is won is maintained in the next game.
When the first predetermined combination is won, even if the lottery process of the combination is executed in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the predetermined combination is not won.
The first predetermined notification means is characterized in that the first predetermined notification is executed in a situation where the first predetermined combination has not been won and the predetermined combination has not been won. The gaming machine described in C6.

According to the feature C7, the manager of the game hall or the like confirms that the first predetermined notification is executed, and thus grasps that neither the first predetermined combination nor the predetermined combination has been won. It becomes possible to do.

Feature C8. Even if the first predetermined winning is not established in the game in which the first predetermined winning combination is won, the situation in which the first predetermined winning combination is won is maintained in the next game.
When the first predetermined combination is won, even if the lottery process of the combination is executed in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the predetermined combination is not won.
In this gaming machine, the fourth predetermined notification means (process of step S1107 in the effect side MPU 92) so that the fourth predetermined notification (first internal explicit image G13) is executed in the situation where the first predetermined combination is won. The gaming machine according to the feature C6 or C7, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the feature C8, since the fourth predetermined notification is executed in the situation where the first predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined is given to the manager of the game hall or the like in the situation where the first predetermined combination is won. It becomes possible to recognize that the role has been won.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C8, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D5, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. The information storage means (main side RAM 74) is provided with a predetermined storage execution means (a function of executing the process of step S706 in the main side MPU 72) for storing the predetermined game information (second CB winning data).
When the predetermined game information is stored in the information storage means, the game situation is set to a predetermined game situation (a game situation in which the first CB combination is not won).
This gaming machine is
Profit-giving processing execution means (lottery of roles in the main MPU 72) that executes profit-giving processing in a manner corresponding to the setting value set as the target of use from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage. Function to execute processing) and
A setting-related execution means (a function of executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for executing a predetermined setting-related process related to the set value, and
With a predetermined erasing means (a function of executing a partial clearing process in the main MPU 72) for executing a predetermined erasing process for erasing the information stored in the information storage means when the setting-related process is executed. ,
With
The predetermined erasing means is a gaming machine characterized in that when erasing information stored in the information storage means in the predetermined erasing process, the predetermined gaming information is excluded from the erasure target.

According to the feature D1, since the setting value to be used is selected from the setting values of a plurality of stages, it is possible to change the advantage of the gaming machine by selecting the setting value to be used. Become. Further, since the predetermined erasing process is executed when the predetermined setting-related process is executed, it is possible to erase the information of the information storage means when the predetermined setting-related process is executed. Become. In this case, even if the predetermined erasure process is executed, the predetermined game information is excluded from the erasure target. As a result, it is possible to maintain a predetermined gaming situation even if a predetermined setting-related process is executed.

Feature D2. The information storage means (main side RAM 74) is provided with specific storage execution means (a function of executing the process of step S706 in the main side MPU 72) for storing specific game information (first CB winning data).
When the specific game information is stored in the information storage means, the game situation is a specific game situation (a game situation in which the second CB combination is not won).
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the predetermined erasing means deletes the specific game information when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the predetermined erasing process.

According to the feature D2, when the predetermined erasing process is executed, the predetermined game information is not deleted, but the specific game information can be deleted. As a result, when the gaming situation becomes a specific gaming situation, it is possible to make the gaming situation not the specific gaming situation by satisfying the predetermined erasing condition.

Feature D3. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on the fact that a predetermined operation (ON operation of the setting key for the setting key insertion hole 57) is performed when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2.

According to the feature D3, it is possible to execute the predetermined erasing process when the supply of the operating power is started.

Feature D4. It is provided with a specific erasing means (a function of executing a total clearing process in the main MPU 72) that executes a specific erasing process for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the establishment of the specific erasing condition. ,
The specific erasing means is any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that when the information stored in the information storage means is erased in the specific erasing process, the predetermined game information is erased. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature D4, when the specific erasure condition is satisfied, the specific erasure process is executed to erase the information stored in the information storage means including the predetermined game information.

Feature D5. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operating means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of a pattern in the pattern display means, and
A game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets the game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are bet set. ,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the game is executed.
The stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44).
A symbol display that controls the symbol display means so that the variable display of the symbol is started when the game is executed and the variable display of the symbol is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Winning correspondence control means (a function of executing the processing of step S310 and step S311 in the main MPU 72) for executing correspondence control, and
With
When the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number (“3”) of the game medium is set as a bet, the predetermined profit (shift to the pseudo bonus state ST5, shift to the ART state ST6) ) Can be granted, but the predetermined profit is not granted when the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number (“2”) of game media is set as a bet. And, when the game is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set, the game is executed in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media are bet set. It is one of the configurations in which a predetermined profit is easily given.
The winning control means
The first predetermined gaming state (first CB state ST2) based on the establishment of the first predetermined prize (first CB prize) in the situation where the first predetermined combination (first CB combination) is won in the lottery process of the combination. 1st transition means (function to execute the process of step S1003 in the main MPU 72) and
The second predetermined gaming state (second CB state ST3) is based on the fact that the second predetermined prize (second CB prize) is established in the situation where the second predetermined combination (second CB combination) is won in the lottery process of the combination. A second transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1007 in the main MPU 72) and
With
The first predetermined winning combination may be won in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set, while the winning combination is not won in the situation where the second predetermined number of gaming media are bet set. ,
The first predetermined prize is established when the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set in the situation where the first predetermined combination is won, while the first predetermined prize is established. Even if the winning combination is won, it will not be established if the game is executed in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set as bets.
The second predetermined combination can be won in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are bet set, while the second predetermined combination is a combination that is not won in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set. ,
The second predetermined prize is established when the game is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are bet set in the situation where the second predetermined combination is won, while the second predetermined prize is established. Even if the winning combination is won, it will not be established if the game is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set as bets.
Even if the second predetermined winning is not established in the game in which the second predetermined winning combination is won, the situation in which the second predetermined winning combination is won is maintained in the next game.
When the second predetermined combination is won, even if the lottery process of the combination is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the first predetermined combination is not won. can be,
The first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that does not contribute to an increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player.
The predetermined storage executing means stores the second predetermined winning information as the predetermined game information in the information storage means when the second predetermined combination is won in the lottery process of the combination.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the predetermined gaming situation is a situation in which the second predetermined winning combination is won.

According to the feature D5, the player is provided with a predetermined profit or is likely to be given a predetermined profit by executing the game in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set as bets. Basically, the game is executed in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media are set as bets.

In this configuration, as the winning combination of the combination lottery process, a first predetermined combination that can be won in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media are set as bets and a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets. A second predetermined combination that can be won in the situation is set. The first predetermined prize can be established by executing the game in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set in the situation where the first predetermined combination is won. Then, when the first predetermined winning is established, the game shifts to the first predetermined gaming state. In addition, the second predetermined prize can be established by executing the game in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set as bets in the situation where the second predetermined combination is won. Then, when the second predetermined winning is established, the game shifts to the second predetermined gaming state. In this case, if the second predetermined combination is won, even if the lottery process of the combination is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set as bets, the first predetermined combination is not won. At the same time, the first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that does not contribute to the increase in the gaming medium owned by the player.

Therefore, in the game hall, by playing a game in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media are set as bets before the start of business and winning the second predetermined combination, the first predetermined number of games are played after the start of business. It is possible to prevent the transition to the first predetermined gaming state from occurring for the player who repeatedly plays the game in the situation where the medium is set as a bet. On the other hand, for example, a game in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media are bet set by illegally acquiring a game medium and then illegally initializing information and then using the illegally acquired game medium. If a fraudulent act of repeating the above steps is performed, the game is repeated in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set in a situation where the second predetermined combination has not been won. In this case, the first predetermined gaming state, which is a gaming state that does not contribute to the increase in the gaming medium owned by the player, is likely to occur. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the fraudster to further increase the number of game media. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an act of trying to obtain an improper profit by improperly initializing the information.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D5, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D5, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Situation setting means (function to execute the process of step S1805 in the main MPU 72) to be set in the advantageous transition possible situation (second section SC2), and
In the case of the advantageous transition possible situation, the advantageous transition means (step S2403 to step in the main MPU 72) for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (preparation state ST4, pseudo bonus state ST5, ART state ST6) advantageous to the player. (Function to execute the processes of S2405, step S2413 and step S2414) and
Based on the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable situation reaching the upper limit number of games, the end means corresponding to the number of games for ending the advantageous shiftable situation (affirmative determination is made in step S2006 in the main MPU 72). (Function to execute the process of step S2014) and
With
The advantageous transition means is based on the fact that the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation and the specific gaming state reaches the number of first release games (the number of first ceiling games). It is provided with a first release transition means (a function of executing the processes of step S1903, step S1906, step S1909 and steps S2411 to S2414 in the main MPU 72) to shift the game state to the state.
A gaming machine characterized in that the number of first released games is smaller than the number of games that is the upper limit.

According to the feature E1, since the advantageous shiftable situation ends based on the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable situation reaching the upper limit number of games, the advantageous shiftable situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by shifting to the advantageous gaming state based on the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation reaching the first release game number, it is possible to give an opportunity to shift to the advantageous gaming state. In addition, since the number of first released games is smaller than the maximum number of games in the advantageous transition possible situation, it is possible to surely give an opportunity to shift to the advantageous game state when the advantageous transition possible situation is reached. It becomes.

Feature E2. In the advantageous transition possible situation, there are a plurality of types of stay modes (A mode, B mode, C mode) so that the number of the first release games is different.
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the number of first released games is smaller than the maximum number of games regardless of the type of stay mode.

According to the feature E2, since there are a plurality of types of stay modes so that the number of first unlocked games is different, it is possible to diversify the game contents in the advantageous transition possible situation. Further, in any type of stay mode, the number of first unlocked games is less than the maximum number of games in the advantageous transition possible situation, so that the advantageous transition is possible regardless of which stay mode is selected. In the case of, it is possible to surely give an opportunity to shift to an advantageous gaming state.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the upper limit number of games is the same regardless of any of the plurality of types of stay modes.

According to the feature E3, since the maximum number of games in the advantageous transition possible situation is the same regardless of the type of stay mode, even if the game content is diversified in the advantageous transition possible situation, once. It is possible to set the advantage of the advantageous transitionable situation of the above within the range of the predetermined advantage.

Feature E4. The advantageous shiftable means is the advantageous shiftable situation when the advantageous shiftable situation is maintained when the advantageous game state ends and shifts to the specific game state in the advantageous shiftable situation. A second release transition means for shifting the game state to the advantageous game state based on the number of games executed in the specific game state reaching the number of second release games (the number of second ceiling games). It is provided with a function of executing the processes of steps S2411 to S2414 and step S2805 on the main MPU 72).
The upper limit number of games is a number of games larger than the total number of games of the first release game, the second release game, and the minimum number of continuous games in the advantageous gaming state. The game machine according to any one of E3.

According to the feature E4, even if the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs once in the advantageous transitionable situation, the advantageous transitionable situation continues after the end of the advantageous gaming state and the second in the specific gaming state. By executing the number of games to be released, the game can shift to the advantageous gaming state again. The upper limit number of games in the advantageous transition possible situation is set to be larger than the total number of games of the first release game, the second release game, and the minimum continuous game in the advantageous gaming state. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs twice in the situation in which the advantageous transition is possible once.

Feature E5. The advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous gaming state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5) and a second advantageous gaming state (ART state ST6) that can be shifted when the first advantageous gaming state ends. ,
The maximum number of games is larger than the total number of games, which is the number of the first released games, the number of the second released games, and the number of games twice the number of continuous games in the first advantageous gaming state. The game machine according to the feature E4.

According to the feature E5, although the transition to the first advantageous gaming state occurs due to the digestion of the number of the first release games in the advantageous transition possible situation, the transition to the second advantageous gaming state occurs after the first advantageous gaming state ends. Even if the transition of the above does not occur, it is possible to shift to the first advantageous gaming state again by further digesting the number of the second release games in this advantageous transition possible situation, and the first advantageous game. It is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous gaming state can continue after the state. As a result, even if the transition from the first advantageous gaming state that occurred in the advantageous transitionable situation to the second advantageous gaming state does not occur, the second advantageous gaming state is entered in the subsequent advantageous transitionable situation. It is possible to make the player expect the transition.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or E5, wherein the number of the second release games is smaller than the number of games set before the number of the second release games is set.

According to the feature E6, since the number of the second released games is smaller than the number of the first released games, the advantageous gaming state is maintained when the advantageous transition possible situation is continued after the advantageous gaming state is completed. It is possible to raise the player's expectation for the transition to.

Feature E7. In the above-mentioned advantageous transition possible situation,
The first stay mode (A mode) in which the advantageous shiftable situation ends when the advantageous game state ends in the advantageous shiftable situation, and
A second stay mode (B mode) in which the advantageous shiftable situation can be continued even after the advantageous game state ends in the advantageous shiftable situation.
Is set,
The second release transition means is in the advantageous shiftable situation when the advantageous shiftable situation is maintained when the advantageous game state ends and shifts to the specific game state in the second stay mode. The feature E4 to the feature E4 to be characterized in that the game state is shifted to the advantageous game state based on the number of games executed in the specific game state reaching the second release game number. The gaming machine according to any one of E6.

According to the feature E7, it is possible to generate a situation in which the advantageous gaming state occurs only once in one advantageous transition possible situation and a situation in which the advantageous gaming state occurs multiple times in one advantageous transition possible situation. Will be. As a result, it is possible to create a relatively advantageous advantageous shiftable situation and a relatively disadvantageous advantageous shiftable situation, and it is possible to diversify the game content.

Feature E8. The description in feature E7, wherein the total number of games of the first release game and the number of the second release games in the second stay mode is equal to or less than the number of the first release games in the first stay mode. Game machine.

According to the feature E8, the total number of games of the first release game and the number of second release games in the second stay mode is equal to or less than the number of first release games in the first stay mode, so that the second stay mode is performed once. It is possible to set the mode in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state can occur a plurality of times in the advantageous transition possible situation and the mode in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state is easy.

Feature E9. In the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous notification means (section display unit 67) that maintains the notification state, and
When the advantageous shiftable situation ends when the advantageous game state ends, the advantageous notification means is set to the non-notification state when the advantageous shiftable situation ends, and even if the advantageous game state ends, the advantage When the shiftable state continues, the advantageous notification control means (step S1809, step S1814, step S2015, step S2408, step S2408 in the main MPU 72) for maintaining the advantageous notification means in the notification state even after the advantageous gaming state ends. The function of executing the process of S2417 and the function of making an affirmative judgment in step S2802) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E8.

According to the feature E9, since the advantageous notification means for maintaining the notification state in the advantageous gaming state is provided, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the notification state is in the advantageous gaming state. In this case, when the advantageous shiftable situation ends when the advantageous game state ends, the advantageous game state becomes the non-notification state when the advantageous shiftable situation ends, whereas the advantageous game state changes. Even if it ends, if the advantageous transition possible situation continues, the advantageous notification means is maintained in the notification state even after the advantageous gaming state ends. As a result, it becomes possible for the player playing the game with the gaming machine to recognize that the advantageous transition possible situation continues even after the end of the advantageous gaming state.

Feature E10. The advantageous notification control means is a means for changing the advantageous notification means from the non-notification state to the notification state when the advantageous transition is possible (a function of executing the processes of steps S1809 and S1814 on the main MPU 72). The gaming machine according to feature E9, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the feature E10, the advantageous notification means can change from the non-notification state to the notification state when the advantageous transition is possible, so that the player other than the player who has continued the game with the game machine is advantageous. Even if it is confirmed that the notification means is in the notification state, whether the situation in which the advantageous transition possible situation continues even after the advantageous gaming state ends or the situation in which the advantageous transition possible situation newly occurs is determined. It is possible to make it impossible to grasp.

Feature E11. The advantageous notification control means keeps the advantageous notification means in the non-notification state when the advantageous transition is possible, and then brings the advantageous notification means into the non-notification state when the advantageous gaming state is entered. The gaming machine according to feature E10, which comprises means for setting the notification state from the above (a function of executing the processes of steps S1815, S2408, and S2417 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature E11, the advantageous notification means may be maintained in the non-notification state even if the advantageous transition possible state is reached, and then the advantageous notification means may be in the notification state when the advantageous gaming state is subsequently entered. This makes it possible to diversify the opportunity for the advantageous notification means to be switched to the notification state.

Feature E12. From the total number of game media granted by the game executed when the advantageous transferable situation continues, the game medium digested to execute the game when the advantageous transferable situation continues. When the value obtained by subtracting the total number is used as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as the predetermined reference value, and the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value reaches the upper limit difference number. The feature is that it is provided with a difference-corresponding termination means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2013 in the main MPU 72 and executing the process of step S2014) to terminate the advantageous shiftable situation based on the above. The game machine according to any one of E1 to E11.

According to the feature E12, the advantageous shiftable situation ends when the increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous shiftable situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so that the advantageous shiftable situation becomes excessive. It is possible to prevent it from continuing for a long time.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E12, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D5, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. A predetermined advantageous transition means (a function of executing the processes of steps S906 and S2704 in the main MPU 72) for shifting the gaming state to a predetermined advantageous state (ART state ST6) that is advantageous to the player, and
A first determination means for determining the number of continuous games in the predetermined advantageous state based on the occurrence of the first determination opportunity in the predetermined advantageous state (a function of executing a loop lottery process in the main MPU 72, step S3401 in the main MPU 72). And the function of executing the process of step S3402) and
A second determination means for determining the number of predetermined additional games to be added to the number of continuous games in the predetermined advantageous state based on the occurrence of the second determination opportunity in the predetermined advantageous state (the addition process of the next set in the main MPU 72). Function to execute) and
With
The configuration is such that the second decision trigger can occur a plurality of times in the predetermined advantageous state.
The second determining means is a gaming machine characterized in that the total number of games of the predetermined additional games in one predetermined advantageous state is set to be equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit number of games (170 games).

According to the feature F1, in the predetermined advantageous state, the number of continuous games is determined based on the occurrence of the first determination opportunity, and the predetermined number of additional games is determined based on the occurrence of the second determination opportunity. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect that a large number of games will be given as the number of continuous games in a predetermined advantageous state. In this case, the provision of the predetermined number of additional games may occur a plurality of times in the predetermined advantageous state, and the total number of predetermined additional games in one predetermined advantageous state is limited to the predetermined upper limit number of games or less. As a result, it is possible to generate a large number of timings at which the predetermined number of additional games is given, and it is possible to prevent the predetermined number of additional games from being given excessively.

Feature F2. A function of executing the process of step S2005 in the main MPU 72 to update the information on the number of games stored in the game number storage means (continuous game number counter 74c) when the game is executed in the predetermined advantageous state. )When,
Based on the fact that the information on the number of games stored in the game number storage means becomes the information corresponding to the upper limit number of games, the termination means for terminating the predetermined advantageous state (affirmative determination is made in step S2006 in the main MPU 72). (Function to execute the process of step S2014),
The gaming machine according to the feature F1, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature F2, the predetermined advantageous state is terminated when the number of games measured by the game number storage means reaches the upper limit number of games. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined advantageous state from continuing excessively. In this case, the configuration of the above feature F1 is provided, and the total number of predetermined additional games in one predetermined advantageous state is limited to the predetermined upper limit number of games or less. As a result, in a situation where the number of continuous games in the predetermined advantageous state is limited, it is possible to prevent the granting of the number of continuous games in the predetermined advantageous state from being biased to the granting of the predetermined number of additional games.

Feature F3. The feature F1 or F2 is characterized in that the number of the predetermined additional games generated in response to the occurrence of the second determination trigger once is set to a number of games smaller than the predetermined upper limit number of games. The game machine described in.

According to the feature F3, it is possible to prevent the predetermined number of additional games given by granting the predetermined number of additional games once from reaching the predetermined upper limit number of games. Therefore, it is possible to generate the timing at which the predetermined number of additional games is given a plurality of times.

Feature F4. In the predetermined advantageous state, a plurality of unit execution times (first unit execution time ST12, second unit execution time ST13) can be executed.
The first decision trigger occurs based on the decision that a new execution time of the unit execution time is started.
The first determination means has one of the features F1 to F3, which is characterized in that the number of continuous games of the unit execution times to be newly started is determined based on the occurrence of the first determination opportunity. Described gaming machine.

According to the feature F4, the predetermined game state is continued by repeating the new execution times of the unit execution times. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting that the number of unit execution times increases.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to feature F4, wherein the second determination trigger can occur in each of the plurality of unit execution times when the unit execution times are executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature F5, when the unit execution times are executed a plurality of times, not only the number of continuous games is determined for each of the plurality of unit execution times, but also a predetermined number of additional games may be given. As a result, it is possible to expect the player to give a predetermined number of additional games at each unit execution time.

Feature F6. It is provided with a start determination means (a function of executing the process of step S3017 in the main MPU 72) for executing a start determination lottery process for determining whether or not to start a new execution time of the unit execution times. The gaming machine according to the feature F4 or F5.

According to the feature F6, a new execution time of the unit execution time is started by winning in the start decision lottery process. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect that a new execution time of the unit execution time is started even if the number of continuous games remaining in one execution time of the unit execution time is reduced.

Feature F7. The start determination means sets the winning probability of the start determination lottery process to be executed thereafter when the number of unit execution times is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference number, and sets the number of unit execution times to be equal to or greater than the predetermined reference number. The gaming machine according to feature F6, wherein the probability of winning the start determination lottery process executed up to the point is higher than the winning probability.

According to the feature F7, when the number of unit execution times exceeds the predetermined reference number, the probability of winning in the start determination lottery process is higher than before. That is, when the unit execution times are repeated and the number of executions exceeds the predetermined reference number, new execution times of the unit execution times are more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player with the start of a new execution time of the unit execution time.

Feature F8. The predetermined upper limit number of games is determined by the first determination means from the minimum number of games assumed as the upper limit number of games in the predetermined advantageous state to the start of the unit execution times of the predetermined reference times. The gaming machine according to feature F7, wherein the number of games is set to be smaller than the number of games obtained by subtracting the maximum number of games assumed as the total number of continuous games.

According to the feature F8, the predetermined upper limit number of games for the predetermined number of additional games is determined from the minimum number of games assumed as the upper limit number of games in the predetermined advantageous state to the start of the unit execution times of the predetermined reference times. The number of games is set to be smaller than the number of games obtained by subtracting the maximum number of games assumed as the total number of continuous games. As a result, even if the upper limit number of games in the predetermined advantageous state is set and the predetermined upper limit number of games is given as the predetermined number of additional games, the number of unit execution times becomes equal to or more than the predetermined reference number. It is possible to enable a situation in which the start decision lottery process is executed with a higher winning probability than the above.

Feature F9. The gaming machine according to feature F7 or F8, wherein the second determination means does not generate the predetermined number of additional games in the unit execution times in a situation where the number of times started is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference number of times. ..

According to the feature F9, in the configuration in which the upper limit number of games in the predetermined advantageous state is determined, the predetermined number of additional games is not generated in the unit execution times in the situation where the number of starts is equal to or more than the predetermined reference number, so that the unit execution is performed. After the number of times the times have been started exceeds the predetermined reference number of times, it is possible to give many opportunities for the start decision lottery process with a high winning probability to be executed.

Feature F10. The second determination means is
A lottery determination means (a function of executing the process of step S3302 in the main MPU 72) for determining the predetermined number of additional games by lottery based on the occurrence of the second determination opportunity, and
The number of remaining games until the predetermined upper limit number of games is reached is greater than the number of the predetermined additional games determined by the lottery determining means, or equal to or greater than the predetermined number of additional games determined by the lottery determining means. In the case, the predetermined number of additional games determined by the lottery determining means is given, and the remaining number of games until the predetermined upper limit number of games is reached is equal to or less than the predetermined number of additional games determined by the lottery determining means. In some cases, or when the number is less than the predetermined number of additional games determined by the lottery determination means, the means for not granting the predetermined number of additional games to the occurrence of the second determination opportunity this time (step S3304 and step S3304 in the main MPU 72). (Function to execute the process of step S3305) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9.

According to the feature F10, it is possible to delay the timing at which the total number of games of the given predetermined number of additional games reaches the predetermined upper limit number of games. As a result, even if the predetermined upper limit number of games is set, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the predetermined number of additional games is given.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F10, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D5, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. Situation setting means (function to execute the process of step S1805 in the main MPU 72) to be set in the advantageous transition possible situation (second section SC2), and
In the case of the advantageous transition possible situation, the advantageous transition means (step S2403 to step in the main MPU 72) for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (preparation state ST4, pseudo bonus state ST5, ART state ST6) advantageous to the player. (Function to execute the processes of S2405, step S2413 and step S2414) and
A situation ending means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2002 to S2004, step S2014, step S2803 and step S2804 in the main MPU 72) for terminating the advantageous transition possible situation based on the end of the advantageous gaming state.
With
The situation ending means is a gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous transition possible situation is terminated after a predetermined number of games (1 game) has been executed after the advantageous gaming state has ended.

According to the feature G1, since the transition of the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state occurs when the advantageous transition possible situation occurs, it is possible to limit the situation in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs. In this case, when the advantageous shiftable situation ends based on the end of the advantageous game state, the advantageous shiftable situation ends after the predetermined number of games are executed after the advantageous game state ends. As a result, even when the advantageous shiftable situation ends due to the end of the advantageous game state, it is possible to generate a period during which the advantageous shiftable state is maintained after the advantageous game state ends.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the predetermined number of games is one game.

According to the feature G2, it is possible to shorten the period during which the advantageous transition possible state is maintained after the advantageous gaming state ends as much as possible.

Feature G3. In the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous notification means (section display unit 67) that maintains the notification state, and
When the advantageous shiftable situation ends when the advantageous game state ends, the advantageous notification control means (step S1809 in the main MPU 72) sets the advantageous notification means in a non-notification state when the advantageous shiftable situation ends. , Step S1814, step S2015, step S2408 and step S2417) and
The gaming machine according to the feature G1 or G2, which comprises the above-mentioned feature G1 or G2.

According to the feature G3, since the advantageous notification means for maintaining the notification state in the advantageous gaming state is provided, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the notification state is in the advantageous gaming state. In this case, when the advantageous transition possible situation ends by the end of the advantageous game state, the advantageous transferable situation ends after the predetermined number of games have been executed after the advantageous game state ends. The means is in a non-notification state. As a result, it is possible to maintain the notification state of the advantageous notification means for a predetermined number of games even after the advantageous game state ends.

Feature G4. Execution of the continuation determination means (step S2704 and steps S3016 to S3020 in the main MPU 72) for determining whether or not to continue the advantageous gaming state after the number of continuous games remaining in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0 games. Function to do) and
When it is decided to continue by the continuation determination means, the number of continuous games in the advantageous gaming state is newly set, and the continuous execution means (steps S310 to step S3112 and steps in the main MPU 72 to continue the advantageous gaming state). (Function to execute the process of S3401 to step S3404) and
The gaming machine described in G3, which is characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G4, the advantageous gaming state may continue after the number of continuous games remaining in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0 games. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect that the advantageous gaming state will continue even if the number of continuous games remaining in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0 games. Further, when the advantageous gaming state ends with the configuration of the above feature G3, the advantageous notification means does not notify when the advantageous transition possible situation ends after the predetermined number of games have been executed after the advantageous gaming state ends. It becomes a state. As a result, even if the number of continuous games remaining in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0 and the advantageous gaming state ends without continuing, the advantageous notification means is in the notification state until the predetermined number of games is executed. Therefore, even if the player confirms the advantageous game state, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to specify whether or not the advantageous game state actually ends.

Feature G5. An effect control means (effect side MPU 92) that enables the player to recognize whether or not to continue the advantageous game state after the number of continuous games remaining in the advantageous game state becomes 0 games. (A function to execute the production control process for the pseudo bonus in
When the advantageous gaming state is continued after the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0 games, the effect control means is used in a game in which the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state is 0 games. Means for executing the continuous effect indicating that the advantageous game state continues after the effect indicating that the advantageous game state does not continue is executed (processing of steps S2910 and S2913 in the effect side MPU 92 is executed. The gaming machine according to the feature G4, which is characterized by having a function of playing a game.

According to the feature G5, an effect is executed in which the player can recognize whether or not to continue the advantageous game state after the number of continuous games remaining in the advantageous game state becomes 0 games, which is advantageous through the effect. It is possible to increase the expectation that the game state will be continued. In this case, when the advantageous gaming state ends with the configuration of the above feature G3, the advantageous notification means ends when the advantageous transition possible situation ends after the predetermined number of games have been executed after the advantageous gaming state ends. It becomes a non-notification state. As a result, even when the effect indicating that the advantageous gaming state does not continue is executed when the number of continuous games remaining in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0 games and the advantageous gaming state ends without continuing. Since the advantageous notification means is maintained in the notification state until the predetermined number of games is executed, it is not possible to specify whether or not the advantageous gaming state actually ends even if the player confirms the advantageous notification means. It becomes possible. Therefore, even in such a situation, it is possible to expect the player to execute the continuous production.

Feature G6. When the predetermined end condition of the advantageous shiftable situation is satisfied, another termination means for terminating both the advantageous shiftable situation and the advantageous game state in the same game (affirmative determination is made in step S2006 in the main MPU 72). The feature G1 to G5 is characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S2014 and a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2013 of the main MPU 72 and executing the process of step S2014). Described gaming machine.

According to the feature G6, when the predetermined end condition of the advantageous shiftable situation is satisfied, both the advantageous shiftable situation and the advantageous game state are terminated in the same game. Therefore, when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the predetermined end condition is satisfied. It is possible to immediately end the advantageous transition possible situation.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G6, wherein the predetermined end condition is satisfied when the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable situation reaches the upper limit number of games.

According to the feature G7, since the advantageous shiftable situation ends based on the number of games executed in the advantageous shiftable situation reaching the upper limit number of games, the advantageous shiftable situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature G8. The predetermined end condition is to execute the game when the advantageous shiftable situation continues from the total number of game media granted by the game executed when the advantageous shiftable situation continues. When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of digested game media is used as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as the predetermined reference value, and the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value is the upper limit. The gaming machine according to feature G6 or G7, which is established when the difference is reached.

According to the feature G8, the advantageous shiftable situation ends when the increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous shiftable situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so that the advantageous shiftable situation becomes excessive. It is possible to prevent it from continuing for a long time.

Feature G9. The advantageous transition means is a means for shifting to the advantageous gaming state when the revival condition is satisfied by the time the predetermined number of games is executed in the situation where the advantageous transition is possible after the advantageous gaming state is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G8, which comprises (a function of executing end preparation state processing of the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment).

According to the feature G9, even after the advantageous gaming state ends, if the advantageous transition possible situation continues, the revival condition is satisfied, and the advantageous gaming state is resumed. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect to shift to the advantageous gaming state again even after the advantageous gaming state is completed.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G9, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D5, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. From the total number of game media granted by the game executed when the special situation (second section SC2) continues, the game medium digested to execute the game when the special situation continues. When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of Difference update execution means for executing the number update process (function for executing the processes of steps S2008 to S2010 in the main MPU 72) and
Whether or not the predetermined difference number information stored in the difference number storage means is information corresponding to the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value reaching the upper limit difference number. Achievement determination means (a function of executing the process of step S2013 in the main MPU 72) for executing the arrival determination process for determining
In the arrival determination process, the information corresponding to the predetermined difference number information stored in the difference number storage means has reached the upper limit difference number by the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value. Based on the determination that the above special situation is satisfied, the difference corresponding termination means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2013 in the main MPU 72 and executing the process of step S2014)
With
When a replay prize (replay prize) is established, it is possible to start a new game with the same number of game media as the number of game media bet set in the game in which the replay prize is established. It is a composition that becomes
The arrival determination means is a gaming machine characterized in that the arrival determination process is executed even in a game in which the re-game winning is established in the special situation.

According to the feature H1, the special situation is terminated based on the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the special situation reaching the upper limit difference number, so that the special situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to do so. In this case, when the re-game winning is established in the special situation, the predetermined difference number information stored in the difference number storage means is determined from the predetermined reference value even though the predetermined difference number does not change. The arrival determination process for determining whether or not the information corresponding to the increase in the difference number has reached the upper limit difference number is executed. As a result, even if the upper limit difference has already been reached in the game before the game in which the replay prize was established, but it is overlooked due to noise or the like, after that. It is possible to identify that the upper limit difference has been reached in the game in which the re-game winning is established, and it is possible to prevent the special situation that should have ended from continuing.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the difference update executing means does not execute the difference update process in a game in which the re-game winning is established in the special situation.

According to the feature H2, since the difference update process is not executed in the game in which the re-game prize is established, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the game in which the re-game prize is established. Further, in the game in which the re-game winning is established in this way, even if the difference update process is not executed, the arrival determination process for determining whether or not the upper limit difference number has been reached is executed as described above. NS. As a result, even if the configuration is designed to reduce the processing load as described above, it is possible to prevent the special situation that would otherwise end from being continued.

Feature H3. Termination means corresponding to the number of games for ending the special situation based on the number of games executed in the special situation reaching the upper limit number of games (Affirmative determination is made in step S2006 in the main MPU 72, and the process of step S2014 The gaming machine according to the feature H1 or H2, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the feature H3, since the special situation ends when the number of games executed in the special situation reaches the upper limit number of games, it is possible to prevent the special situation from continuing for an excessively long time. It becomes. In addition, since the special situation ends based on reaching the upper limit number of games in this way, it is determined that the upper limit difference number has been reached in the game in which the replay winning is established, and the special situation ends. Even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature H4. In the special situation, the advantageous transition means (steps S2403 to S2405 in the main MPU 72) for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, ART state ST6) that is advantageous to the player, A function for executing the processes of steps S2413 and S2414) is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, characterized in that the advantageous gaming state is terminated when the special situation is terminated by the termination means corresponding to the difference number.

According to the feature H4, since the advantageous gaming state is executed in the special situation, it is possible to limit the situation in which the advantageous gaming state is executed. In this case, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features H1 to H4, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D5, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Game number updating means for updating the number of continuous games remaining in the unit execution time by executing the game in the unit execution time (first unit execution time ST12) (function for executing the process of step S3101 in the main MPU 72) When,
A start determining means for determining whether or not to start a new execution time of the unit execution time after the unit execution time of the currently executed execution time is completed (a function of executing the process of step S3017 in the main MPU 72). )When,
Granted game number determining means (mainly) for determining the number of granted games to be granted as the number of continuous games of the new execution times in a situation where the start determination means has not determined to start a new execution time of the unit execution times. Function to execute the next set addition process on the side MPU 72),
When the new execution times are started based on the determination by the start determination means to start a new execution time of the unit execution times, the number of grant games determined by the grant game number determination means. Is given as the number of continuous games of the new execution times (a function of executing the process of step S3404 in the main MPU 72) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature I1, even in the situation where it is not decided to start a new execution time, the number of granted games to be given as the number of continuous games of the new execution time is determined, and the new execution time is actually performed. When started, the determined number of granted games is given as the number of continuous games of the new execution times. This makes it possible to determine in advance the number of games to be granted when a new execution time is started, and when a new execution time is started, the new execution time is given. It is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the number of granted games before the start of.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the granting game number determining means determines the number of granted games before the final game of the execution times currently being executed is started.

According to the feature I2, since the number of granted games is determined before the final game of the currently executed execution times is started, the game is executed next to the execution times in the final game of the currently executed execution times. It is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of granted games given to the obtained execution times.

Feature I3. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein the granting game number determining means determines the number of granting games of the execution times that can be executed next to the execution times in the currently executed execution times.

According to the feature I3, since the number of granted games is determined only for the execution times to be executed next, it is not necessary to cumulatively store the plurality of granted games.

Feature I4. The means for determining the number of granted games is characterized in that when a new execution number of the unit execution times is started, the number of the granted games of the execution times that can be executed next to the new execution times is determined. The gaming machine according to any one of I1 to I3.

According to the feature I4, when a new execution time of the unit execution time is started, the number of games to be granted the execution time that can be executed next to the new execution time is determined. It is possible to determine the number of games to be granted at an early stage.

Feature I5. The start determining means is characterized in that, when the final game of the currently executed execution times is started, it is determined whether or not to start a new execution time after the execution times are completed. The gaming machine according to any one of I4.

According to the feature I5, when the final game of the currently executed execution times is started, it is determined whether or not to start a new execution time after the execution time is completed. It is possible to shorten the period from the decision to start to the start of a new execution time.

Feature I6. In the currently executed execution times, the production of the production contents (normal continuous production, special continuous production) corresponding to the number of granted games given to the execution times that can be executed next to the execution times is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, characterized in that it is provided with means for making the game (a function of executing the process of steps S351 to S3512 in the effect side MPU 92).

According to the feature I6, in the currently executed execution times, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of granted games given to the execution times that can be executed next to the execution times, and the next execution times. It is possible to draw the player's attention not only to whether or not the occurrence of the game occurs, but also to the number of games granted for the next execution time.

Feature I7. When it is determined by the start determination means to start a new execution time of the unit execution time, a start correspondence effect corresponding to the start of a new execution time in the currently executed execution time (normal continuation). It is provided with a start-corresponding effect control means (a function of executing the process of steps S351 to S3512 in the effect side MPU 92) so that the effect and the special continuous effect are executed.
One of the features I1 to I6, wherein the start-corresponding effect control means determines the effect content of the start-corresponding effect in an manner corresponding to the number of granted games determined by the granted game number determining means. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature I7, the player who confirms the start-corresponding effect is newly determined by determining the effect content of the start-corresponding effect corresponding to the start of a new execution time in a manner corresponding to the number of granted games. It is possible not only to know that a new execution time is started, but also to predict or grasp the number of games to be granted for the new execution time. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the start response effect.

Feature I8. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I7, wherein the granting game number determining means determines the number of granted games by lottery.

According to the feature I8, it is possible to diversify the number of granted games.

Feature I9. When a new execution time of the unit execution time is started, the game number giving means determines the number of given games determined by the given game number determining means with respect to the initial number of games of the new execution time. The game machine according to any one of features I1 to I8, which is characterized by adding.

According to the feature I9, the number of granted games is given as an additional number of games to the number of continuous games in the execution times of the unit execution times. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the number of granted games.

In addition, with respect to the composition of the features I1 to I9, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D5, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. Situation setting means (function to execute the process of step S1805 in the main MPU 72) to be set in the advantageous transition possible situation (second section SC2), and
In the case of the advantageous transition possible situation, the advantageous transition means (step S2403 to step in the main MPU 72) for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state (preparation state ST4, pseudo bonus state ST5, ART state ST6) advantageous to the player. (Function to execute the processes of S2405, step S2413 and step S2414) and
The advantageous notification means (section display unit 67) in which the notification state is maintained in the advantageous gaming state, and
An advantageous notification control means (a function of executing the processes of step S1809, step S1814, step S2015, step S2408, and step S2417 in the main MPU 72) that controls the advantageous notification means.
With
The advantageous notification control means is
A means for maintaining the advantageous notification means in a non-notification state when the advantageous transition possible situation is reached, and then changing the advantageous notification means from the non-notification state to the notification state when the advantageous gaming state is entered. (Function to execute the processing of step S1815, step S2408 and step S2417) in the main MPU 72)
If the advantageous shiftable situation continues even after the advantageous gaming state ends, the means for maintaining the advantageous notification means in the notification state even after the advantageous gaming state ends (affirmed in step S2802 in the main MPU 72). Function to make a judgment) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature J1, since the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the advantageous transition possible situation, it is possible to limit the transition to the advantageous gaming state. Further, since the advantageous notification means for maintaining the notification state in the advantageous game state is provided, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the user is in the advantageous game state.

In this case, the advantageous notification means may be maintained in the non-notification state even if the advantageous transition is possible, and then the advantageous notification means may be in the notification state when the advantageous gaming state is entered. As a result, the advantageous notification means is maintained in the notification state in the advantageous gaming state, while the advantageous notification means is maintained in the non-notification state in the gaming state in which the advantageous transition is possible and not in the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to create a situation. Therefore, even if the advantageous notification means is in the non-notification state, there is a possibility that the advantageous transition is possible, and the player is expected to be in the advantageous transition possible state even if the advantageous notification means is in the non-notification state. It becomes possible.

Further, even if the advantageous gaming state ends, if the advantageous transition possible situation continues, the advantageous notification means is maintained in the notification state even after the advantageous gaming state ends. As a result, it becomes possible for the player playing the game with the gaming machine to recognize that the advantageous transition possible situation continues even after the end of the advantageous gaming state.

Feature J2. The advantageous notification control means is characterized by including means for setting the advantageous notification means to a non-notification state (a function of executing the process of step S2015 in the main MPU 72) when the advantageous shiftable situation ends. Features The gaming machine described in J1.

According to the feature J2, when the advantageous transition possible situation ends, the advantageous notification means is changed to the non-notification state. Therefore, it is confirmed that the advantageous notification means has changed from the notification state to the non-notification state. It becomes possible to grasp that has been completed.

Features J3. The advantageous notification control means executes the processes of step S1809 and step S1814 in the main MPU 72 to change the advantageous notification means from the non-notification state to the notification state when the advantageous transition is possible. The gaming machine according to the feature J1 or J2, which is characterized by having a function of performing.

According to the feature J3, when the advantageous transition is possible, the advantageous notification means can change from the non-notification state to the notification state, so that the player other than the player who has continued the game with the game machine is advantageous. Even if it is confirmed that the notification means is in the notification state, it can be determined whether the advantageous transition possible situation is continued even after the advantageous transition means is completed, or the advantageous transition possible situation is newly generated. It is possible to make it impossible to grasp.

Features J4. The start-corresponding control means changes the advantageous notification means from the non-notification state to the notification state even if the advantage transition state is not entered when the advantageous transition possible state is reached. J3 The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature J4, when the advantageous transition is possible, the advantageous notification means changes from the non-notification state to the notification state even if the transition to the advantageous transition state is not performed. As a result, the situation in which the advantageous notification means is in the notification state in the state where the advantageous transition is possible and not in the advantageous gaming state is maintained except when the advantageous transition possible state is maintained even after the advantageous gaming state is completed. Can also be generated.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features J1 to J4, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D5, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to each feature of the feature B group to the feature J group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration in which an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit are provided as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to make the game content suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. Numerical update means (second random number circuit 76) for updating numerical information,
An acquisition means for acquiring the numerical information updated by the numerical update means when an acquisition opportunity occurs (a function of executing the process of step S3212 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a main in the fifth embodiment). (Function to execute the process of step S3910 in the side MPU 72) and
Predetermined determination means for executing a predetermined determination process for determining whether or not the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information (in the first embodiment, the process of step S3213 in the main MPU 72). The function of executing the process of step S3911 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment) and
Correspondence processing execution means (in the first embodiment, step S3215 in the main MPU 72) that executes the correspondence processing based on the determination that the numerical information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information in the predetermined determination processing. The function of executing the process, in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3913 in the main MPU 72),
With
In a predetermined situation (starting game of unit execution times ST12 and ST13), a predetermined waiting period (first waiting period and second waiting period in the first embodiment, interrupt of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 74) in the fifth embodiment). Each time the period (cycle and second waiting period) elapses, the numerical information is acquired by the acquisition means, and the predetermined determination process is executed by the predetermined determination means for the acquired numerical information. A game machine to be.

According to the feature K1, in the predetermined situation, every time the predetermined waiting period elapses, the numerical information is acquired from the same numerical update means and the predetermined determination process is executed for the acquired numerical information. This makes it possible to repeatedly execute the predetermined determination process while using the same numerical value updating means.

Feature K2. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the predetermined waiting period is set to a period longer than the period required for the numerical information updating means to update the numerical information once.

According to the feature K2, since the predetermined waiting period is set to a period longer than the period required for the numerical information to be updated once in the numerical update means, the numerical information is acquired once and then the numerical information is next. By the time the numerical value is acquired, the numerical information is updated at least once in the numerical update means, and even if the acquisition of the numerical information is repeated in a short period of time, all the numerical ranges are to be acquired at each acquisition timing. It is possible to make it.

Feature K3. Specific processing execution means (timer interrupt processing in the fifth embodiment) that executes specific processing (timer interrupt processing in the fifth embodiment) each time a specific period (interrupt cycle of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 74)) elapses. Has a function to execute)
In the specific process, the process of acquiring the numerical information by the acquisition means is executed.
The gaming machine according to feature K1 or K2, wherein the predetermined waiting period is a period equal to or longer than the specific period, or the predetermined waiting period is the specific period.

According to the feature K3, it is possible to secure at least a predetermined waiting period or at least a part of the predetermined waiting period by using the specific period in which the execution of the specific process is waited.

Features K4. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, wherein the predetermined waiting period is a variable period.

According to the feature K4, since the predetermined waiting period is a period in which the predetermined waiting period can fluctuate, it is possible to prevent the acquisition interval of the numerical information from becoming constant.

Feature K5. The predetermined wait period includes a first predetermined wait period (first standby period in the first embodiment, interrupt cycle of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 74) in the fifth embodiment) and a second predetermined wait period (second). Waiting period) is included
The first predetermined waiting period is set to a period longer than the period required for the numerical information updating means to update the numerical information once.
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, wherein the second predetermined waiting period is a period that can fluctuate.

According to the feature K5, since the first predetermined waiting period is set to a period longer than the period required for the numerical information to be updated once in the numerical update means, it is next after the numerical information is acquired once. By the time the numerical information is acquired, the numerical information is updated at least once by the numerical updating means, and even if the acquisition of the numerical information is repeated in a short period of time, all the numerical ranges are covered at each acquisition timing. It is possible to make it an acquisition target. Further, since the second predetermined waiting period is a variable period, it is possible to prevent the acquisition interval of numerical information from becoming constant. In particular, since the second predetermined waiting period set separately from the first predetermined waiting period is a variable period, the numerical updating means from the time when the numerical information is acquired once to the time when the numerical information is acquired next. It is possible to prevent the acquisition interval of the numerical information from becoming constant while ensuring that the update of the numerical information in the above is performed at least once.

Feature K6. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, wherein the predetermined situation ends when it is determined by the predetermined determination process that the numerical information does not correspond to the predetermined correspondence information. ..

According to the feature K6, it is possible to prevent the predetermined situation from continuing for an excessively long time.

Feature K7. The predetermined situations K1 to K6 are characterized in that the predetermined situation ends when the number of times the predetermined determination process is executed for the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means at different timings reaches the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature K7, it is possible to prevent the predetermined situation from continuing for an excessively long time.

Feature K8. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operating means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of a pattern in the pattern display means, and
A game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets the game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are bet set. ,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the game is executed.
The stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44).
A symbol display that controls the symbol display means so that the variable display of the symbol is started when the game is executed and the variable display of the symbol is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Winning correspondence control means (a function of executing the processing of step S310 and step S311 in the main MPU 72) for executing correspondence control, and
A means for starting the predetermined situation when the game is executed (in the first embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step S3201 in the main MPU 72).
With
Any of the features K1 to K7, wherein the end condition of the predetermined situation is set so that the predetermined situation ends from the execution status of the game to the start of the variable display of the pattern. The gaming machine described in 1 or 1.

According to the feature K8, since the predetermined situation is completed by the time the variable display of the pattern is started, the game in which the predetermined situation occurs is played in a manner based on the result of the predetermined determination process repeatedly performed in the predetermined situation. It is possible to let a person do it.

Feature K9. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
A start operating means (start lever 41) operated to start variable display of a pattern in the pattern display means, and
A game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets the game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are bet set. ,
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process when the game is executed.
The stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44).
A symbol display that controls the symbol display means so that the variable display of the symbol is started when the game is executed and the variable display of the symbol is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function to execute reel control processing in the main MPU 72),
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Winning correspondence control means (a function of executing the processing of step S310 and step S311 in the main MPU 72) for executing correspondence control, and
A means for starting the predetermined situation when the game is executed (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S3902 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment) and
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K7, wherein the predetermined situation can be continued even after the variable display of the pattern.

According to the feature K9, since the predetermined situation can be continued even after the variable display of the pattern, it is possible to secure a long period in which the predetermined determination process is repeatedly executed.

Feature K10. A function of executing the processing of steps S320 to S3210 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, which changes the predetermined waiting period set thereafter according to the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K9, characterized in that, in the fifth embodiment, the main MPU 72 has a function of executing the processes of steps S3903 to S3908).

According to the feature K10, since the predetermined waiting period is a period in which the predetermined waiting period can fluctuate, it is possible to prevent the acquisition interval of the numerical information from becoming constant. Further, since the configuration is such that the predetermined waiting period is changed by using the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means, it is possible to change the predetermined waiting period while suppressing the complexity of the configuration.

Features K11. The period variation means
Means for setting a reference numerical value (variation numerical value) corresponding to the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means (a function of executing the process of step S3207 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, main in the fifth embodiment). (Function to execute the process of step S3905 in the side MPU 72) and
The magnitude determination means for determining the magnitude relationship between the numerical value corresponding to the information stored in the number information storage means (repetition count counter 74 g) and the reference numerical value (in the first embodiment, the process of step S3208 in the main MPU 72 is performed. A function to execute, in the fifth embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S3906 in the main MPU 72),
When the magnitude relationship is determined by the magnitude determining means, the information is stored in the number of times information storage means by executing an information update process for updating the information stored in the number of times information storing means. Number of times updating means for making the information to be information corresponding to the number of times the magnitude relation is determined (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3209 in the main MPU 72, the fifth embodiment). Then, the function of executing the process of step S3907 in the main MPU 72) and
When the information of the number-of-times storage means updated by the number-of-times updating means is not the end information, the means for making the magnitude-relationship determination by the magnitude-determining means again (the main side in the first embodiment). A function of making a negative judgment in step S3210 in the MPU 72, and a function of making a negative judgment in step S3908 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment).
With
The acquisition means acquires the numerical information after the information of the number storage means updated by the number update means becomes the end information.
The gaming machine according to feature K10, wherein the period from the start of the determination of the magnitude relationship to the start of the information update process varies according to the determination result of the magnitude relationship.

According to the feature K11, it is possible to change the predetermined waiting period by using the reference value corresponding to the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means and the number of times the magnitude relationship is determined.

Feature K12. The gaming machine according to feature K11, wherein the maximum value of the reference value matches the number of ends corresponding to the end information.

According to the feature K12, since the maximum value of the reference value and the number of ends are the same, it is possible to make the predetermined waiting period different if the reference value is different.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features K1 to K12, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D5, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. Numerical value setting means for setting a reference numerical value (variation numerical value) (a function of executing the process of step S3207 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S3905 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment. )When,
The magnitude determination means for determining the magnitude relationship between the numerical value corresponding to the information stored in the number information storage means (repetition count counter 74 g) and the reference numerical value (in the first embodiment, the process of step S3208 in the main MPU 72 is performed. A function to execute, in the fifth embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S3906 in the main MPU 72),
When the magnitude relationship is determined by the magnitude determining means, the information is stored in the number of times information storage means by executing an information update process for updating the information stored in the number of times information storing means. Number of times updating means for making the information to be information corresponding to the number of times the magnitude relation is determined (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3209 in the main MPU 72, the fifth embodiment). Then, the function of executing the process of step S3907 in the main MPU 72) and
When the information of the number-of-times storage means updated by the number-of-times updating means is not the end information, the means for making the magnitude-relationship determination by the magnitude-determining means again (the main side in the first embodiment). A function of making a negative judgment in step S3210 in the MPU 72, and a function of making a negative judgment in step S3908 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment).
After the information of the number of times storage means updated by the number of times update means becomes the end information, the special process execution means for executing the special process (in the first embodiment, the process of step S3212 in the main MPU 72 is executed. Function, in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3910 in the main MPU 72) and
With
A gaming machine characterized in that the period from the start of the determination of the magnitude relationship to the start of the information update process varies according to the determination result of the magnitude relationship.

According to the feature L1, the period from the start of the magnitude relationship determination to the start of the information update process varies depending on the magnitude relationship determination result, so that the special process is executed according to the reference value. It is possible to change the period required for. This makes it possible to prevent the period in which the special processing is executed from being constant.

Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the reference numerical value fluctuates according to the result of the special processing executed prior to the setting of the reference numerical value this time by the numerical value setting means.

According to the feature L2, it is possible to make use of the result of the special processing executed before so that the cycle in which the special processing is executed is not constant.

Feature L3. The gaming machine according to feature L1 or L2, wherein the maximum value of the reference value matches the number of ends corresponding to the end information.

According to the feature L3, since the maximum value of the reference value and the number of ends are the same, it is possible to make the predetermined waiting period different if the reference value is different.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features L1 to L3, the features A1 to A23, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D5, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G9, and the features H1 to H1 One or a plurality of configurations of H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to each feature of the feature K group and the feature L group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a dish storage section for storing game balls given to a player is provided on the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage section are guided to a game ball launcher. , Is fired toward the game area according to the player's firing operation. Then, for example, when the game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is dispensed from the payout device to the dish storage section, for example. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine, a configuration in which an upper plate storage unit and a lower plate storage unit are provided as a plate storage unit is also known. In this case, a game ball stored in the upper plate storage unit launches a game ball. Guided by the device, the excess game balls in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in the situation where the medal is bet, the lottery process is executed by the control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the winning combination.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to appropriately perform the processing, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: The rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and the player according to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that gives special benefits to pachinko machines.

10 ... Slot machine, 31 ... Reel unit, 41 ... Start lever, 42-44 ... Stop button, 57 ... Setting key insertion hole, 67 ... Section display, 72 ... Main side MPU, 74 ... Main side RAM, 74c ... Continue Game number counter, 74d ... Total acquisition number counter, 74g ... Repeat count counter, 76 ... Second random number circuit, 92 ... Directing side MPU, G12 ... Non-internal notification image, G13 ... First internal explicit image, SC2 ... Second section , ST2 ... 1st CB state, ST3 ... 2nd CB state, ST4 ... Preparation state, ST5 ... Pseudo bonus state, ST6 ... ART state, ST12 ... 1st unit execution time, ST13 ... 2nd unit execution time.

Claims (1)

A predetermined storage execution means for storing predetermined game information in the information storage means,
Progress control means to control the progress of the game,
A notification control means that executes notification processing based on the information transmitted by the progress control means is provided.
When the predetermined game information is stored in the information storage means, the game status is set to the predetermined game status.
The progress control means
Profit-giving processing execution means for executing profit-giving processing in a manner corresponding to the setting value set as the target of use from the setting values of a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage,
A setting-related execution means for executing a predetermined setting-related process related to the set value, and
When the setting-related processing is executed, a predetermined erasing means for executing a predetermined erasing process for erasing the information stored in the information storage means, and a predetermined erasing means.
With
The predetermined erasing means is configured to prevent the predetermined game information from being included in the erasure target when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the predetermined erasing process.
After executing the predetermined erasing process, the progress control means transmits specific information to the notification control means so that the notification control means can specify whether or not the predetermined game information is stored in the information storage means. Have the means to
When the notification control means receives the specific information corresponding to the fact that the predetermined game information is not stored in the information storage means, the information storage means corresponds to the fact that the predetermined game information is not stored in the information storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing a notification process.

Images